User’s Guide
ENCORE SERIES® SOFTWARE
3-349-520-03
1/9.08
!
Attention!
Death, serious injury, or fire hazard could result from improper connection of this instrument. Read and understand this manual before connecting this instrument. Follow all installation and operating instructions while using this instrument.
Connection of this instrument must be performed in compliance with the National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70-2008) of
USA and any additional safety requirements applicable to your installation.
Installation, operation, and maintenance of this instrument must be performed by qualified personnel only. The National Electrical Code defines a qualified person as “one who has the skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of
the electrical equipment and installations, and who has received safety training on the hazards involved.”
Qualified personnel who work on or near exposed energized electrical conductors must follow applicable safety related work
practices and procedures including appropriate personal protective equipment in compliance with the Standard for Electrical
Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces (ANSI/NFPA 70E-2004) of USA and any additional workplace safety requirements applicable to your installation.
!
Atención!
Una conexión incorrecta de este instrumento puede producir la muerte, lesiones graves y riesgo de incendio. Lea y entienda
este manual antes de conectar. Observe todas las instrucciones de instalación y operación durante el uso de este instrumento.
La conexión de este instrumento debe ser hecha de acuerdo con las normas del Código Eléctrico Nacional (ANSI/NFPA 702008) de EE. UU., además de cualquier otra norma de seguridad correspondiente a su establecimiento.
La instalación, operación y mantenimiento de este instrumento debe ser realizada por personal calificado solamente. El Código Eléctrico Nacional define a una persona calificada como “una que esté familiarizada con la construcción y operación del
equipo y con los riesgos involucrados.”
El personal cualificado que trabaja encendido o acerca a los conductores eléctricos energizados expuestos debe seguir prácticas y procedimientos relacionados seguridad aplicable del trabajo incluyendo el equipo protector personal apropiado en
conformidad con el estándar para los requisitos de seguridad eléctricos para los lugares de trabajo del empleado (ANSI/NFPA
70E-2004) de los E.E.U.U. y cualquier requisito de seguridad adicional del lugar de trabajo aplicable a su instalación.
!
Attention!
Si l’instrument est mal connecté, la mort, des blessures graves, ou un danger d’incendie peuvent s’en suivre. Lisez attentivement ce manuel avant de connecter l’instrument. Lorsque vous utilisez l’instrument, suivez toutes les instructions d’installation
et de service.
Cet instrument doit être connecté conformément au National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70-2008) des Etats-Unis et à toutes
les exigences de sécurité applicables à votre installation.
Cet instrument doit être installé, utilisé et entretenu uniquement par un personnel qualifié. Selon le National Electrical Code,
une personne est qualifiée si “elle connaît bien la construction et l’utilisation de l’équipement, ainsi que les dangers que cela
implique.”
Le personnel qualifié qui travaillent dessus ou s'approchent des conducteurs électriques activés exposés doit suivre des pratiques en matière et des procédures reliées par sûreté applicable de travail comprenant le matériel de protection personnel
approprié conformément à la norme pour des conditions de sûreté électriques pour les lieux de travail des employés (ANSI/
NFPA 70E-2004) des Etats-Unis et toutes les conditions de sûreté additionnelles de lieu de travail applicables à votre installation.
!
Achtung!
Der falsche Anschluss dieses Gerätes kann Tod, schwere Verletzungen oder Feuer verursachen. Bevor Sie dieses Instrument
anschließen, müssen Sie die Anleitung lesen und verstanden haben. Bei der Verwendung dieses Instruments müssen alle Installation- und Betriebsanweisungen beachtet werden.
Der Anschluss dieses Instruments muss in Übereinstimmung mit den nationalen Bestimmungen für Elektrizität (ANSI/NFPA
70-2008) der Vereinigten Staaten, sowie allen weiteren, in Ihrem Fall anwendbaren Sicherheitsbestimmungen, vorgenommen
werden.
Installation, Betrieb und Wartung dieses Instruments dürfen nur von Fachpersonal durchgeführt werden. In dem nationalen
Bestimmungen für Elektrizität wird ein Fachmann als eine Person bezeichnet, welche “mit der Bauweise und dem Betrieb des
Gerätes sowie den dazugehörigen Gefahren vertraut ist.”
Fachpersonal, das mit oder neben berührbaren und stromführenden elektrischen Leitern arbeitet, muss die gültigen Richtlinien und Verfahren in Bezug auf Arbeitssicherheit einhalten einschließlich der geeigneten persönlichen Schutzausrüstung
gemäß der US Norm für elektrische Sicherheitsbestimmungen am Arbeitsplatz (ANSI/NFPA 70E-2004) sowie zusätzliche Arbeitssicherheitsbestimmungen, die für die jeweilige Anlage gelten.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–i
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Safety Summary
Definitions
WARNING statements inform the user that certain conditions or practices could result in loss of life or physical harm.
CAUTION statements identify conditions or practices that could harm the Mavosys 10, its data, other equipment, or property.
NOTE statements call attention to specific information.
Symbols
The following International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) symbols are marked on the top and rear panel in the immediate vicinity of
the referenced terminal or device:
!
Caution, refer to accompanying documents (this manual).
Alternating current (ac) operation of the terminal or device.
Direct current (DC) operation of the terminal or device.
Protective conductor terminal.
Definiciones
Las ADVERTENCIAS informan al usuario de ciertas condiciones o prácticas que podrían producir lesiones mortales o daño físico.
Las PRECAUCIONES identifican condiciones o prácticas que podrían dañar la Mavosys 10, sus datos, otros equipos o propiedad.
Las NOTAS llaman la atención hacia la información específica.
Símbolos
Los siguientes símbolos de la Comisión Internacional Electrotécnica (IEC) aparecen marcados en el panel superior y el posterior inmediatos al terminal o dispositivo en referencia:
!
Precaución, consulte los documentos adjuntos (este manual).
Operación de corriente alterna (ca) del terminal o dispositivo.
Operación de corriente continua (CC) del terminal o dispositivo.
Terminal de protección del conductor.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–ii
Définitions
Les messages d’AVERTISSEMENT préviennent l’utilisateur que certaines conditions ou pratiques pourraient entraîner la mort ou des
lésions corporelles.
Les messages de MISE EN GARDE signalent des conditions ou pratiques susceptibles d’endommager “Mavosys 10”, ses données,
d’autres équipements ou biens matériels.
Les messages NOTA attirent l’attention sur certains renseignements spécifiques.
Symboles
Les symboles suivants de la Commission électrotechnique internationale (CEI) figurent sur le panneau arrière supérieur situé à proximité du terminal ou de l’unité cité:
!
Mise en garde, consultez les documents d’accompagnement (ce manual).
Fonctionnement du terminal ou du dispositif sur le courant alternatif (c.a.).
Fonctionnement du terminal ou de l’unité en courant continu (CC).
Borne conductrice de protection.
Definitionen
WARNUNGEN informieren den Benutzer darüber, dass bestimmte Bedingungen oder Vorgehensweisen körperliche oder tödliche Verletzungen zur Folge haben können.
VORSICHTSHINWEISE kennzeichnen Bedingungen oder Vorgehensweisen, die zu einer Beschädigung von Mavosys 10, seiner Daten
oder anderer Geräte bzw. von Eigentum führen können.
HINWEISE machen auf bestimmte Informationen aufmerksam.
Symbole
Die folgenden Symbole der Internationalen Elektrotechnischen Kommission (International Electrotechnical Commission; IEC) befinden
sich auf der Abdeck- und Seitenplatte unmittelbar am betreffenden Terminal oder Gerät.
!
Vorsichtshinweis, siehe Begleitdokumente (dieses Handbuch).
Wechselstrombetrieb des Terminals bzw. Geräts.
Gleichstrombetrieb im Terminal oder Gerät.
Terminal-Schutzleiter.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–iii
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Safety precautions
The following safety precautions must be followed whenever any type of connection is being made to the instrument.
• Connect the green safety (earth) ground first, before making any other connections.
• When connecting to electric circuits or pulse initiating equipment, open their related breakers. DO NOT install any connection of the instrument on live power lines.
• Connections must be made to the instrument first, then connect to the circuit to be monitored.
• Wear proper personal protective equipment, including safety glasses and insulated gloves when making connections to
power circuits.
• Hands, shoes and floor must be dry when making any connection to a power line.
• Make sure the unit is turned OFF before connecting probes to the rear panel.
• Before each use, inspect all cables for breaks or cracks in the insulation. Replace immediately if defective.
Medidas de seguridad
Las medidas de seguridad siguientes deberán observarse cuando se realice cualquier tipo de conexión al instrumento.
• Antes de hacer cualquier conexión, deberá enchufarse el conector de seguridad verde a tierra.
• Cuando se haga conexiones a circuitos eléctricos o a equipo de activación por pulso, deberá abrirse sus respectivas cajas
de seguridad. NO deberá hacerse ninguna conexión del instrumento en líneas eléctricas bajo tensión.
• Las conexiones deberán hacerse primero al instrumento y, luego, al circuito a ser monitorizado.
• Al hacer conexiones a circuitos eléctricos, deberá utilizar anteojos y guantes protectores.
• Sus manos, zapatos y el piso deberán estar secos en todo momento en que se haga una conexión a un cable eléctrico.
• Verifique que la unidad esté DESACTIVADA antes de conectar sondas en el panel posterior.
• Previo a cada uso, deberá verificarse que los cables no estén rotos y que el material aislante no tenga rajaduras. Reemplace de inmediato cualquier parte defectuosa.
Mesures de Sécurité
Les mesures de sécurité suivantes doivent être prises chaque fois qu’un type de connexion quelconque est effectué sur l’instrument.
• Connecter d’abord la prise de terre de sécurité verte (terre) avant d’effectuer toute autre connexion.
• Ouvrir les disjoncteurs correspondants lors d’une connexion à des circuits électriques ou à des équipement de génération
d’impulsions. NE PAS effectuer de connexion d’instrument sur des lignes électriques sous tension.
• Une fois toutes les connexions de l’instrument effectuées, connecter au circuit à contrôler.
• Porter des lunettes de protection et des gants isolants pour effectuer des connexions aux circuits électriques.
• S’assurer que les mains, les chaussures et le sol soient secs lors de connexions à une ligne électrique.
• S’assurer que l’unité est ÉTEINTE avant de connecter les sondes au panneau arrière.
• Inspecter tous les câbles, avant chaque utilisation, pour s’assurer que les isolants ne sont pas coupés ou fendus. Remplacer immédiatement tous les équipements défectueux.
Sicherheitsvorkehrungen
Die folgenden Sicherheitsvorkehrungen sind immer dann zu befolgen, wenn eine Verbindung zum Instrument hergestellt wird.
• Schließen Sie zuerst die grüne Sicherheits-/Erdleitung an, bevor Sie eine andere Verbindung herstellen.
• Öffnen Sie beim Anschluss an elektrische Stromkreise oder Impulsauslösungseinrichtungen die entsprechenden Unterbrecher. Es dürfen KEINE Anschlüsse an das Instrument unter stromführenden Spannungsleitungen montiert werden.
• Die Verbindungen müssen zuerst am Instrument und danach an der zu überwachenden Schaltung hergestellt werden.
• Tragen Sie Schutzbrillen und Isolierhandschuhe, wenn Sie Anschlüsse an den Stromkreisen vornehmen.
• Hände, Schuhe und Fußboden müssen trocken sein, wenn Sie Anschlüsse an den Stromkreisen durchführen.
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass das Gerät AUSgeschaltet ist, bevor Sie an der rückwärtigen Konsole Messfühler anschließen.
• Prüfen Sie vor jedem Gebrauch alle Kabel auf Bruchstellen und Risse in der Isolierung. Wechseln Sie schadhafte Kabel
sofort aus.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–iv
FCC Statement
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area
is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense.
Warranty
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH warrants that the Encore Series Software will be free from defects in workmanship and materials for a
period of one year from the date of purchase. GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH will, without charge, replace or repair, at its option, any warranted product returned to the GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH factory service department.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH shall not be held liable for any consequential damages, including without limitation, damages resulting from
loss of use, or damages resulting from the use or misuse of this product. Some states do not allow limitations of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific rights and you may also have rights which vary from state to state.
Exclusions: This warranty does not apply in the event of misuse or abuse of the product or as a result of unauthorized repairs or alterations.
Need Help?
How to Contact GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Regardless of your location, GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH sales and product support are within easy reach through an established network of representatives and distributors worldwide.
For sales, technical support, or the name of a GMC-I Messtechnik sales representative in your area, call:
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Product Support Hotline
Phone
+49 911 8602-0
Fax
+49 911 8602-709
E-Mail
support@gossenmetrawatt.com
Welcome to the Encore Series Software
Congratulations on your purchase of the Encore Series Software.
The Encore Series Software is loaded onto the computer or the InfoNode hardware platform, and becomes a service of the computer’s Windows® operating system. Encore Series Software provides a centralized connection point for remote devices, turning the
computer into a self-contained server for a user designed power monitoring network. It requires the proper GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
computer hardware lock (called a HASP). The user interface is a conventional Internet browser, with access restricted only to users
with the correct password.
The optional DataNodes serve as data and information gathering devices, connected to the Encore Series Software via RS-485/422/
232 or Ethernet. By logging onto the Encore Series service from any computer having Internet access (or access to the network in
which the system operates) or via modem, users can obtain extensive monitoring data, information, and answers from all the connected DataNodes.
More DataNodes can be added at any time, increasing the size and capabilities of the monitoring network. The individual capabilities
and features of each different type of DataNode are covered in their own separate user’s guides.
Please read this and all user’s guides carefully to obtain the greatest value from your power monitoring equipment and to avoid damage and injury that can occur from misuse and improper connection.
☞
Note
The Encore Series software described herein is used for Mavosys 10 by GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH as well as for Encore
61000 by Dranetz-BMI.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–v
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Contents
Page
Safety Summary ...................................................................................................................................................................... ii
FCC Statement ........................................................................................................................................................................ v
Warranty .................................................................................................................................................................................. v
Need Help? .............................................................................................................................................................................. v
Welcome to the Encore Series Software ................................................................................................................................. v
1
Encore Series Software Overview ...........................................................................................................1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Encore Series Software ........................................................................................................................................................... 1
A Virtual Encore Series Software ............................................................................................................................................ 1
Encore Series Software User Interface ................................................................................................................................... 2
Encore Series Software Access Levels ................................................................................................................................... 2
2
Preparation for Use .................................................................................................................................3
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.6
Encore Series Software Package ............................................................................................................................................ 3
Contents ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
System Requirements ................................................................................................................................................................ 3
Encore Series Software Installation and Setup ....................................................................................................................... 3
Getting Started .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Encore Series Software Setup .................................................................................................................................................... 4
Authorizing the InfoNode in Windows® 2000 System for Modem Communication ............................................................... 4
Communicating with the Encore Series Software using a Web Browser ............................................................................... 5
Time Service Installation and Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 6
Getting Started .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Tardis 2000 Time Server Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 7
Encore Series Software with HASP ......................................................................................................................................... 9
3
Home Page ............................................................................................................................................11
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.4.1
3.2.4.2
3.2.5
Log-in .................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Home Page ............................................................................................................................................................................ 11
Encore Series Software Status .................................................................................................................................................. 11
DataNode Information .............................................................................................................................................................. 11
DataNode Status ..................................................................................................................................................................... 12
Quality of Supply (QOS) Compliance .......................................................................................................................................... 13
Compliance Message on DataNode Status Paragraph ................................................................................................................ 13
Compliance Message on DataNode Status Table ....................................................................................................................... 13
Encore Series Software Information .......................................................................................................................................... 13
4
Views Page ............................................................................................................................................14
4.1
4.2
General Procedures In Making Queries ................................................................................................................................. 14
Views Page ............................................................................................................................................................................ 15
5
Reports Page .........................................................................................................................................24
5.1
Reports Page ......................................................................................................................................................................... 24
6
Real-time Page .....................................................................................................................................40
6.1
Real-time Page ...................................................................................................................................................................... 40
7
Setup Page ............................................................................................................................................45
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Setup Page ............................................................................................................................................................................ 45
Configuring a GSM/GPRS Connection to a Mavosys 10 Power Quality DataNode ................................................................. 55
General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes through the Encore Series Software Setup Page ........................................... 79
Using the Template Function in DataNode Setup .................................................................................................................. 82
8
5530/5520 DataNode Setup ..................................................................................................................85
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
Template and DataNode Tabs ............................................................................................................................................... 85
Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear ...................................................................................................................... 86
Programming the Tabs .......................................................................................................................................................... 87
Identification and Status tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 87
Communication tab ................................................................................................................................................................. 88
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE-vi
Contents
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.3.8
8.3.9
8.3.10
8.3.11
8.3.12
8.3.13
8.3.14
8.3.15
8.3.16
8.3.17
8.3.18
Page
Polling tab ...............................................................................................................................................................................88
Basic tab .................................................................................................................................................................................89
Rms Variations tab ...................................................................................................................................................................90
Transients tab ..........................................................................................................................................................................92
Metering tab ............................................................................................................................................................................93
Revenue tab ............................................................................................................................................................................94
Demand tab .............................................................................................................................................................................95
Advanced Energy tab ...............................................................................................................................................................96
Advanced Metering tab ............................................................................................................................................................97
Unbalance tab .........................................................................................................................................................................98
Harmonics tab .........................................................................................................................................................................99
Flicker tab .............................................................................................................................................................................101
Advanced Harmonics tab ........................................................................................................................................................102
Transducers tab .....................................................................................................................................................................103
Advanced tab ........................................................................................................................................................................105
Accumulator Resets tab .........................................................................................................................................................106
9
5540 DataNode Setup .........................................................................................................................109
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
5540 Energy Management (EM) DataNode Setup ...............................................................................................................109
Specifications for 5540 EM DataNode .................................................................................................. 109
Template and DataNode Tabs .............................................................................................................................................110
Programming Standard Tabs ...............................................................................................................................................111
Identification and Status tab ...................................................................................................................................................111
Communication tab ................................................................................................................................................................111
Polling tab .............................................................................................................................................................................112
Basic tab ...............................................................................................................................................................................112
Advanced tab ........................................................................................................................................................................114
10
5560 QOS DataNode Setup .................................................................................................................118
10.1
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................................................118
10.2
Scope of EN50160 Standard ................................................................................................................................................118
10.3
5560 DataNode QOS Functional Components .....................................................................................................................118
10.4
5560 DataNode Specifications ............................................................................................................................................119
10.5
Home Page Reporting of QOS Compliance ..........................................................................................................................119
10.6
QOS Status View ..................................................................................................................................................................120
10.6.1 QOS Status Query ..................................................................................................................................................................120
10.6.2 QOS Status Summary .............................................................................................................................................................121
10.6.3 Compliance Statistical Graph ..................................................................................................................................................122
10.6.4 Smart Views ..........................................................................................................................................................................125
10.6.4.1 Smart Trend ..........................................................................................................................................................................125
10.6.4.2 Timeline Graphs for Smart Trends ...........................................................................................................................................126
10.7
QOS Compliance Reports .....................................................................................................................................................127
10.7.1 Smart Reports .......................................................................................................................................................................127
10.7.1.1 QOS Compliance Summary Table and Table of Contents ..........................................................................................................128
10.7.1.2 QOS Compliance Reports .......................................................................................................................................................129
10.8
Standard Reports .................................................................................................................................................................135
10.8.1 Quality of Supply ....................................................................................................................................................................135
10.9
Real-time Display of QOS Data ............................................................................................................................................136
10.10 5560 DataNode System Setup .............................................................................................................................................137
10.10.1 Quality of Supply General Setup tab ........................................................................................................................................137
10.10.2 Quality of Supply Evaluation Period tab ....................................................................................................................................138
10.10.3 Quality of Supply Limits tab ....................................................................................................................................................139
10.11 EN50160 Compliance Limits ................................................................................................................................................140
10.11.1 EN50160 Calculations and Statistics .......................................................................................................................................140
10.12 5560 DataNode Setup ..........................................................................................................................................................141
10.12.1 General Information ................................................................................................................................................................141
10.12.2 5560 DataNode .....................................................................................................................................................................141
10.12.3 Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear ..........................................................................................................................141
10.13 Template and DataNode Tabs .............................................................................................................................................142
10.14 5560 DataNode Tabs ...........................................................................................................................................................143
10.14.1 Identification and Status tab ...................................................................................................................................................143
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE-vii
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Contents
Page
10.14.2 Communication tab ............................................................................................................................................................... 144
10.14.3 Polling tab ............................................................................................................................................................................. 144
10.14.4 Basic tab .............................................................................................................................................................................. 145
10.14.5 Rms Variations tab ................................................................................................................................................................ 146
10.14.6 Transients tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 147
10.14.7 Metering tab ......................................................................................................................................................................... 148
10.14.8 Revenue tab .......................................................................................................................................................................... 149
10.14.9 Demand tab .......................................................................................................................................................................... 150
10.14.10Advanced Energy tab ............................................................................................................................................................. 151
10.14.11Advanced Metering tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 152
10.14.12Unbalance tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 153
10.14.13Harmonics tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 154
10.14.14Flicker tab ............................................................................................................................................................................. 155
10.14.15Advanced Harmonics tab ....................................................................................................................................................... 156
10.14.16Transducers tab .................................................................................................................................................................... 157
10.14.17Advanced tab ........................................................................................................................................................................ 158
10.14.18Accumulator Resets tab ......................................................................................................................................................... 159
10.15 EN50160 Compliance Default Trending Setup .................................................................................................................... 160
11
5571 DataNode Setup .........................................................................................................................162
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
11.3.4
11.3.5
11.3.6
11.3.7
5571/5571S DataNode Setup .............................................................................................................................................. 162
Template and DataNode Tabs ............................................................................................................................................. 162
Programming Standard Tabs .............................................................................................................................................. 163
Identification and Status tab ...................................................................................................................................... 163
Communication tab ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
Polling tab ............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
Basic tab ........................................................................................................................................................................... 165
Memory tab .......................................................................................................................................................................... 166
Thresholds tab ...................................................................................................................................................................... 167
Advanced tab ........................................................................................................................................................................ 167
12
Mavosys 10 Digital DataNode Setup ...................................................................................................168
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.4.1
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.4.4
12.4.5
12.4.6
12.4.7
Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 168
Template and DataNode Tabs ............................................................................................................................................. 168
Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear .................................................................................................................... 170
Programming the Tabs ........................................................................................................................................................ 170
Identification and Status tab ................................................................................................................................................... 170
Identification and Status tab ................................................................................................................................................... 170
Polling tab ............................................................................................................................................................................. 171
Input Configuration tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 172
Change of State tab ............................................................................................................................................................... 172
Counters tab ......................................................................................................................................................................... 173
Cross-Triggering tab .............................................................................................................................................................. 173
13
Mavosys 10 PQ DataNode Setup .........................................................................................................175
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.3.1
13.3.2
13.3.3
13.3.4
13.3.5
13.3.6
13.3.7
13.3.8
13.3.9
13.3.10
13.3.11
13.3.12
Template and DataNode Tabs ............................................................................................................................................. 175
Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear .................................................................................... 177
Programming the Tabs ........................................................................................................................................................ 177
Identification and Status tab ................................................................................................................................................... 177
Communication tab ............................................................................................................................................................... 178
Polling tab ............................................................................................................................................................................. 178
Input Configuration tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 179
RmsVariations tab ................................................................................................................................................................. 181
Transients tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 182
Waveform Capture tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 183
Power tab ............................................................................................................................................................................. 184
Energy and Demand tab ......................................................................................................................................................... 185
Harmonics tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 186
Flicker tab ............................................................................................................................................................................. 188
Cross-Triggering tab .............................................................................................................................................................. 189
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE-viii
Contents
Page
14
ADAM Handler Setup ...........................................................................................................................190
14.1
14.1.1
14.1.2
14.1.3
14.2
14.2.1
14.2.2
14.2.3
14.2.4
14.2.5
14.2.6
14.2.7
14.2.8
14.2.9
ADAM Instrument Handler Setup .........................................................................................................................................190
ADAM Module Connection Setup ............................................................................................................................................190
ADAM 4060 Contact Closure Module Setup .............................................................................................................................191
ADAM 4060 tab .....................................................................................................................................................................193
Template and DataNode Tabs .............................................................................................................................................193
Identification and Status tab ...................................................................................................................................................194
Communication tab ................................................................................................................................................................195
Polling tab .............................................................................................................................................................................196
Module Type tab ....................................................................................................................................................................196
Module tab ............................................................................................................................................................................197
Channel tab (for Thermocouple/General Analog Input Modules - ADAM 4018, 5018) .................................................................198
Channel tab (for General Digital Input Modules - ADAM 4050/4052, 5050/5052) ......................................................................199
Channel tab (for Counter Input Modules - ADAM 4080, 5080) ..................................................................................................200
Thresholds tab .......................................................................................................................................................................201
15
Optional Accessories ..........................................................................................................................202
15.1
15.2
Internal Software Options ....................................................................................................................................................202
ADAM Module Accessories ..................................................................................................................................................202
APPENDIX A. Quantities Calculated from Periodic Voltage and Current Measurements ...............................203
APPENDIX B. Summary of Power Quality Variations ......................................................................................204
APPENDIX C. System Parameters Affecting Power Quality and Diagnostic Evaluations ...............................206
APPENDIX D. Protocols Supported forInfoNode and DataNodes ....................................................................207
APPENDIX E. Encore Series Network Capabilities .........................................................................................208
APPENDIX F. Configuring the Mavosys 10 DataNode for Modem Communication ........................................209
APPENDIX G. Glossary ...................................................................................................................................218
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE-ix
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
1
Encore Series Software Overview
1.1
Encore Series Software
The Encore Series Software is loaded onto the computer or the InfoNode hardware platform, and becomes a service of your Windows® operating system. The computer acts as a web server for Encore Series. This computer-centric design allows you to manage
information through the computer, without the need to install and set up separate Encore Series hardware. However, for purposes of
this document, the information describing the Encore Series Software running on a computer is applicable to the InfoNode platform,
unless specifically noted otherwise. In addition, the HTML screen images may include the words InfoNode, which would also be applicable to the Encore Series Software running on a computer.
A typical Encore Series Software system setup is built from several DataNodes, with the software program loaded onto the computer.
DataNodes gather readings from circuits and processes. Inexpensive, small and easy to install, DataNodes have the intelligence to collect data to be transferred to the Encore Series Software.
The Encore Series Software gathers DataNode data, converts the data to information, manages and presents the information. Valueadded software Answer Modules, also available from GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH, can further enhance program capabilities of the
Encore Series Software. Depending on the Answer Modules installed, data from one or more DataNodes can be analyzed to provide
such answers as the direction of the PF cap switching transient (upstream or downstream), sag directivity, location of faults on radial
feeders, reliability-benchmark indices for power quality, and different characterizations of data, such as QOS (Quality of Supply), IEEE
1159, and EPRI DPQ.
Figure 1 Encore Series Software Architecture: A Conceptual Illustration
1.2
A Virtual Encore Series Software
Once the Encore Series Software package is loaded onto a PC or laptop with the required Windows® 2000 or Windows® XP operating system, the software program runs as a typical Windows® service. Encore Series Software converts the computer into a web
server that enables you to browse data and information collected by the application. The Encore Series service will operate for a period
of 30 days upon installation. To continue to use the service after the trial period, you must install a hardware lock called HASP on your
computer. NOTE THAT YOU MUST INSTALL THE ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE BEFORE YOU INSTALL THE HASP. The HASP is
connected to the USB port in the computer. See chapter 2.6 Encore Series Software with HASP on page 9 for more information.
Once the Encore Series Software is installed and running, and the required HASP driver is properly installed in the computer, access to
software application is possible from anywhere in the world - through Intranet, Internet, or via modem. The Encore Series Software service uses the standard web browser (Microsoft® Internet Explorer V5.5 and higher or Netscape® Navigator 6.x and higher running the
Sun Java Virtual Machine 1.3.x or higher (Sun Java VM 1.4.x is recommended)). Earlier versions of Netscape that use the Netscape
Java VM are no longer supported.
Access time is dependent primarily on the communication media, with direct network connection being the fastest. See Communicating with the Encore Series Software on chapter 2.3 Authorizing the InfoNode in Windows® 2000 System for Modem Communication
on page 4 for more information.
Some of the most important optional add-ons to the Encore Series Software program are the Answer Modules software. Answer Modules convert information into application-specific answers using patented and proprietary expertise developed by GMC-I Messtechnik
GmbH, Electrotek Concepts, and Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI). These plug-in, application-specific answers will cover applications from identifying power disturbance origins, to reporting based on evolving standards, to predicting maintenance schedules at
substations.
Software optional accessories can be part of the initial purchase or easily added later. For more information on optional accessories for
the Encore Series Software, see chapter 15 Optional Accessories on page 202 and/or contact GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH Customer
Service Department at +49 911 8602-0.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–1
1.3
Encore Series Software User Interface
The Encore Series Software user interface consists of a series of tab pages. The pages are labelled as follows: Home, Views, Reports,
Real-time, and Setup.
Each page has its own tree directory located in the left window pane. The tree can be expanded or collapsed. Click on the plus (+) sign
to expand the tree and show more options available. Click on the minus (-) sign to collapse the tree one level backward.
All detailed tab page information is found in the right window pane. The Encore Series Software system provides a direct, no-fuss interface which displays information called out in tab, hyperlink and button format. Each tab is provided with a Help option to provide users
with immediate, onscreen assistance. Below is a sample screen showing the five main tab pages of the Encore Series Software.
main menu tabs of the Encore Series Software
Figure 2
The Home page provides basic status information about the Encore Series Software and DataNodes connected, along with easy
access to the first, last, and most recent events in memory.
The Views page provides access to three interactive sections: the QOS (Quality of Supply) Status, Timeline, and Smart Views. The
QOS module reports voltage compliance as recorded by a QOS DataNode. QOS Status will appear in Encore Series Software systems
that have QOS data acquisition modules in it i.e. 5560 DataNode, Mavosys 10 PQ DataNode, or Mavosys 10 Voltage DataNode. The
Timeline is a two pane browser, with the timeplot of selected parameters and channels in the top pane, and the event list and details
(waveshapes) in the lower pane. The Smart Views include: 3D RMS Mag/Dur (Magnitude/ Duration), RMS Mag/Dur, Smart Trends,
Event Summary, Rms Variations, Snapshots, and Transients.
The Reports page generates reports formatted for direct printing, through Smart Reports and Standard Reports. Smart Reports have
pre-selected output formats and include: DataNode Summary, QOS Compliance, Voltage Quality, Energy & Demand, Event Summary,
and Top 10 Events. Standard Reports have output formats that can be customized by the user and include: Event Summaries, Top 10
Events, Event Statistics, Quality of Supply, Waveform Distortion, Energy & Demand, and Encore Series Software Summary. The Answer
Modules are a customized facility which enables you to identify the source, cause and time of faults or disturbances like sags and
swells. The system is able to record and document the source of the problem, whether coming from inside your facility or in the supply
from your power supplier.
The Real-time page displays real time metered data in one of three formats: Meter Dials, Meter Panel, and Scope Mode. Meter Panel
shows a textual list of metered parameters for the selected DataNode. Parameters displayed are those configured for logging and
trending. Meter Dial shows the same information as Meter Panel but in an analog meter dial format. Scope Mode shows real time
waveforms for all enabled channels in an oscilloscope type of display. Note that Scope Mode is not available for all DataNode types.
The Setup page allows the user to configure both the Encore Series Software and any DataNodes connected to it. Additional users
and their access permissions and passwords are programmed on this page. Additional DataNodes connected to the Encore Series
Software are also set up on this page. Other parameters which you can view and/or customize (depending on your user access privilege) are: Notifications, Communications, Answer Module, DataNodes.
1.4
Encore Series Software Access Levels
The Encore Series Software firmware can function at different security levels: Guest, Viewer, Operator and Administrator.
Guest: Can view data only. Cannot change any settings or data.
Viewer: Can view data and change their own password and display settings.
Operator: Can change DataNode settings (e.g. instrument thresholds), upload and delete measurements.
Administrator: Full access to all settings (e.g. Network, Time, Locale, Users).
☞
Note
The Administrator mode is accessible only to users with administrative privileges. This mode is not normally used except to initially configure the Encore Series Software, upload new firmware, or run extensive diagnostic tests on the system.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–2
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
2
Preparation for Use
2.1
Encore Series Software Package
2.1.1
Contents
One CD-ROM containing the Encore Series Software program and Tardis 2000 Time Server program (in order to use the Encore Series
NTP Time service, the Tardis program must be installed)
Encore Series Software User’s Guide
2.1.2
System Requirements
Operating System
Processor
Memory
Disk Requirements
Monitor
☞
☞
☞
MS Windows® 2000 or MS Windows® XP
Pentium III or higher
512 MB or more
25 MB hard disk space for installation
40 GB hard drive
VGA or better; Hi-color 1024 x768 or higher recommended
Note
The Encore Series Software runs as a service on a Windows® 2000 or Windows® XP computer. Services are special programs
that run in the background without any visible windows. Services can be set to automatically start, when the computer starts,
even if no one logs onto the computer. If your computer is running on Windows® 2000, refer to the procedure on Kap. 2.3 Seite
4 to authorize the InfoNode system installed for modem communication.
Note
The Encore Series Software service turns the computer into a web server supporting HTTP, FTP, SYSLOG, NTP and Telnet
services. For this reason, make sure no other programs or services are running that use these protocols. Specifically, the computer must not be running web server software MS IIS®, MS Personal Web Server®, or Apache®. If the computer is connected
to the Internet, these protocols can be a security risk. It is recommended that the computer be dedicated to running the Encore
Series system.
Note
The following procedure will install the Encore Series Software on your PC for a trial period of 30 days. The software setup program copies the service onto your computer, performs all the necessary service registration, and creates Start Menu items for
controlling the service. The Encore Series Software will operate for a period of 30 days upon installation. To continue to use the
service beyond 30 days, you must install a hardware lock called HASP on your computer. The HASP can also be installed even
before the 30-day trial period expires. NOTE THAT YOU MUST INSTALL THE ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE BEFORE YOU
INSTALL THE HASP. See chapter 2.6 on page 9 for information on how to install the Encore Series Software with HASP.
2.2
Encore Series Software Installation and Setup
2.2.1
Getting Started
To install Encore Series Software, insert the CD-ROM with the Encore Series Software program on the disc drive, and do the following:
1.
Click on the ‘Install Encore Series Software’ link provided in the program disc. OR
Browse the contents of the disc to locate the ‘Install’ folder, then select the ‘Setup.exe’ file.
2.
Double-click the ‘Setup.exe’ file.
3.
Follow the instructions on-screen and/or in the next pages to continue installing Encore Series Software.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–3
2.2.2
Encore Series Software Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
The Encore Series Software Setup program initially displays the Welcome screen. Read the message then click Next to
continue.
Read the Encore Series Software license agreement terms, then click Yes to accept and to continue with the installation.
Setup prompts you to select the destination folder where the Encore Series Software program will be installed.
To use the default destination folder, click Next and proceed to Step 4. Default settings typically work well in most situations.
To change the destination folder location, click Browse then select the directory path where Encore Series Software will
be installed. When changing the destination location where software will be installed, consider the availability of disk
space on your computer. When done, click Next and proceed to Step 4.
There are five different Encore Series Software setup types to choose from depending on your application needs. Select
a setup type and read its description on the right side of the screen. Once a setup type has been selected, click Next to
install the Encore Series Software Setup and proceed to Step 5.
Setup will ask if you want the Encore Series Software service to start automatically each time your computer starts.
Click Yes to enable the Encore Series Software service auto-start or click No to disable auto-start. In most cases, autostart should be enabled to allow an unattended computer running the Encore Series Software service to automatically
recover in case of a power outage.
In case users decide to change auto-start settings, there are two ways to reset the Encore Series Software start mode:
a. Re-run the setup program. Each time the setup program is run, the service registration is updated and the program
will ask if you want to enable/disable auto-start. Re-running the setup program also allows you to remove the service
altogether.
b. Use the Windows® Service Manager to change auto-start settings. To do this, click on the following menu items:
Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
Once program installation is complete, setup will ask if you want to start the Encore Series Software service.
Click Yes to launch Encore Series Software immediately or click No to close the program.
Users have the option to manually start/stop the Encore Series Software Service by clicking on the following menu
items: Start > Programs > Encore Series Software > Start Encore Series Software or Stop Encore Series Software.
Authorizing the InfoNode in Windows® 2000 System for Modem Communication
Users can communicate with the InfoNode/Encore Series Software via modem connection. If you are using a Windows® 2000 operating system, you need to add a modem authorization to your InfoNode service for modem communication.
Perform the steps below to configure your InfoNode system running in Windows® 2000 for modem communication.
Step 1: Do the following to open the Administrator Tools. Click on Start > Control Panel > Administrator Tools.
Step 2: Double-click to open Services in Administrator Tools.
Step 3: Click to select InfoNode from the Services window. Right click on InfoNode to display the menu list.
Figure 3
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–4
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Step 4: Proceed to select Properties from the menu list.
Figure 4
Step 5: Click to open the Log On tab.
Figure 5
Step 6: Click on the Browse button.
Step 7: Choose a user of the computer who has authorization to run the computer as an administrator. Proceed to enter the authorized user password. This will allow the InfoNode system installed in the computer to communicate via modem.
☞
2.4
Note
Steps 1 through 7 must be done every time the software is updated.
Communicating with the Encore Series Software using a Web Browser
Users can communicate with the Encore Series Software using a web browser.
☞
Note
The Encore Series Software service must be installed and running before you can connect to it via a web browser. If you have
a large database, it may take several minutes for the Encore Series Software service to respond to web requests.
When the browser used to access the programs is on the same computer where Encore Series Software is installed, specify ‘localhost’
as the site address from which to access the Encore Series Software home page. The software setup program provides a Start Menu
icon to enable you to specify the local host site address setting.
Other computers connected to the same network can also access the Encore Series Software program installed on your computer. To
communicate with the software using a browser from another computer, enter either the network name or the IP address of the computer running the software service in the site address field of the browser. Contact your network administrator for guidance to access
your network system.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–5
Figure 6
Once the proper site address is entered into the web browser, the Encore Series Software service will ask you to log-on. You can logon as the ‘admin’ user. The default password for the ‘admin’ user is ‘password’. Enter the user name and password into the appropriate boxes and click OK to access the Encore Series Software Home page. Refer to chapter 3 Home Page on page 11 for details.
2.5
Time Service Installation and Setup
Time synchronization for the Encore Series Software requires a reliable time source. More often than not, the real-time clock (RTC) built
into most computers is not accurate nor reliable. In order to use the Encore Series NTP time service, a time server must be available. A
licensed copy of the ‘Tardis 2000 Time Server’ is included in the Encore Series Software disc application package. This software utility
serves as a time server providing a time source for any device (including EPQ DataNodes) that share the network as the computer
where the software is installed.
The Tardis software can detect the right time in various ways i.e. accessing Internet-based Atomic Clocks, using networked time servers, Global Positioning System or GPS technology, radio clocks, and by listening for time broadcasts over a LAN. The Service version
of Tardis 2000 runs as a Windows® 2000/XP service, just like any other Windows® application service.
2.5.1
Getting Started
To begin installation of Tardis 2000 Time Server, insert the CD-ROM with the Encore Series Software program on the disc drive. To
install the Tardis program on your PC, you may either:
1.
Click on the ‘Install TARDIS Time Server’ link provided in the disc.
OR
Browse the contents of the disc to locate the ‘TardisNTPServers\WIN2000XP’ folder, then select the
‘tardis2000ntService.exe’ file.
2.
Double-click the ‘tardis2000ntService.exe’ file.
Figure 7
3.
Follow the instructions on-screen and/or in the next pages to continue installing Tardis 2000 Time Server.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–6
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
2.5.2
☞
Tardis 2000 Time Server Setup
1.
The Tardis installation program initially displays the Welcome screen. Read the message then click Next to continue.
Note
Exit all Windows® programs before attempting to install Tardis 2000 Time Server in your computer.
Figure 8
2.
Read the Tardis license agreement terms, then click Yes to accept and continue with the installation.
Figure 9
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–7
3.
After accepting the Tardis license agreement, the Readme Information screen containing detailed description of the Tardis program appears. Read the program description then click Next to continue with the installation.
4.
Tardis current settings notify users of the Tardis setup type and destination folder where program will be installed.
To use the current settings, click Next. Installation of Tardis program will proceed.
To review and/or change settings, click Back. When changing the destination location where software will be installed,
consider the availability of disk space on your computer.
Figure 10
Figure 11
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–8
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
5.
After the Tardis program is installed, users have the option to view more information about the program by enabling the
Readme File and/or to start/launch the Tardis Service immediately. In most cases, you should answer yes.
If you select Yes to launch the program, Tardis Service will start immediately once you click Finish to complete setup.
Figure 12
☞
Note
YOU MUST DISABLE THE WINDOWS® TIME SERVER WHEN USING TARDIS 2000 TIME SERVICE. IF YOU HAVE
TARDIS 2000 SERVICE V1.6, THE INSTALL PROGRAM INCLUDES THE WINDOWS® TIME SERVER DISABLE
FUNCTION. YOU DO NOT HAVE TO USE THE STEPS BELOW TO MANUALLY DISABLE THE TIME SERVER PROGRAM.
You can disable the ‘Windows® Time Server’ and enable the ‘Tardis 2000 Time Server’ to auto-start under the ‘Service Manager Control Box’.
To access ‘Service Manager Control Box’ in Windows® 2000 Professional or Windows® XP, click on the following menu items: Start >
Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. For detailed instructions on how to customize Windows® 2000/XP time
settings, refer to the online documentation ‘Installing Tardis 2000 Time Service’ on the CD-ROM.
2.6
Encore Series Software with HASP
The Encore Series Software service will operate only for a period of 30 days from the date of installation. To continue to use the software beyond 30 days, you must install a HASP on your computer. The HASP can be installed even before the 30-day trial period for
Encore Series Software ends.
!
Attention!
DO NOT insert the HASP before installing the Encore Series Software program. Otherwise, MS Windows® will fail to find the
proper driver for the HASP but may still add a non-working HASP driver to the Device Manager (Control Panel System). In this
case, the HASP driver needs to be manually removed from the Device Manager (Control Panel System). When done, restart
the computer and reinstall Encore Series Software from the CD-ROM.
Encore Series Software: To install the Encore Series Software program from the CD-ROM, follow the instructions on chapter 2.2
Encore Series Software Installation and Setup on page 3.
HASP: The Encore Series Software HASP (see figure below) can be keyed to the USB port. Align the HASP to the keyed port and
push gently to lock it in place. Keep the HASP in the port while using the Encore Series Software program.
☞
Note
Make sure to write down the serial number of your HASP and keep this information in a secure place. The serial number is
required to replace HASP in case it gets lost or destroyed.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–9
Figure 13
For pricing and availability of HASP, contact GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH Product Support at phone No. +49 911 8602-0.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–10
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
3
Home Page
This chapter explains how authorized users log in and access the Encore Series Software system.
3.1
Log-in
Users connect to the Encore Series Software using a web browser as explained on chapter 2.3 Authorizing the InfoNode in Windows®
2000 System for Modem Communication on page 4. Before gaining access to the Home page, the user must first log-in using a
proper user name and password. If the user name or password is not correct, the Enter Network Password dialog box shown below
will re-appear. Setting up the names, passwords, and privilege level require administrative permission (see chapter 7 Setup Page on
page 45, Users section).
Contact your Encore Series Software Administrator (someone with Admin privileges) to set up your user account in order to access the
system. Only the Administrator can create accounts for other people and change Security Levels. The system is shipped with a default
Admin account, which the Administrator should customize with your own user name and password.
Figure 14 Enter Network Password dialog box
☞
3.2
Note
When you upgrade your operating Encore Series Software firmware version, the Encore Series Java Classes will automatically
be installed in your computer upon log-in. The Java wizard program will install the setup files necessary for your computer to
support the Encore Series interactive controls. If you do not allow installation of the Java program, then some Encore Series
Software screens will not be visible and you will not be able to take advantage of some features of the application. The setup
program will not change any system configuration. It just stores a small number of Java files on your computer. Once installation is done, the program will prompt you to click on Finish to complete setup. You may have to restart your web browser once
setup is complete.
Home Page
The Home page provides basic system status information, and links to events that occurred since you last logged on. The Home page
is automatically displayed after successfully logging on, or by selecting the Home tab.
In the left-hand frame of the page, you will see the Encore Series Software Status and Help options. The software Status displays general information on both the DataNode and Encore Series Software (see sample screen display next page). Click on one of the underscored links or hyperlinks on the right-hand screen display to go directly to the event detail or status information.
You may log out of the Encore Series Software at any time by closing your browser.
Note that some pages may take longer than usual to download when viewed for the first time, or after a firmware revision has been
uploaded to the Encore Series Software.
The standard home page can be augmented with a custom HTML page at extra cost. Contact the GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH Customer Service Department at (732) 287-3680 or visit www.dranetz-bmi.com.
3.2.1
Encore Series Software Status
The Encore Series Software Status table provides general information about the software and the data that it retrieved from the connected DataNodes, including the following:
3.2.2
DataNode Information
DataNode health status is based on continual checks of the communication links and internal processes.
Database usage shows the amount (%) of memory used. As a reference, the total available memory is shown.
# of Disturbances (Total disturbances, First disturbance, Last disturbance) is defined by the type of DataNode connected. For a power
quality-type DataNode, these include events triggered by limit or threshold crossings.
# of Disturbances (Since your last logon, In the last 48 hours) is the amount of events that have occurred since the user last logged on
and in the last 48 hours.
#Disturbances is linked to the Event SummaryView.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–11
Home, Views, Reports, Realtime: where DataNode data
and information are displayed
in meaningful format
Setup: where users
view and/or customize
the DataNode settings
Encore Series Software Home page
click any DataNode hyperlink to view specific DataNode information
click any DataNode hyperlink to view specific DataNode information
Figure 15
3.2.3
DataNode Status
You can select the DataNode Status from either the linked text on the Home Page, or by selecting the Setup tab and clicking on the
desired DataNode site in the tree directory. This page provides information about specific DataNodes connected to the Encore Series
Software. This includes DataNode Description, the Last Connection made, the Next Connection to be made, Connection Status,
DataNode site Health status, DataNode Model type, Serial number, and software Version.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–12
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
3.2.4
☞
Quality of Supply (QOS) Compliance
Note
Information on QOS Compliance only appears when a QOS-data acquisition module is installed i.e. the 5560 DataNode,
Mavosys 10 PQ DataNode, or Mavosys 10 Voltage DataNode.
The Home page reports Quality of Supply compliance status for the latest complete evaluation period of each DataNode. Information
about QOS compliance appears in two parts of the Home page: the DataNode status paragraph and the DataNode status table.
3.2.4.1
Compliance Message on DataNode Status Paragraph
An additional message on QOS compliance is appended to the DataNode Status. Sample messages include “There is one DataNode
for monitoring Quality of Supply Compliance. This DataNode is reporting non-compliance”. Like other DataNode messages in the status paragraph, the compliance message is hyperlinked to the Quality of Supply Compliance section in the DataNode status table.
3.2.4.2
Compliance Message on DataNode Status Table
An additional section showing the compliance status of DataNodes is added to the DataNode status table. The table indicates which
DataNodes are in compliance, not in compliance, or have undetermined compliance status for the specified interval. DataNodes that
are non-compliant are hyperlinked to the QOS Status view.
3.2.5
Encore Series Software Information
This table provides the following information about the Encore Series Software: Name, Description, Model, Serial number, Firmware
version containing the different support packages installed in the software, and Uptime duration.
Help
Much of what is written in this manual can be found in the Help option onscreen. Expanding the Help tree will produce Introduction and
Index links.
Introduction
The Introduction page orients users that they are currently viewing the Home page. Four active buttons are found in this page: Contents, Index, <<, and >>. These buttons present different ways to access the same Help information. The differences lay only in the
way each button organizes and lists information.
The >> button brings the user forward to the next linked page. It covers information across pages in all tabs, not just the Home tab.
Some pages have hyperlinks which contain further detailed information on the topic.
The << button brings the user backward to the previously linked page. It helps the user scan for information quickly and easily through
the linked pages.
Index
The Index page operates exactly like the Index portion of a book. Information is listed and categorized in alphabetical order. Click any
button from A to Z to show various related topics under each letter. The topics are featured as hyperlinks.
The Contents button operates exactly like the Table of Contents in books. Information is listed and organized under different headings.
The headings normally used here are the menu tab names. Sub-topics per heading appear as hyperlinks.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–13
4
Views Page
This chapter describes the various interactive graphical display screens formatted primarily for viewing data through the browser, as
opposed to printing out. If you want to generate reports in print format, please select the Reports tab and turn to chapter 5 Reports
Page on page 24.
4.1
General Procedures In Making Queries
The Views and Reports tabs both use a common Query section where you select whether to display graphs or reports in a new window or an existing window, select which DataNodes are to be included in the presentation, and over what time period to select the
data from. To arrive at your desired information, follow the designated procedures below:
To Select Multiple DataNodes - keep the Control key depressed while using the mouse and its left button to select the DataNodes of
choice.
☞
Note
This option functions for all Views and Reports except the Timeline.
To Select the Time Range - select one of thirteen pre-formatted time-range radio buttons, or enter any valid starting and ending time/
date range. Pre-filtered Time Ranges and their definitions include:
All Time - first event in memory to last event
Last Hour - previous hour from present time
Today - from 00:00 midnight of the present day until the present time
Yesterday - the 24 hour period ending at 00:00 midnight of present day
Last 48 Hours - previous 48 hours from present time
This Week - from 00:00 of Sunday of the present week until the present time
Last 7 Days - previous 7 days plus the current day until the present time
Last 14 Days - previous 14 days plus the current day until the present time
Last 30 days - previous 30 days plus the current day until the present time
This month - from 00:00 of the first day of the month until present day
Last month - from 00:00 of the first day of the previous month until 00:00 of the first day of the current month
This year - from January 1 of the present year until the present day
Last year - from January 1 to December 31 of the previous year
To Customize Time/Date Ranges - enter the starting and ending month/day/year as well as hour/minute/second in the format selected
in the Setup page (i.e. European date format, 24 hour military time, etc.)
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–14
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
4.2
Views Page
The Views page offers three ways to display data sourced from the DataNode settings. First is through the QOS Status which displays
data relative to quality of supply compliance. QOS Status appears in Encore Series systems that have 5560, Mavosys 10 PQ-configured, or Mavosys 10 Voltage DataNodes in use. See chapter 7 Setup Page on page 45 - Quality of Supply for more information. Second is through Timeline, featuring graphs of user-selected parameters over user-selected time periods. Third is through the Smart
Views featuring different views of data that have been pre-filtered or specified based on typical uses of other GMC-I Messtechnik
GmbH products. These include magnitude-versus-duration graphs, lists of all events or only those events that are classified by IEEE
1159 as rms variations or transients.
The left window pane contains the tree directory which presents the QOS Status, Timeline, Smart Views and Help options. Clicking on
any Timeline or Smart View option will direct you to a common Query Section screen. The Query section is used to select which specific DataNode you want to view as well as the Time/Date Range when that particular DataNode information was captured. Once you
have made those selections, click on either the Display or Display in New Window button to view the information that you are interested
in.
The Timeline option displays a graph of user-selected parameters over a user-selected time period. For some parameters, the minimum, maximum and average values are plotted, along with event markers that indicate detailed waveform information also available at
that specific time. The lower portion of the screen displays a list of events recorded over that time period.
Smart Views are similar to Reports of the same name, except that they are designed to be viewed onscreen instead of printed out.
Smart Views selections include: 3D Rms Mag/Dur (Magnitude-and-Duration), Rms Mag/Dur, Smart Trends, Event Summary, Rms Variations, Snapshots, Transients.
Displays QOS
Status query
screen
Views Page
click to display
Timeline View in
existing window
click to display
Timeline View in
a new browser
window
(see Figure 17
on page 16)
click desired
DataNode(s)
to view
set time period
of data to view
Query Section screen
Figure 16 Query Section
Timeline
Once the DataNodes and time ranges have been selected, you can select the Display or Display in New Window button to create a
plot of one or two specified parameter(s) on the vertical axis and the time range on the horizontal axis. This plot is the Timeline View,
which consists of two areas: the Timeline Graph (top) and the Event List/Detail (bottom). Click and drag the horizontal line that separates the two areas to enlarge either of them.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–15
Timeline Graph
The Timeline graph is auto-scaled to use the maximum amount of space for viewing the data. Key features of the timeline graph
include:
1.
Graphs of the minimum, average and maximum values of the parameter over a user selectable time interval are simultaneously displayed. The default average value has a heavier line weight to distinguish it from the min/max lines.
2.
Graphs will show any timed readings, limit crossing or threshold triggered events that occurred during the selected time
range. These are indicated by an Event Marker on the horizontal time axis. Click on the event marker to display the
Event Detail in the lower portion of the screen.
3.
Graphs support zooming via a rectangle drag. Zooming in on specific data can be done in both the horizontal and vertical axis. Position the cursor into the graph area at one of the corners of the area of interest and depress the left mouse
button while dragging the cursor towards the opposite corner of the area of interest. A box will appear as the mouse is
moved, indicating the area being selected. Once the selection is complete, release the left mouse button. The display
will be resized to show the area of interest.
different line weights distinguish
min, max, and avg values
right click on the graph, then
select General to open dialog
box
right click on the graph, then
select Channels to open dialog
box (see Figure 18 on page 17)
double-click on desired event to
view details (see Figure 19 on
page 18)
The General Options dialog box provides additional
options for altering the graph. This user preferences
command is available only to users assigned the
Security Level of Viewer, Operator or Administrator.
This option is not available to Guests.
Figure 17 Timeline Graph and Event List display
4.
Graphs support a right mouse button context menu that displays additional options for altering the graph:
General Properties of the Timeline - will allow you to change the title of the graph, font type, font size, background color, and whether
parameters are displayed in units of % or magnitude. In addition, accumulated data such as Energy can be set for display on an internal basis, in accumulated values, or as a normalized accumulated graph.
Axis Properties for the Timeline - will allow you to change the title, fonts, scaling for the horizontal time axis, label characteristics for the
vertical axis, and grid color.
Print - will print to specified printer.
Copy Image - will save the displayed timeline to a new window clipboard as a GIF file. This can then be saved to any folder using the
standard browser File|Save As... command.
Copy Data - will allow you to copy the data that makes up the graph to the clipboard. Data can then be pasted into applications such
as Excel.
Channels - channnels to be displayed can be selected from the expanding tree.
Full Scale - will return to the original, unzoomed data.
Zoom Out - will undo the previous zoom.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–16
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
To Add/Remove Channel-Parameters: The Channel Selection box below allows the user to add or remove channels/parameters from
the graph. If there is a plus sign [+], then you can click on the plus sign to further expand the tree to show more options available. A
minus sign [-] shows that the tree directory has already been fully expanded. Clicking on the minus sign will collapse the tree back up
one level.
To display an additional parameter for a specific channel,
expand the tree to the necessary detail and then click on
the item. Click on the right arrow in the middle to move
the channel-parameter to the list of displayed data.
To move all channels of a given parameter at once to the
display list, highlight the parameter (rather than the individual channel) then click on the right arrow key.
To remove a channel-parameter from the display list,
highlight the parameter from the table on the right side
then use the left arrow to move it out of the display list.
Once the selections have been made, click on the
APPLY button to see the results without exiting the
selection window. OK will exit the selection window and
apply the changes. CANCEL will exit the window without
applying the selection changes.
Figure 18 Channel Selection
Event List/Detail
The Event List shows a tabular display of the limit crossing or threshold triggered events that are displayed in the timeline (see display
screen below). The data associated with an event depends on the type of DataNode and type of event. Key features of the Event List/
Detail include:
1.
The Event List table shows the Time/date of start of event recording, Event Type, Channel (phase), and Characteristic
(description) of the event. The description may contain additional information, such as minimum/ maximum values,
duration, frequency and category.
☞
☞
Note
Event summary time refers to the time of start of event recording, not the time of event. The actual event will be some time
offset from the time of event recording, based on how many pre-trigger cycles the user has specified.
2.
Events are listed from most recent to oldest.
Note
If there are a very large number of events in the range selected, only the most recent 250 events are listed.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To step through the events or to jump to the start or end of the list, click on the arrow keys in the upper right hand corner
of the list. Use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to pan through the Event Listing table. Click on the field descriptor
on the top of the table to sort by that particular field, instead of chronological order.
If there are Event Details or waveforms associated with those events, they can be displayed in additional tabs. Double
click on the row containing the event of interest. This will produce additional tabs showing the event details.
The event detail viewer supports overlay of multiple channels with left and right axes.
You can zoom on the waveform by using the left mouse button as was done in the Timeline Graph section.
Click the right mouse button with the cursor in this display area to produce a similar menu to the Timeline Graph section
to allow you to change the properties of the graph, as well as save the image.
Click on the arrow keys in the upper right corner to step through the available waveforms.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–17
right-click on the
graph to set user
preference properties
(see Figure 17 on
page 16)
arrow keys
field descriptors
vertical scroll bar
horizontal
scroll bar
Timeline Graph and
Event List display
Timeline View with Event Detail
Figure 19 Timeline
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–18
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Smart Views
There are a number of different views of the data that have been specified by type. These include magnitude-versus-duration graphs,
lists of all of the events, or lists of events that are classified by IEEE 1159 as rms variations or transients. The same Query Section in the
Timeline appears to allow you to select what date/time range and which DataNodes are to be included in the views.
3D Rms Mag/Dur View
3-D Mag-dur graphs show the number of rms variations of a specified range of magnitude and duration, also called bins. For example,
an RMS variation with a magnitude of 80-90% of nominal and 1-5 cycles in duration is one bin, whereas 80-90% and 10-30 cycles is
another, 70-80% and 10-30 cycles is another, and so on. Each time that the characteristics of an rms variation match the criteria of the
bin, the counter is incremented. Certain types of phenomena are typically found in certain bin groupings such as: sags cleared by fuses
versus sags cleared by breaker operations; versus sags caused by the starting of large horsepower motors; versus the swells caused
by loads being turned off and the response time of the automatic tap changer. In the 3-D mag dur graph, it is a quick visual way to see
what category most of the disturbances fall into. This helps determine the source of the disturbance.
Figure 20 3D Magnitude-Duration Histogram
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–19
Rms Mag/Dur View
The Rms Magnitude-and-Duration graph is a plot of the magnitude of the event versus duration of the event with the time plotted on a
logarithmic scale. A data point is plotted for each event and the graph is overlaid with equipment susceptible or safe-operating type
curves, such as the ITIC curve or CBEMA. Events that fall between the two curves will not usually cause equipment to malfunction
(equipment with a similar set of susceptibles to those used to develop the curve), whereas those outside the limits are likely to cause
problems.
Figure 21 Rms Magnitude-Duration View
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–20
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Smart Trend
Smart Trend will display a timeline type graph for a large range of parameters, based on the type of DataNode and which parameters
were saved for trending. After using the standard query to select the DataNodes and time/date range, a display of all possible parameters that can be trended is shown. Clicking on a green check mark onscreen will trend that parameter for the selected phase and will
also show a histogram of the different values with a cumulative probability line. Red X marks onscreen indicate that the particular
parameter is not available for trending. See sample display screens below.
Two ways to view trend displays:
Left-click on the check mark of
the parameter you want to trend;
OR
Right-click on the check mark to
display this drop down menu,
then click Open Link/Open Link in
New Window to view trend display
Figure 22 Trend Display
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–21
Event Summary
The Event Summary table seen below is a listing of the newest to oldest events in memory of the Encore Series for the DataNode
selected. The data contained in the table include the: Event Time/Date, Monitor that recorded the event, Event Type, Phase (channel),
and event Characteristics as found in the Event List details. Click the Event Time/Date (in hyperlinks) to display the Event Details.
Figure 23 Event Summary
The event Characteristics include magnitude, duration, frequency, and category. The categories are defined according to the graph
explained next.
☞
Note
If there are too many events in the selected range to be displayed in a timely manner, the most recent 500 events will be displayed along with the message “more data is selected than can be displayed”. This also applies to any of the other Views.
Rms Variations
The Rms Variations table is a filtered version of the Event List. It includes only those events of rms variation type (sags, swells, and interruptions).
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–22
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Figure 24 Definition of the Category Event Characteristic
Snapshots
Some DataNodes have the ability to periodically save a specified number of cycles of the voltage and/or current waveforms from one
or more phases. These recordings are known as snapshots and they can be viewed by the user, similar to selecting a specific event in
the Event Summary (see section Event Summary on page 22).
Transients
The Transients table is a filtered version of the Event List; only those events of Transient type are included.
Refer to chapter 7 Setup Page on page 45, Answer Module section, for further discussions on the above topics.
Help
Much of what is written in this manual can be found in the Help option onscreen. Expanding the Help tree will provide Views Topics and
Index links.
Views Topics
The Views Topics page simply says that the user is currently in the Views page. Four active buttons are found in this page: Contents,
Index, <<, and >>. These buttons present different ways to access the same Help information. The differences lay only in the way each
button organizes and lists information.
The >> button brings the user forward to the next linked page.
The << button brings the user backward to the previously linked page.
Index
The Index page operates exactly like the Index portion of a book. Information is listed and categorized in alphabetical order. Click any
button from A to Z to show various related topics under each letter. The topics are featured as hyperlinks.
The Contents button operates exactly like the Table of Contents in books. Information is listed and organized under different headings.
The headings normally used here are the tab names. Sub-topics per heading appear as hyperlinks.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–23
5
Reports Page
This chapter describes the different types of reports that users can generate using the Encore Series Software. It explains how reports
can be customized to suit the preference and needs of individual users.
5.1
Reports Page
The Reports home page shown below displays a list of the different Smart Reports, Standard Reports, and Answer Module reports
that are available. If a QOS DataNode is in use, the Quality of Supply Compliance smart report will also be included.
Figure 25 Reports home page
A Report differs from a View in couple of ways. If a report contains multiple sections then the report will contain a Table of Contents.
The Table of Contents provides a summary of what is in the report, and it provides a quick method for getting to a particular section of
the report thru a hyperlink. A sample Table of Contents can be found next page. The Reports do not allow for interactive functions, but
they will always be printed in their original form. The Views should be used for interactive functions.
Figure 26 Sample Table of Contents
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–24
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Smart Reports
Smart Reports provides several types of reports and allows only minimal pre-filtering. The query setup for all Smart Reports is identical.
The only variance between the reports is that some allow the selection of multiple DataNodes. The query setup screen (see Fig. 27
below) is similar for all Smart Reports with its respective title.
DataNode Summary
The DataNode Summary Smart Report is a listing of information about a selected DataNode over the specified time period. This report
includes Rms Variation Summary, Transient Summary, Monitor Status, DataNode Log, and the DataNode Setup.
QOS Compliance
The QOS Compliance Smart Report will generate tables and graphs indicating voltage compliance information as recorded by the
QOS DataNodes selected. For example, for 5560 DataNode which monitors and reports QOS compliance as specified by EN50160,
the following reports are presented: Compliance Summary, Compliance Graph, Event Statistics, Harmonics Graph, Interharmonics
Graph, Power Frequency Graph, and Min/Max Tables. See chapter 10.7 QOS Compliance Reports on page 127.
Voltage Quality
The Voltage Quality Smart Report consists of a series of timeplots of available voltage phases, along with event summaries, histograms
of event magnitudes, a Mag/Dur curve, and a 3D Mag/Dur curve.
Energy and Demand
The Energy and Demand Smart Report consists of trends, tables, and histograms for demand and energy parameters.
The Event Summary Smart Report consists of a table of events that occurred within the date/time that were
selected for the query. This report allows for the selection of multiple DataNodes. Events are displayed in
chronological order with the most recent event appearing first.
Top 10 Events
The Top 10 Events Smart Report is similar to the Event Summary Smart Report, except that it groups the events by type (sags, swell,
interruptions, and transients) and only includes the 10 most severe events of each type. The severity of the events is based on their
category. Events of each type are displayed in chronological order with the most recent event appearing first.
Figure 27 Smart Reports Query Selection
Standard Reports
Standard Reports provide the user with a greater ability to customize the contents of each report. The Smart Reports Query Setup is
also used for the standard reports, with each Standard Report adding query parameters that are specific to its report type.
Event Summaries
The Event Summaries Report of the Standard Reports is very similar to that of the Smart Reports. The Standard Report version allows
the user to select which event types will be included in the report. The user selects the types of events they want included in the report
by checking the box(es) next to the desired event type(s). See figure below.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–25
Figure 28
Top 10 Events
The Top 10 Events Report of the Standard Reports is very similar to that of the Smart Reports. The Standard Report version allows the
user to select the method or criteria for determining which events will be included in the report. The method options are magnitude,
duration, area, or category. The user may specify whether to include sags, swells, and/or transients. The user may also select to
include time plots of only the triggered phase, the worst phase, or all monitored phases. See figure below for the additions to the Query
Setup for this report.
Figure 29
Event Statistics
Event Statistics Report is a series of statistical analysis reports that you select for Rms variations and/or transients. The selections are
shown in the following figure.
Figure 30
Rms Variations
Rms Mag-Dur - a plot of the magnitude of the event versus duration of the event. A data point is plotted for each event, and the
graph is overlaid with equipment susceptible or safe-operating type curves, such as the ITIC curve or CBEMA.
Magnitude Histogram - the magnitude of the rms variation versus the number of occurrences as a bar chart, with a cumulative frequency occurrence line graph overlaid.
Duration Histogram - the duration of the varia-tion versus the number of occurrences as a bar chart, with a cumulative frequency of
occurrence line graph overlaid.
Transients
Magnitude Histogram - the magnitude of the transient versus the number of occurrences as a bar chart, with a cumulative frequency occurrence line graph overlaid.
Duration Histogram - the duration of the tran-sient versus the number of occurrences as a bar chart, with a cumulative frequency
of occurrence line graph overlaid.
Frequency Histogram - the principal frequency of the transient versus the number of occurrences as a bar chart, with a cumulative
frequency of occurrence line graph overlaid.
Quality of Supply
The Quality of Supply Report is an analysis of voltage compliance information as recorded by the QOS DataNode, i.e. 5560 DataNode
which monitors voltage compliance as specified by compliance limits such as the EN50160 Standard. The user may select from an
analysis of the Voltage Regulation and Frequency. The user may also select the presentation of the data in trend and/or histogram
form. The selections available are shown below.
Figure 31
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–26
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Waveform Distortion
The Waveform Distortion Report is an analysis of
harmonics. The user may select which data type at which components they would like to include in the report. The user may select
Voltage THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) and/or IEEE 519 Current TDD. The user may select to present the data in trend and/or histogram form. The selections available are shown below.
Figure 32
Energy and Demand
The Energy and Demand Report of the Standard Reports is very similar in content to that of the Smart Reports. The Energy and
Demand Report will allow you to produce a trend, table and/or histogram for demand and energy. An additional feature of the Standard
report version is that the user may include Power data. The user may elect to include real, imaginary, apparent power, displacement
power factor and true power factor calculations in a trend and/or histogram form. The selections available are shown below.
Figure 33
InfoNode Summary
The InfoNode Summary table is a listing of the oldest to newest administrative activity recorded by the InfoNode. The table includes the
following data:
Entry Time - the time that the logged activity occurred.
Entry - a name for the activity, such as "User login" or "DataNode added".
User - identifies who carried out the activity.
Source Name - the part of the system affected by the activity that could be the name of a user or a DataNode.
Description - provides additional information about the entry. For example, if the Entry is "DataNode communication OK", then the
Description could be "System health is normal".
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–27
Answer Module
Some Answer Modules provide information via a separate report. Other Answer Modules may just add characteristics to the events
that are displayed in the event summary table, such as direction of disturbance. Answer Modules that create a separate report will be
covered in this section.
Rms Variation Indices
The query information required for the Rms Variation Indices is very similar to all other reports. First, select the DataNode of interest and
then select the time range. The query setup for this report requires that two additional parameters be set. The query setup specific to
this report is shown below.
Figure 34 Setup Screen for RMS Variation Indices Report
Monitoring Days Method
Many of the EPRI RBM Rms variation indices provide frequency of occurrence information or rates of occurrence. The EPRI RBM technical report, TR-107938, discusses in detail the necessity of normalizing these rates based on the data upon which the indices are calculated. There are two normalization methods: “Estimated” and “None (No Normalization)”.
Estimated
The "Estimated" normalization method algorithm estimates the number of days a monitor is considered on-line by calculating the number of days between the 'From' and 'To' dates specified on the Date and Time Selection of the report setup.
None (No Normalization)
The "No Normalization" method results in a count rather than a rate. Thus, all frequency of occurrence indices calculated using this
normalization method are counts of all aggregate measurements occurring during the specified time period.
Index Normalization Setup
The Normalization Rate control designates the time period (number of day's data) to which the rate indices are normalized. If the Normalization Method control is set to “None”, there is no rate used so the Rate control is disabled.
This report is generated using the RBM Aggregation Parameters and the query information described above. For more information on
the RBM Aggregation Parameters see section Aggregation Parameters on page 77 of chapter 7 Setup Page on page 45. The RBM
Sag Index Report calculates the indices listed below for 90%, 80%, 70%, 50%, and 10% voltage thresholds.
☞
Note
SARFI - System Average RMS (Variation) Frequency Index
SIARFI - System Instantaneous Average RMS (Variation) Frequency Index
SMARFI - System Momentary Average RMS (Variation) Frequency Index
STARFI - System Temporary Average RMS (Variation) Frequency Index
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–28
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
see note
above
Figure 35 Sample RBM Sag Index Report
Aggregated Energy Expense
The Aggregated Energy Expense features a query setup to enable users to generate a comparative expense report for
different DataNodes. Data is only available when the Energy Usage Answer Module is installed.
Figure 36 Setup screen for Aggregated Energy Expense Report
Select the DataNodes to aggregate in the expense report under the DataNodes window. As with the other reports, specify the date
and time range of interest.
Click on the Compare button if you want to compare the total of the aggregated DataNodes to that of another DataNode. Click on the
Aggregate Only button if you simply want to view the aggregate total.
Select any Rate Structure that is enabled under the Setup Page, Answer Module - Energy Usage. See section Rate Structures tab on
page 68 of chapter 7 Setup Page on page 45 for details on the Energy Usage - Rate Structures. If doing a comparison, select the
desired DataNode under the Comparison DataNode window.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–29
☞
Note
If a comparison is being performed, the comparison DataNode will not be included in the aggregation even if selected.
A sample Aggregated Energy Expense report is shown below. The report is divided into four sections: Energy Usage kWHr, Energy
Usage kvarHr, Demand Max kW, and Expense Summary.
Figure 37 Sample Aggregated Energy Expense Report
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–30
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Energy Expense
The Energy Expense features a query setup to enable users to generate an expense report for each DataNode. Data is only available
when the Energy Usage Answer Module is installed.
Figure 38 Setup screen for Energy Expense Report
Select the DataNode with which you want to generate an expense report. As with the other reports, specify the date and time range of
interest. The user may choose to divide the time range into smaller increments under the Increment
window. A typical selection for billing purposes is Weekly.
Select any Rate Structure that is enabled under the Setup Page, Answer Module - Energy Usage. See section Rate Structures tab on
page 68 of chapter 7 Setup Page on page 45 for details on the Energy Usage - Rate Structures.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–31
A sample Energy Expense report is shown below. The report is divided into four sections: Energy Usage kWHr, Energy Usage kvarHr,
Demand Max kW, and Expense Summary.
Figure 39 Sample Energy Expense Report
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–32
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Energy Usage Comparison Report
The Energy Usage Comparison Report features a query setup to enable users to generate a comparative energy usage report for each
DataNode. Data is only available when the Energy Usage Answer Module is installed.
Figure 40 Setup screen for Energy Usage Comparison Report
Select the DataNode with which you want to generate a comparative usage report. As with the other reports, specify the date and time
range of interest. The user may choose to divide the time range into smaller increments under the Increment window. Then enter the
reference period in which you want to compare the current usage against under the Start of Comparison Period.
☞
Note
If the reference period has more days than the current period, then it will be reduced to the number of days in the current
period. The start time will remain as selected.
A sample Energy Usage Comparison report is shown below. The report is divided into three sections: Energy Usage kWHr, Energy
Usage kvarHr, and Demand Max kW. Each section displays the current usage vis-a-vis the percent change from the refernce period for
On Peak time, Partial Peak time, Off Peak time, and Total. A negative number indicates that the current usage is smaller than that of the
reference period.
Figure 41 Sample Energy Usage Comparison Report
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–33
UPS Verification
Figure 42 Setup Screen for UPS Verification Report
STARFI - System Temporary Average RMS (Variation) Frequency Index
This report has a different query setup than the standard query setup. This report is produced for defined instrument pairs. The instrument pairs were created under the Setup tab for the UPS Verification Answer Module. The query setup for the UPS Verification report
is shown above.
As with other reports, a date range or a start and end time need to be specified. However, for the UPS report instead of selecting an
instrument, the user selects one or more instrument pairs.
The purpose of the UPS Verification Answer Module is to verify that the UPS or another mitigation device is functioning properly. A UPS
DataNode pair consists of a DataNode monitoring the input of the UPS and another DataNode
monitoring the output of the UPS. This was designed to be done with DataNodes that support cross-triggering. If the UPS is functioning properly, the DataNode at the UPS output will only see cross-triggered events. If the DataNodes being used do not support crosstriggering, then no event should be seen on the output DataNode. However, without cross-triggering, the absence of an event is not
conclusive. The status determined by the UPS Verification Answer Module may be one of the following:
PASS
The UPS DataNode Pair has a status of PASS when an event is seen at the input DataNode, and only the cross-triggered event is seen
on the output. The UPS has been determined to be functioning properly, as the disturbance on the input was not seen on the output.
FAIL
The UPS DataNode Pair has a status of FAIL when an event is seen at the input DataNode, and a disturbance event is also seen on the
output DataNode within the time window defined at setup. The UPS has been determined to be not functioning properly.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–34
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Indterminate
The UPS DataNode Pair has a status of Indeterminate when an event is seen at the input DataNode, and no event is seen on the output DataNode. The status is Indeterminate because no cross-triggered event was seen to verify that the output DataNode itself is functioning correctly.
The report consists of a table with event summary information for both the input and output DataNodes of the UPS Pairs and status
information. The report also contains a Mag/Dur plot with data from both DataNode marked separately. A sample report can be seen
below.
Figure 43 Sample UPS Verification Report
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–35
Figure 44 Sample UPS Mag-Dur plot
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–36
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Fault Location
This report requires no additional query parameters. It allows for the selection of multiple DataNodes. The information required for this
Answer Module can be seen in section Radial Fault Location on page 76 of chapter 7 Setup Page on page 45. The module computes
distance-to-fault for all possible balance and unbalance faults, i.e. three-phase fault; single-line-to-ground (SLG) fault of phases A, B,
and C; double-line-to-ground (DLG) faults of phases AB, BC, and CA; and line-to-line-to-ground (LLG) of phases AB, BC, and CA.
Thus, there are ten types of faults considered. The distance-to-faults are estimated using two different equations; therefore, there are
two estimates (lower and upper) for each fault type. A sample report is shown below.
Figure 45 Setup Screen for Fault Location Report
Figure 46 Sample Radial Fault Report
RBM (Reliability Benchmarking Methodology)
The RBM Answer Module adds two reports. The first is the RBM RMS Variation Indices (see section Rms Variation Indices on page 28
for description) and the second is the RBM Aggregated Rms Event List described next.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–37
RBM Aggregated RMS Event List
This report is a table of RBM Aggregated Events for the specified DataNode and time range. The RBM Aggregation Parameters define
how the events are aggregated. For more information on the RBM Aggregation Parameters refer to section Aggregation Parameters on
page 77 of chapter 7 Setup Page on page 45. The query setup for this report is the standard report query information, and requires no
additional parameters to be selected. More parameters such as type of aggregation and method are set up in the Setup tab. A sample
report is shown on Figure 48 on page 38.
Figure 47 Setup Screen for Aggregated RMS Event List Report
Figure 48 Sample RBM Aggregated Event Report
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–38
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Help
Much of what is written in this manual can be found in the Help option onscreen. Expanding the Help tree will
provide Reports Topics and Index links.
Report Topics
The Report Topics page simply says that the user is currently in the Reports page. Four active buttons are found in this page: Contents,
Index, <<, and >>. These buttons present different ways to access the same Help information. The differences lay only in the way each
button organizes and lists information.
The >> button brings the user forward to the next linked page.
The << button brings the user backward to the previously linked page.
Index
The Index page operates exactly like the Index portion of a book. Information is listed and categorized in alphabetical order. Click any
button from A to Z to show various related topics under each letter. The topics are featured as hyperlinks.
The Contents button operates exactly like the Table of Contents in books. Information is listed and organized under different headings.
The headings normally used here are the tab names. Sub-topics per heading appear as hyperlinks.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–39
6
Real-time Page
This chapter describes how the system enables users to view DataNode information in real-time mode. Through the different display
options available, the users are able to view and capture DataNode information as it happens and when it happens on site.
6.1
Real-time Page
The Real-time page allows you to display the parameters being monitored by the DataNodes in a continually updated manner. The
definition of "real-time" is dependent on the DataNode itself, as well as the communication propagation delays. Typically, the various
parameter values are updated every couple of seconds. The data can be displayed in a variety of formats, including a tabular meter
panel. The Real-time menu page appears as follows.
Figure 49 Real-time home page
Views
Meter Dials
The Meter Dials enable you to define the parameters and create dial-type readings of each enabled DataNode parameter. The readings
are updated at approximately once per second.
After selecting the parameters and creating the meter panel, the attributes of the meter panel can be changed by right-clicking the
mouse button when the cursor is over the dial. Three categories can be selected:
General (contains options for changing color of the background and the needle)
Axis (contains options for changing min/max limits, label and line color, and text font)
Set Points (contains options for changing color, value and active status)
In the sample screens found next page, parameter values for a Service Entrance DataNode have been checked, after which the Create
Meter Panel button was clicked. This resulted in the screen showing dial-type readings. Right-clicking on the dials shows Properties for
General, Axis and Set Point options. A sample Set Point display screen also appears next page.
For a 5560 DataNode, new parameters are defined to support real-time display of flicker measurements. These parameters are
required to meet the specification of a flicker meter. See chapter 10.9 Real-time Display of QOS Data on page 136 for more information.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–40
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
click to display parameters
in dial-type readings
click to display the
Set Point dialog box
The following are the reference points when
using the Set Point color drop down menus:
The 1st set point color originates from the
bottom (left of the dial), while the 2nd set point
color applies from the 1st going clockwise.
The 4th set point color originates from the top
(right of the dial), while the 3rd set point color
applies from the 4th going counterclockwise.
Figure 50 Meter dials
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–41
Meter Panel
The Meter Panel real time display consists of a table showing the parameters being measured by the DataNode for each of its channels. It is updated approximately every five seconds. Some power measurement information for a Service Entrance DataNode is shown
in the sample Meter Panel table below.
Figure 51 Meter panel screen display
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–42
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Phasor Plot
The Phasor Plot displays a graph that indicates phase relations between the voltage and current based upon the angles of the fundamentals, as determined by Fourier analysis. Phasor plot is only available for use with the Mavosys 10.
The phasor screen shows eight phasors autoscaled with zero degrees to the right (normally channel A voltage) for clockwise rotation
and with synchronized channels. Users are allowed to display up to four channels at any one time for either volts or amps, or a single
channel for both volts and amps, depending on the phases being monitored.
The left sidebar shows rms values for:
• Volts/Amps for channels A, B, C and D
☞
Note
For Channel D, if rms value is less than 20% of the maximum voltage (or current), the phasor is not displayed;
• Zero, positive and negative values for Volts/Amps;
• Zero, positive and negative sequence component values for Volts/Amps.
Depending on the phases being monitored, up to four channels may be displayed at any one time for either Volts or Amps, or a single
channel for both Volts and Amps. An arrow head and channel label are displayed on the vector.
☞
Note
The phasors shown in sample screen below rotate Clockwise from 0º, versus the more typical Counter Clockwise rotation.
Figure 52 Phasor Plot screen display
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–43
Scope Mode
The Scope display shows real time waveform data for up to 8 channels. Scope mode is only available in certain DataNode types, such
as in EPQ DataNodes.
Voltage waveform
Current waveform
controls to set waveform properties
Figure 53 Scope mode
Help
Much of what is written in this manual can be found in the Help option onscreen. Expanding the Help tree will provide Real-time Topics
and Index links.
Real-time Topics
The Real-time Topics page simply says that the user is currently in the Real-time page. Four active buttons are found in this page: Contents, Index, <<, and >>. These buttons present different ways to access the same Help information. The differences lay only in the
way each button organizes and lists information.
The >> button brings the user forward to the next linked page.
The << button brings the user backward to the previously linked page.
Index
The Index page operates exactly like the Index portion of a book. Information is listed and categorized in alphabetical order. Click any
button from A to Z to show various related topics under each letter. The topics are featured as hyperlinks.
The Contents button operates exactly like the Table of Contents in books. Information is listed and organized under different headings.
The headings normally used here are the tab names. Sub-topics per heading appear as hyperlinks.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–44
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
7
Setup Page
This chapter explains the various programmable settings for the Encore Series Software. For security reasons, the settings can be
changed only by persons with admin access privileges.
7.1
Setup Page
The Setup page is used to view and/or change any of the programmable features of the Encore Series Software and any DataNodes
connected to the system. The Encore Series Setup page is generic, without regard to which types of DataNodes are connected to the
system. The DataNode Setup pages are specific to the type of DataNode. The left-hand frame contains the interactive tree from which
users can view the setup information they need. The Setup tree can be expanded or collapsed. Click on the plus sign to further expand
the tree and show more of the options available. Click on the minus sign to collapse the tree back up one level.
In order for a new user to access the system, the system administrator (someone with Admin privileges) must first set up an account
for the new user. The system is shipped with default Admin, Guest and other accounts, which the system administrator should customize with your own name and password. Any changes made in the setup parameters are not confirmed until the Save Setup button
found on the bottom of the page has been clicked.
InfoNode
InfoNode Setup can be expanded to reveal the following data folders: Users, Notifications, Communications, Answer Module, DataNodes, and Help Desk.
Users
The Users section includes Guest, Viewer, Operator and Admin User. An Admin User can add new users by right clicking the mouse
while the cursor is over the User folder. Only the Admin User can create accounts for others and change Security Levels. Once the
accounts are created, the other types of User can change the User Name, Password and Proficiency Level.
User Name - up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered for the name.
Password - up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be used for the password. A confirmation window pops up to verify the password
before proceeding.
Description - usually contains descriptive nature of the account created for a particular user.
Security Level - can only be assigned by someone with Admin privileges.
Proficiency Level - select either Novice or Expert user, where the setting will determine which types of reports and views will be displayed.
Figure 54 Setup home page
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–45
Sample display window screen for a user named ‘guest’. By
selecting an item on the Properties column, a cursor or
choices will appear on the right column space. Enter your
desired Values.
Certain property items can be accessed only by those with
admin privileges. Read next sections on Security Level and
Proficiency Level.
Figure 55
Security Level
There are four levels of security provided. The security levels can only be assigned by someone with Admin
privileges. These levels are known as roles and are defined as follows:
Guest - Can only view data. Cannot change user preferences or system setups. Cannot change the configuration of the instrument in
any way.
Viewer - Can view data and access basic setup features. Can change only basic user preferences, e.g plot title, text size/color, background color, etc. You can open user preferences dialog box by right clicking on the event image and selecting properties.
Operator - Can view data, change user preferences, and change select DataNode and Encore Series Software setups. Cannot add
users or change security levels.
Administrator - Can access basic setup, security account management, and network configuration parameters. Can access all features of the Encore Series Software including factory setup.
☞
Note
The Administrator mode is accessible only to users with administrative privileges.
Encore Series Software supports log-in accounts that have a user name, password and security level/role associated with each
account. The application is able to support more than 50 accounts.
allow basic user
privileges limited
to viewing (for
Guest) and
changing only
user preferences
data (for Viewer)
allow advanced
user privileges;
however only the
Administrator can
add users and
change security
levels
Figure 56 Encore Series Software Setup page
Above screen shows sample new user account being entered by the System Administrator. The Administrator assigns the security
level that determines extent of user privileges.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–46
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Proficiency Level: Novice or Expert
Users may select between Novice or Expert modes which determine the number of DataNode tab settings that can be viewed and the
types of reports and views that can be displayed.
Users assigned the security level of Guest can only view, not change, DataNode settings. All Setup tab options for Guests are disabled.
The Novice mode displays only those options absolutely essential to the operation of the system. This entails only allowing users to
access four DataNode Setup tabs - the Identification and Status tab, Communication tab, Polling tab, and Basic tab.
The Expert mode displays all the Setup tabs available in a particular DataNode.
To switch between Novice and Expert mode:
1.
Click on Setup > > InfoNode > Users > User name.
2.
Click on Proficiency Level to display drop down menu.
3.
Select between Novice and Expert mode.
4.
When done, click on Save Setup found at the bottom of the page. A Save confirmation window will pop up.
5.
Click on Yes to save changes or No to exit without saving changes.
limited tab settings
Figure 57 Sample DataNode screen set under Novice mode; Basic tab activated
complete tab settings
(other tabs not captured
on screen)
Figure 58 Sample DataNode screen set under Expert mode
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–47
Data
Data setup allows you to specify the number of additional days to keep each data type (Keep event data, Keep periodic data, Keep
summary data) before purging. When the Encore Series application becomes full, it purges data in a first-in-first-out order. This feature
allows you to prioritize the order in which data is purged. The number of days to keep data values are used to bias the purge time of
each type of data respectively. In an Encore Series Software system with sufficient storage, this results in the lifetime of one type of data
being extended by the specified number of days relative to other data types. The Encore Series Software always purges old data when
it needs space for new data. Consequently, the lifetime of data is only extended by the specified number of days when sufficient storage is available. The purge time for data is biased and stored when the data is saved. Changes to the bias values are not applied to
previously stored data.
The Data setup also allows you to remove data stored in the Encore Series Software. Select any one or a combination of DataNodes
opposite Remove data from DataNodes. Specify the date and time range when you want the data removed from the DataNodes using
Remove data at or later than or Remove data earlier than. Choose one or more data types to remove (Remove event data, Remove
periodic data, Remove summary data). Once the data removal selection is specified, check the Enable data removal property and save
the properties to start removing data. When data removal is in progress, all selection fields are disabled. You can stop data removal by
clearing the Enable data removal property and saving the properties. Data removal can be a long process, particularly in a busy software application with large amounts of data. Refresh the Data tab to see if data removal is complete.
Figure 59 Data - General tab properties
Storage
Storage setup is related to how much memory Space to keep free (MB) to add other software modules in the future, and whether to
Rebuild index or Rebuild query table to compact the memory.
Log
The Log setup allows you to specify the number of additional days to keep each log entry type (Encore Series activity, User activity,
DataNode management, Alarms) before purging. This mechanism is the same as that used for handling other purgeable data in the
InfoNode. Refer to Data setup for more information on purging data. Right-click on the Log setup tree item to access the Clear Log
menu command. Selecting this command removes all log entries stored in the Encore Series Software.
☞
Note
Only Admin users can configure the log settings and delete log entries.
Notifications
The Notifications section is subdivided into Recipients and Senders. Notifications allow the system to automatically inform users about
specific events related to every DataNode connected to the Encore Series Software. Notifications also inform users whether DataNode
connection is lost or re-established, and when the Encore Series starts.
Recipients
Recipients define who will receive notifications. The General tab contains properties to indicate recipient notification status. Only those
with Admin privileges may set whether to dispatch notifications or not. Users who access the Encore Series system as Guest, Viewer
or Operator will find the General properties automatically disabled. They are not allowed to dispatch notifications nor change time settings when notifications will be sent to recipients.
Notifications pending - a counter on the number of notifications that will be dispatched to recipients at specified time interval. The
counter will reset to zero once the pending notifications are sent to recipients. The counter sets automatically and is not user-programmable.
Dispatch notifications - the enable/disable checkbox indicate whether recipients will receive/not receive notifications.
Aggregation period (seconds) - the time interval upon which notifications are sent to recipients and updated. Notifications update is
done every specified number of seconds (i.e. every 900 sec = 15 minutes).
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–48
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Figure 60 Recipients setup screen - General tab properties
To Add/Delete Recipient names:
• Right-click on the Recipient folder. The following options will appear: Add Recipient or Clear Notifications.
• Click on Add Recipients if you want to add a name in the list of recipients. Click on Clear Notifications if you want to delete
any pending notifications to all recipients.
• Click on the Recipient Name to enter or change name and to program information about the type of recipient. Note the following tabs available on the bottom portion of the viewing area: General, ADAM 4060, E-Mail, Pager.
• Right-click on the recipient name if you want to Copy Recipient (duplicate recipient name and properties), Delete Recipient
(remove recipient on the list), Test Recipient (send test messages to recipient), or Clear Notifications (reset pending notifications for the recipient).
Notifications are dispatched to recipients in three ways: through ADAM 4060 Relay outputs, E-Mail, and/or Pager. Recipients must be
set up before items in the Senders folder are programmed.
Click on a recipient to display the General tab properties. The Recipient name provided will be used to identify recipient and will appear
under the Recipients folder on the left-hand frame. Further Description can be added to aid in recipient identification. Each recipient
has a corresponding ADAM 4060 Relay outputs tab, E-Mail tab, and Pager tab described next. Note that when changing from one tab
to another, a save confirmation box appears to confirm whether user wants to save the most recent changes in settings or not.
Figure 61 Recipient Name/General properties setup
Click on the ADAM 4060 tab. The Enable ADAM 4060 Notifications box must be checked for communication signals to ADAM modules to occur. The ADAM 4060 relay contact closure module is used to signal notifications to designated recipients. See chapter 14.1.2
on page 191 for instructions on how to set up the ADAM 4060 contact closure module. Data for the ADAM modules may be configured in various format, one of which is the hexadecimal format displayed opposite the Output Value property. This format is selected by
setting bits 0 and 1 of the data format. ASCII’s condensed hexadecimal representation of data allows high resolution, quick communi-
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–49
cation and easy conversion to computer-compatible integer format. See chapter 14 ADAM Handler Setup on page 190 for more information on ADAM Communication modules.
Figure 62 Recipient ADAM 4060 notification setup
Click on the E-mail tab. The Enable E-mail must be checked to allow notifications to be sent to the recipient’s email address. Since an
e-mail can be of a larger size than a page, messages are more descriptive. Hyperlinks to event details are also available. Type in the
recipient’s electronic mail Address in the space provided.
Figure 63 Recipient E-mail notification setup
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–50
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Click on the Pager tab. The Enable Pager must be checked to allow notifications to be sent to the recipient’s pager unit. Type in the
corresponding Pager Number and PIN Number where notification signals will be sent. Alphanumeric or numeric page containing alarm
details are sent to a list of recipients. In order to prevent nuisance pages when many problems occurs at or around the same time,
pages are aggregated over a short period of time. Therefore, one page will be sent instead of many pages.
Figure 64 Recipient Pager notification setup
Senders
The Senders section branches out into DataNodes and InfoNodes.
DataNodes
Each DataNode has its own unique identification and is monitored on their Connection status (whether connection is lost or re-established) and on the Data that they register.
Connection
The Recipients tab indicate the names of recipients who are currently connected to the DataNode. Enable each recipient that should
receive notifications pertaining to DataNode connection described next, provided the Administrator enabled/granted Dispatch Notifications (see section Notifications on page 48).
Figure 65 DataNode Recipients connection setup
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–51
The Events tab contains the facility to communicate DataNode connection status to recipients. Connection lost must be enabled if you
want to notify recipients whenever DataNode connection is lost. Connection re-established must be enabled if you want to notify recipients whenever DataNode connection is restored.
Figure 66 DataNode Events connection setup
Data
The Recipients tab indicate the names of Recipients who are currently connected to the DataNode. Enable each Recipient that should
receive notifications pertaining to specified events detected by the DataNode, provided the Administrator enabled/granted Dispatch
Notifications (see section Recipients on page 48).
Figure 67 DataNode Recipients notification setup
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–52
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
The Enable Rms Notification must be checked to allow the system to send rms disturbance event notifications to recipients. Threshold
properties for the different Rms Disturbance Categories have been set under the Basic Characterizer - Rms Disturbance Categories
tab (see section Rms Disturbance Categories on page 64). The Enable Category allows users to select which category they want to
activate and, as per the rms disturbance category definition on Figure 86 on page 64, register as rms event. This selective enabling
process allows users more control over the event notifications they receive.
Figure 68 DataNode Rms Disturbances event notification setup
The Enable Transient Notification must be checked to allow the system to send Transient disturbances event notifications to recipients.
Threshold properties for the different Transient Disturbance Categories have been set under the Basic Characterizer - Transient Disturbance Categories tab (see section Transient Disturbance Categories on page 65). The Enable Category allows users to select which
category they want to activate and, as per the transient disturbance category definition on Figure 88 on page 66, register as transient
event. This selective enabling process allows users more control over the event notifications they receive.
Figure 69 DataNode Transient Disturbances event notification setup
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–53
The Enable Threshold Crossing Notification must be checked to allow the system to send specified parameter threshold crossing notifications to recipients. The Threshold Registers lists the parameters available for which various threshold limits can be defined. Click on
a parameter (i.e. Harmonic Voltage) and select the threshold limit/s (High-High, High, Normal, Low, Low-Low, Deadband) that you want
enabled/disabled for that particular parameter. This means that once an enabled parameter has exceeded the threshold limit, an event
will be registered. This selective enabling process allows users more control over the event notifications they receive and prevent the
processing of unwanted data.
Figure 70 DataNode Parameter Threshold Crossing notification setup
InfoNodes
Contains notifications regarding InfoNode system shutdown and start-up.
Shutdown
The Encore Series Software Recipients tab indicates the names of recipients who will receive notifications when the Encore Series
shuts down operation. See section Recipients on page 48 for the procedure on how to add/delete recipients.
Figure 71 Encore Series Software Shutdown notification setup
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–54
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Start-up
The Encore Series Software Recipients tab indicate the names of recipients who will receive notifications when the Encore Series starts
up operation. See section Recipients on page 48 for the procedure on how to add/delete recipients.
Figure 72 Encore Series Software Start-up notification setup
Encore Series Software automatically communicates with each DataNode connected to the system via different communications
methods to download and store data. From high-speed fiber connections to analog modems, Encore Series supports industry-standard communications methods such as:
Stanadard: 10/100BaseT Ethernet Port, RS232 and RS485
Optional: analog Modem, GSM/GPRS
Supported protocols include TCP/IP, HTTP, XML, Modbus TCP/RTU
Notifications: email, contact closure, pager
Communications
The Communications data folder contains information on Internet Protocols and network settings; this is where communications
address settings for the Encore Series are configured.
7.2
Configuring a GSM/GPRS Connection to a Mavosys 10 Power Quality DataNode
GSM/GPRS
Unlike standard network connections that are initiated by the Encore Series Software to a Mavosys 10 DataNode, GSM/GPRS connections are initiated from the Mavosys 10 DataNode to the Encore Series. This is required because GSM/GPRS service providers
implement a routing scheme similar to a NAT firewall.
GSM/GPRS devices do support incoming messages which the Mavosys 10 DataNode utilizes as a signal to initiate a message to the
Encore Series. For sending messages to a GSM/GPRS device via SMTP, the service provider implements an e-mail address for the
device. Generally the e-mail address is composed of the phone number for the GSM/GPRS device followed by the domain name of the
service provider. For example, Cingular Wireless uses xxxxxxxxxx@mmode.com to address a device where xxxxxxxxxx is the phone
number of the remote GSM/GPRS device.
To connect to a Mavosys 10 DataNode via GSM/GPRS, the Encore Series Software sends a message to the service provider via SMTP
e-mail. The service provider in turn signals the Mavosys 10. Finally the Mavosys 10 DataNode connects to the Encore Series. For this
to work, the software must be configured to send e-mail to the GSM/GPRS service provider and must have a range of TCP/IP ports
open for incoming connections.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–55
Figure 73 GSM/GPRS setup page
The procedure below shows how to configure Encore Series Software for GSM/GPRS connections to a Mavosys 10
DataNode.
Make sure that the Encore Series Software is configured to send e-mail. This generally involves entering the address of a SMTP server
on the Communications > Serial Connections > SMTP Email setup page.
Serial Connections
SMTP Email
Figure 74 SMTP Email General setup tab
Make sure a range of TCP ports are open through any firewall between the Encore Series and the GSM/GPRS service provider. Enter
this range along with the public address of the Encore Series Software on the Communications > Network Connections setup page.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–56
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Network Connections (see section Network Connections on page 60 for more information on network connection settings)
Figure 75 Network Connections General setup tab
Select the "GSM via e-mail" connection and enter the e-mail address of the Mavosys 10's GSM/GPRS device as part of the device
address on the Mavosys 10 Power Quality DataNode setup page - Communication tab.
Mavosys 10 Power Quality DataNode (see chapter 13 Mavosys 10 PQ DataNode Setup on page 175 for more information on DataNode settings)
Figure 76 Mavosys 10 Power Quality DataNode Communication setup tab
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–57
MMS
MMS or Manufacturing Messaging Specification is where communications address settings for the Encore Series Software are configured. The MMS protocol is used for connections to UCA compliant devices such as the 5520, 5530 and 5560 DataNodes. The Encore
Series application also accepts incoming MMS connections for system discovery functions.
MMS contains the following property settings:
PSEL stands for Presentation Selector with default value 00 00 00 01.
SSEL refers to Session Selector with default value 00 01.
TSEL means Transport Selector with default value 00 01.
In general, you do not need to change the MMS settings from their default settings. The PSEL, SSEL, and TSEL values must match
those of the DataNode that the Encore Series communicates with. A mismatch results in “Connection Failures”.
Figure 77 MMS General setup tab
Modem Connections
The Modem Connections is a branch under “Communications”. There are two types of setups: one is for the “Encore Series Software
on PC” software, the other is for “InfoNode”.
Encore Series Software on PC
Encore Series Software on PC uses the computer’s modem setting for communications.
Figure 78
The Encore Series Software uses the Windows® TAPI when accessing modem communications resources. The assumption is that the
Windows® modem to be used for communications with the Encore Series Mavosys 10 device has been properly installed prior to executing this procedure. If the modem is not on, or was not on when Windows® was started, it may be necessary to turn the modem on
and restart Windows®. Windows® searches for installed serial modems at startup. If it does not find them, it may not allow them to be
configured in the Control Panel.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–58
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Follow the steps below to configure the port speed for the Windows® modem connected to the computer:
1.
Press the Start button.
2.
Select Settings and then Control Panel.
3.
Double-click on Phone and Modem Options.
4.
Select Modems in the subsequent dialog box.
5.
In the list of modems that is displayed, click to highlight the modem in question and select Properties.
6.
On the General tab of the modem properties dialog box, select 57600 as the maximum port speed.
7.
Click OK to exit from the open dialog box.
8.
Close the Control Panel.
☞
Note
The port speed of 57600 (57.6kbps) may be substituted with 115000. You may experiment to find the maximum port speed
that will work for your system.
InfoNode
The InfoNode has only 2 types of Network connection, the LAN Connection (see section Local Area Network (LAN) on page 61) and
the Modem Connection. For the Modem Connection, expand the Modem Connection branch, then click on the Modem branch. Proceed to set the baud rate. In most cases the default rate is the correct setting. If desired, you can also set a custom modem initialization string.
Figure 79
Next expand the Network Connection branch and then select Dial-Up networking to display the modem's networking settings. You
can specify settings for both incoming and outgoing connections.
For incoming connections specify a network IP address and network mask value. In most cases the default values should suffice.
For out going connections, enter your ISP Phone Number, ISP User Name and ISP Password.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–59
Figure 80
Network Connections
Network contains the properties that allow the Encore Series Software to link DataNodes and ADAM modules to its self-contained web
server and user interface. It is possible to communicate with the Encore Series Software through either Dial-up Network or Local Area
Network (LAN) connections. Each communication method requires specific configuration settings. The Network Connections - General
setup tab shown below features the settings required for the Encore Series Software to operate on the network.
Figure 81 Network Connections - General setup tab
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–60
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Dial-up Network
Dial-up Network features the settings required for dial-up or PPP connections to establish communication links between the appropriate Encore Series DataNodes and the modem where Encore Series Software is installed.
Figure 82 Dial-up Network - General setup tab
The Encore Series Software uses the PAP protocol for PPP dial-up connection authentication. This is a simple, unencrypted authentication protocol. It is more secure than the standard web page authentication but less secure than an encryption based PPP authentication protocol. You must therefore use an ISP that supports PPP dial-up accounts that allow PAP authentication. Most ISPs permit
PAP authentication.
Windows® 2000 server is used by some enterprises to provide remote access. Windows® 2000 defaults to a very secure
configuration and hence does not support PAP authentication by default.
To enable PAP authentication on Windows® 2000 server, there are several configuration options that must be set:
• PAP must be enabled in the Routing and Remote Access Service management console for the RRAS server
• PAP must be enabled in the RRAS policy object in the RRAS management console
• Clear text authentication must be permitted in the RRAS policy object
Only when PAP is enabled in all three places will a Windows® 2000 RRAS server authenticate a PAP authenticated PPP login. In addition to this, you must specify the login ID in the Encore Series Software using DOMAIN\UserID notation for PAP authenticated logins to
a Windows® 2000 RRAS server. This is described in the Microsoft Knowledge Base article at http://support.microsoft.com.
Local Area Network (LAN)
LAN features the settings required for administrative set up of the Encore Series Software for IP addressing.
Figure 83 LAN - General setup tab
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–61
Serial Connections
Serial connections can be used to communicate with modems, or with DataNodes that utilize such communication types, i.e. the 554x
and ADAM modules. The COM ports can have a Name and Description added. Serial connection status is also displayed. Users can
also set the baud rate or Bits per second {110 - 115k}, Data size (bits) {5, 6, 7, 8}, Parity {None, Even, Odd}, and number of Stop-bits
{1, 1.5, 2}.
Figure 84 Serial Connections - General setup tab
Battery
Where the software is running on a 5502 or 5504 InfoNode, the Encore Series system allows users to check on the Battery status
(whether charged or discharged) and the remaining Battery capacity. For convenience, the system allows users to keep date/time
records when the Last discharge test was and when the Next discharge test will be.
Time
Where the software is running on a 5502 or 5504 InfoNode, the Encore Series optionally provides for an on-board GPS receiver capable of receiving time signals from the GPS system and utilizing those signals to continuously update the system clock. If there is no
GPS present or the GPS is present but a signal is not available, then you can specify whether the Time Manager uses the Internal clock
or an Internet clock source (NTP).
To use the Internet clock source (NTP), specify the IP address of the NTP Server Host. The procedure below describes how to set up
Encore Series Software to communicate with the NTP server.
1.
Go to the tree branch “Regional Settings” and set the Encore Series Software for the region it is in (refer to the next section for a brief discussion of Regional Settings setup properties).
2.
Go to the Tree branch “Time”.
c. Click on the drop down list for “Alternate time source” and choose “NTP server”.
d. Enter the IP address (in numeric form - ###.###.###.###) of the NTP server in which Encore Series Software will
synchronize with under the “NTP server host”.
☞
Note
You may use a name such as “bitsy.mit.edu” for NTP server but then you must enter the IP address of a DNS server in the
Encore Series Software. The DNS server address is entered under Setup > Communications > Network Connections.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–62
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
A sample Time window screen appears as follows.
Figure 85 Setup screen for Communications - Time
Regional Settings
Regional Settings allow you to use different formatting conventions found in different parts of the world. The following properties are
found under the Date and Time tab. Select the applicable Time zone depending on your geographic location. Enable/Disable the
option to Adjust for daylight saving changes. Select your preferred date and time settings to include Date separator (/ or - or .), Date
ordering (mm/dd/yy, dd/mm/yy, yy/mm/dd), Time separator (: or .), and Time format (12 versus 24 hour format).
Under the Number tab, users can set the Measurement system using the U.S. system or the Metric system of measurement.
Answer Module
Answer Modules provide different types of reports that answer specific questions about data, such as whether the transient event was
caused by a PF capacitor switching or whether the event occurred upstream or downstream from the monitoring point. The list of
Answer Modules depends upon which optional modules were purchased and installed to communicate with the Encore Series Software.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–63
Basic Characterizer
Basic Characterizer enables automatic detection of voltage sags which are often the most common type of power disturbance. Once
detected, the Answer Module characterizes the sag. This Answer Module is the general and/or basic characterizer of the data. It characterizes RMS events as sags, swells, or interruptions. This Answer Module characterizes data based upon categories. The default
settings of the categories are based on IEEE 1159 guide for characterizing power quality events, and these default settings can be
seen in the figure next page.
The number in the magnitude column represents the range of values starting from that number up to but not including the number in
the cell above it.
For Rms Variations, the categories do not necessarily represent a continuum; they are simply numbers that represent non-overlapping
rectangles in mag/dur space. The categories generally represent increased risk of equipment malfunction. Note that Category 8
(swells) only stops at 125% for display purposes and in reality represents any swell greater than 105%.
For Transient Variations, the categories represent a continuum of peak transient over voltage. Note that Category 7 only stops at 205%
for display purposes and in reality represents any transient with a peak magnitude greater than 190%.
Figure 86 Definition of Rms & Transient Disturbance Categories
The user may modify the categories. The setup for this Answer Module allows the user to define the criteria for rms and Transient Disturbance Categories.
Rms Disturbance Categories
The user may define up to nine rms disturbance categories using the threshold property settings found in the setup screen. Click on a
desired category, then set the corresponding threshold property limit (see definitions of the threshold properties below). Assign different
threshold settings for each category. Once the threshold limits are crossed and the Category Enabled box checked, the rms disturbance category will be classified as an event. These pre-defined rms disturbance event categories are then reported as notifications to
recipients (see Figure 68 on page 53).
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–64
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
For example, in the Rms Disturbance Categories setup screen below, Category 1 was selected. Limit values for Category 1 were
defined in the respective threshold property fields. The Category Enabled box has been checked to activate Category 1 as an event
when threshold limits have been crossed.
Figure 87 Setup screen for Rms Disturbance Categories
For the selected category, the following fields need to be defined. Care should be taken so that categories do not overlap or that dead
areas are created.
Category Enabled
For this to be a disturbance category it must be enabled. Check the box to activate or clear the box to deactivate.
Minimum Magnitude
The minimum magnitude is defined as a percent of normal that defines this category.
Maximum Magnitude
The maximum magnitude is defined as percent of normal that defines this category.
Minimum Time
The minimum duration is the minimum amount of time that the magnitude must be sustained.
Maximum Time
The maximum duration is the maximum amount of time that the magnitude can be sustained.
Category Name
The category name describes the defined category, and will appear in the characteristics field in Event Summaries and Notifications.
Transient Disturbance Categories
The user may define up to nine transient disturbance categories using the threshold property settings found in the setup screen. Click
on a desired category, then set the corresponding threshold property limit (see definitions of the threshold properties below). Assign different threshold limits for each category. Once the threshold limits are crossed and the Category Enabled box checked, the Transient
disturbance category will be classified as an event. These pre-defined Transient disturbance event categories are then reported as notifications to recipients (see Figure 68 on page 53).
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–65
For example, in the Transient Disturbance Categories setup screen below, Category 2 was selected. Limit values for Category 2 were
defined in the respective threshold property fields. The Category Enabled box has been checked to activate Category 2 as an event
when threshold limits have been crossed.
Figure 88 Setup screen for Transient Disturbance Categories
Category Enabled
For this to be a disturbance category it must be enabled. Check the box to activate or clear the box to deactivate.
Minimum Magnitude
The minimum magnitude is defined as a percent of normal that defines this category.
Maximum Magnitude
The maximum magnitude is defined as percent of normal that defines this category.
Category Name
The category name describes the defined category.
Energy Usage
The Encore Series Software provides users the ability to track power flow and generate reports for the purpose of monitoring energy
usage and expense. The setup necessary for the expense reports has three sections, namely Peak Time, DataNodes, and Rate Structures. See section Aggregated Energy Expense on page 29 of chapter 5 Reports Page on page 24 for details on the energy expense
and usage reports.
☞
Note
Utility rate structures are very complex and vary greatly. Therefore, the Energy Usage Answer Module is not intended to completely replicate your utility bill and is intended for comparison only.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–66
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Peak and Partial Peak Time
Reducing consumption during peak times or shifting loads to off-peak times amounts to significant savings on energy costs. Energy
providers typically charge different rates for energy consumption during peak time and energy consumption during off-peak times. The
setup for peak time is described below.
Figure 89 Setup screen for Energy Usage - Peak Time
Under Peak Time or Partial Peak Time category, select the desired day (for bank select click+shift) and check the Include Day box to
enable time settings. Clear the box to disable the selected days.
Start Time
Start time refers to when the peak time begins.
End Time
End Time refers to when the peak time ends.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–67
DataNodes tab
The DataNodes tab allows users to select the DataNode site where they are monitoring energy consumption. The user may specify the
square footage that each DataNode is monitoring. This will allow users to view energy expense on per square foot basis. The setup
required for the DataNodes energy usage can be seen below.
Figure 90 Setup screen for Energy Usage - DataNodes
Square Footage
Select the desired DataNode and enter the square footage that the DataNode is monitoring.
Rate Structures tab
The user may define up to twenty different rate structures. The user-defined rate structures allow users to produce energy expense
reports that accurately reflect the charges being applied by a respective energy provider. The Rate Structures setups required are discussed below.
Figure 91 Setup screen for Energy Usage - Rate Structures
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–68
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Enable Rate Structure
For the rate structure to be available in the energy expense reports, it must be enabled. Check the box to activate or clear the box to
deactivate.
Rate Structure Name
The name used to describe the rate structure. This name will be displayed in the list for selecting a rate structure.
On-peak energy consumption $/kWHr
The cost of energy consumption, measured in kWHr, during the peak time.
Partial-peak energy consumption $/kWHr
The cost of energy consumption, measured in kWHr, during the partial peak time.
Off-peak energy consumption $/kWHr
The cost of energy consumption, measured in kWHr, during the off-peak time.
On-peak power consumption $/kW
The penalty charged for the maximum demand (kW) that occurred during peak time over the billing period.
Partial-peak power consumption $/kW
The penalty charged for the maximum demand (kW) that occurred during partial peak time over the billing period.
Off-peak power consumption $/kW
The penalty charged for the maximum demand (kW) that occurred during off-peak time over the billing period.
On-peak energy consumption $/kvarHr
The cost of energy consumption, measured in kvarHr, during the peak time.
Partial-peak energy consumption $/kvarHr
The cost of energy consumption, measured in kvarHr, during the partial peak time.
Off-peak energy consumption $/kvarHr
The cost of energy consumption, measured in kvarHr, during the off-peak time.
Tax Rate
The tax applied on billings.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–69
kvar Change Observer
The kvar Change Observer Answer Module is for substation applications only. The Answer Module is an add-on to the PF Capacitor
switching module and determines if the kvar change is balanced or unbalanced. The setup required for this Answer Module is
described below.
Figure 92 Setup screen for kvar Change Observer
Activate kvar Change Observer
Check the box to activate or clear the box to deactivate.
kvar balance threshold between phase
If the difference between the phases is greater than the set threshold, the kvar change is unbalanced.
Quality of Supply
Quality of Supply or QOS encompasses the compliance standards for voltage characteristics in public distribution networks. QOS
monitoring and compliance require either a 5560 DataNode, Mavosys 10 Power Quality (PQ) DataNode, or a Mavosys 10 Voltage
DataNode for data acquisition.
The Quality of Supply module has multiple tab setup parameters discussed below. All Answer Module setups are global to the Encore
Series Software and apply to all instruments that are gathering QOS information. For specific information on QOS data acquisition
instruments i.e. 5560 DataNode refer to chapter 10 5560 QOS DataNode Setup on page 118 or Mavosys 10 PQ DataNode refer to
chapter 13 Mavosys 10 PQ DataNode Setup on page 175.
The QOS setup properties include the General datanode settings; Evaluation Period to include Start day, Start time, and Length of
time; and Limit compliance settings for low voltage and medium voltage.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–70
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Quality of Supply General Setup tab
QOS GENERAL setup properties include Enable compliance monitoring, which describes current communications interface
between the DataNode and the Encore Series Software. When checked, this means that the QOS DataNode is actively communicating and exchanging information with the software. When making changes in the different value settings of a DataNode, it is wise to disable the box first, make the changes, then enable compliance box again. This helps ease and speed up processing time. Also when
adding a new DataNode, the Enable compliance monitoring box must be checked to establish link with the DataNode site. Check the
Home page to see which DataNodes are actively communicating with the software.
Figure 93 Setup screen for QOS General tab
The QOS functionality is equipped with monitoring and setup protocols to meet the measurements required for voltagecompliance
monitoring. Users can configure voltage class, Low Voltage Limits and Medium Voltage Limits, under Limits Set. Low voltage is
defined as <1kV nominal. Medium voltage is 1kV to 35kV nominal. Islanded indicates that the system being monitored is not synchronized to grid or isolated from the power grid. The Islanded box is not checked by default indicating that the system is synchronized, not
islanded.
Under MAINS SIGNALING, users can enter Frequencies to Trend. This value field is editable. Use None if no frequency values will be
trended or enter a delimited list of signalling frequencies to monitor using a comma to separate the frequency values. Only the first five
valid frequencies in the list are stored. A valid frequency is divisible by 5 Hz. and is less than 3.84 kHz. The Mains Signaling graph can
be accessed from the Views page, but the signaling frequency is not trended or available for real-time meter.
QOS specifies that various parameters must be within a specified percentage, such as 95% of the standard one week monitoring
period in the case of EN50160. EN50160 is a European standard which specifies that various parameters must be within a specified
percentage for 95% of the standard one week monitoring period. Particularly for users of EN50160 COMPLIANCE MONITORING, the
parameter Use EN50160 compliance settings is provided as an easy option where EN50160 settings can be defined once and
applied as necessary to the specified DataNode/s (selected in field underneath). When this box is checked, all limits in the specified
DataNode will be set to the EN50160-defined settings. The EN50160 settings will overwrite those in the Encore Series Software and
be used for monitoring. Unchecking this box will allow users to modify limit settings to their local standards, or they can enter each on
their own.
Update DataNode settings provides an easy way for users to update settings for the selected DataNode following the configurations
specified in the Encore Series/InfoNode system.
Remember to click the Save Setup button found at the bottom of the page to save any change that have been done. To aid users, a
Save confirmation window appears after changes have been made and when users are about to switch to a different tab.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–71
Quality of Supply Evaluation Period tab
QOS EVALUATION PERIOD properties consist of the Start day, Start time, and Length of the evaluation period.
The setup properties include Start day and Start time, where users can program their preferred day and time when they want the evaluation period to commence. Users can also set the Length of the evaluation period in days, weeks, or months. To program the properties, click on the respective value fields to display the drop down menu.
Figure 94 Setup screen for QOS Evaluation Period
Start day - Specifies the day of the week when the statistics will be reset. Day is selected from a drop down menu containing the days
of the week. The default start day is Sunday.
Start time - Specifies the time of day when the statistics will be reset. Time is an edit box that defaults to 00:00:00 (midnight of Sunday
according to standard). Click on the value field to change time.
Length - Allows the user to set the evaluation period in days, weeks or months.
QOS evaluation period specifies the day of the week when compliance monitoring ends, and statistics will be reset. Start day is
selected from a drop down menu containing the days of the week. The default compliance monitoring start day is Sunday. In the case
of the EN50160 standard, the start day can be altered and the unit will remain in strict compliance with EN50160. However, the length
of the evaluation period cannot be altered due to the 7-day week period by which the unit calculates information in strict compliance
with EN50160. The monitoring site is said to be IN COMPLIANCE if the statistical value over a 7-day week period for the specified
parameters is 95% or greater.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–72
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Quality of Supply Limits tab
QOS LOW VOLTAGE LIMITS and HIGH VOLTAGE LIMITS indicate the limit numbers or range of values required for each parameter to satisfy the voltage compliance standard.
Figure 95 Setup screen for QOS Low Voltage Limits
Figure 96 Setup screen for QOS Medium Voltage Limits
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–73
The Minimum and Maximum values for rms Voltage parameters can be configured. The table below shows the limit numbers or
range of values required for each parameter to satisfy the voltage compliance standard.
Parameter
Limits for QOS Compliance to Pass
Un = Low Voltage (LV) Supply nominal voltage, upper limit 1kV
Uc = Medium Voltage (MV) Supply Characteristics - declared voltage, range 1kV to 35kV
Mean rms over 10 minutes
Supply voltage variations
• ±10% of Un or Uc during 95% of one week
(Under normal operating conditions, excluding situations
arising from faults or voltage interruptions)
• ±10%, -15% of Un for 100% of one week
Supply voltage unbalance
10 minute mean rms values of the negative phase sequence component/
(Under normal operating conditions) 10 minute mean
positive phase sequence component
rms values of the negative phase sequence component/
• ≤2% during 95% each period of one week
positive phase sequence component
Plt ≤ 1 for 95% of the time
Flicker
Also 5% normal, 10% infrequent for LV, 4 &6 for MV
10 minute mean rms values
Individual Harmonic voltage up to the 25th shall be ≤ the value of Un given
Harmonic voltage
under Harmonic Compliance Limits (see table next page) during 95% of
(Under normal operating conditions)
one week
• ≤8% THD (THD up to the 40th)
Individual Interharmonic voltage up to the 24th-25th shall be < the value of
Un given under Interharmonic Compliance Limits during 95% of one week
Interharmonic voltage
• <8% TID (TID up to the 39th/40th)
Statistical data is calculated based on the parameters required by the voltage monitoring standard for determining QOS compliance.
Encore Series Software displays the parameters in the form of tables and graphs available in the QOS Compliance Smart Report,
under Reports tab. The following is a description of each measurement parameter required for determining QOS compliance.
Power Frequency: In case of fault operation, parts of an interconnected system may become isolated. Compliance will be assessed
over an observation period of one week, by a statistical analysis carried out over the sequence of 10 seconds measurement.
Supply Voltage Variations: Under normal operating conditions, load changes cause variations of the 10 minute average supply voltage. Generally this is compensated by automatic voltage regulation within a period of a few tenths of seconds.
Flicker: Typical rapid voltage changes or flicker do not exceed a magnitude of +5% or -5% of the nominal or declared voltage. This
limitation is possible because connection of loads capable of creating rapid voltage changes is usually subjected to regulations. However under certain conditions, higher values of up to 10% may occur. These higher values can occur for instance in areas where high
power motor equipment (blower, pumps, compressors, etc.) is used.
Supply Voltage Unbalance: The unbalance of a three phase supply voltage consists of a loss of symmetry of the phase voltage vectors (magnitude and/or angle), created mainly by unbalanced load. Compliance is verified when 95% of the sequence of valid 10
minute values are within the specified tolerance of normally 2% (in single phase/two phase supplies 3%).
Harmonics are waveform distortion, a steady-state deviation from an ideal power frequency sinusoid and is characterized by the
spectral content of the waveform. See chapter 13.3.10 on page 186 for detailed discussion of harmonics.
Interharmonics are frequency components between the harmonic frequencies.
☞
Note
Harmonic and Interharmonic values are specified only up to a certain order i.e. order 25 in EN50160 limit, for the practical reason that higher order values are generally so small as to be impractical to measure. Another reason is because of the difficulty
of giving values which would be relevant to all networks.
Mains signaling compliance or non-compliance is determined by calculating/adding the status of each of the defined frequencies.
Mains signaling limits for QOS compliance should be within the 3 second mean of signal voltages compared against the Meister curve.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–74
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
QOS Calculations and Statistics
This section lists the calculations and statistics that are gathered from incoming data collected by the DataNode and processed by the
Quality of Supply Answer Module.
For each QOS-data acquisition DataNode configured in the system, the Answer Module compiles the required statistics and persists
them to the database for retrieval under the Views and Reports pages of the Encore Series. The partial statistics are persisted as each
set of incoming data is analyzed so that partial period statistics are available, even though it cannot predict that a site will pass in compliance until interval is complete.
Intermediate statistics for the current evaluation period are made available but are marked as incomplete. Early in an evaluation period
there may not be enough data to provide meaningful statistics and Pass/Fail evaluations for the various criteria. Due to this fact, partial
statistics are not available until at least 100 valid samples have been accumulated and evaluated.
As disturbance based statistics (DISDIP) are simple counts of events in various ranges, this information is made available at any time
during an evaluation period.
At the end of the evaluation period, the statistic calculations are completed and the statistical observation is marked as Complete. If for
some reason, the evaluation period was less than a complete period, the observation is marked as an Incomplete period so the reporting elements can take appropriate action.
All QOS compliance statistics are calculated from data retrieved from the DataNode journal (steady state values) and characterized
events (transients and rms variations).
For all periodic quantities, the total number of valid measurements in the evaluation period is tabulated. A particular period is excluded
from the analysis if a sag below 85% of nominal or a swell above 115% of nominal occurred based on cycle-by-cycle rms voltage minima and maxima. For those items tabulated in the Encore Series, the exclusion is based on the minimum and maximum value available
in 10-minute rms voltage min/max/avg trend value log.
The table below details the statistical information gathered by the Answer Module.
Parameter
Magnitude of Supply
Supply Voltage
Unbalance
Power Frequency
Interval
(default)
Data Source
Stats
Additional Data Collection
Min
Max
3
Avg
w/TS
w/TS
Phase
10 Min
SS VRMS
Valid Intervals Within +/- 10%
YES
YES
YES
YES
10 Min
SS S2/S1
Valid Intervals <= 2%
YES
NO
YES
NO
10 Min*
SS Count Reports
from DataNode
DataNode Calculation - Pass in all
intervals within broad limit and 95%
of intervals with narrow limits
NO
NO
NO
YES
SS Plt
2 Hour Plt <= 1.0
YES
YES
YES
YES
RMS Variations
90% to 95% LV, 94% to 96% MV
NO
NO
NO
YES
THD <= 8%, Table for Individual
Harmonics
YES
NO
YES
YES
TID <= 1%, All components <= 0.5% YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
Rapid Voltage
2 Hours
Changes – Flicker
Rapid Voltage Changes
1 Week
- Step Changes
Harmonic Voltage
10 Min
Interharmonic Voltage
10 Min
SS Harmonic Group
Spectra, THD + 2 to
25 Harmonics
SS Interharmonic
Group, TID and
components 2 to 25
SS Count Reports
from DataNode
Mains Signaling
DataNode Calculation - Pass if in
10 Min**
NO
NO
Frequencies
range 99% of intervals
Notes:
*Power Frequency sampling done in DataNode at 10 second intervals, reported to journal every 10 minutes.
**Mains Signalling sampling done in DataNode at 3 second intervals, reported to journal every 10 minutes.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–75
Radial Fault Location
The Radial Fault Location helps to identify the source of radial line faults as they occur by estimating the distance to fault locations,
allowing a quick dispatch of linemen for repairs, and reducing the time for locating the problem source.
Figure 97 Setup screen for Radial Fault Location
Activate Answer Module
Check the box to activate or clear the box to deactivate.
Ground fault pickup current threshold (amperes)
The value of the current that needs to be exceeded before it is considered a ground fault.
Phase fault pickup current threshold (amperes)
The value of the current that needs to be exceeded before it is considered a phase fault.
Ratio of fault peak current to pre-fault peak current
A threshold to compare RMS values before and during a fault.
Sequence impedance unit
Units used for impedance and feeder length.
Length of primary feeder
This information is optional. If it is available, it should be supplied. If it is not available, enter feeder length = 0.
Positive-sequence impedance of the primary feeder (real)
The real part of the complex number positive sequence impedance.
Positive-sequence impedance of the primary feeder (imaginary)
The imaginary part of the complex number positive sequence impedance.
Zero-sequence impedance of the primary feeder (real)
The real part of the complex number zero sequence impedance.
Zero-sequence impedance of the primary feeder (imaginary)
The imaginary part of the complex number zero sequence impedance.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–76
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
RBM (Reliability Benchmarking Methodology)
Aggregation Parameters
The RBM Answer Module is an Rms Variation Index. Setup for this Answer Module consists of setting up aggregation parameters. At
different times it may be necessary to either break apart measurements into measurement components or combine them through
aggregation. The setup required for aggregation can be seen below.
Figure 98 Setup screen for RBM Aggregation Parameters
Characterization Level
• Phase Aggregation
The most basic of the three aggregation levels is phase aggregation. This characterizes the data in such a way that all of the
phases are analyzed. Measurement components are the constituent recordings of a three-phase measurement. By definition, measurement components are single-phase. The process of phase aggregation entails finding the worst-case of a
series of measurement components associated with a single phase or channel.
• Measurement Aggregation
Measurement aggregation represents all of the data from all phases of a measurement by the characteristics of the worstcase phase. An event determined by measurement aggregation is a combination of measurement components.
• Temporal Aggregation
The goal of temporal aggregation is to collect all measurements taken by a monitoring instrument or instruments that were
due to the same power system occurrence, and identify them as one event.
Aggregation Time
This control specifies the width of the temporal aggregation window (in seconds). Selecting one of the pre-defined intervals from the
drop-down list sets the aggregation window.
Aggregation Window Type
• Fixed
When a "Fixed" aggregation window type is specified, the length of the aggregation window is fixed by the aggregation
time. Thus, all measurements occurring within the specified number of seconds are aggregated.
• Variable
When a "Variable" aggregation window is specified, the length of the aggregation window is not fixed and is determined by
how closely the events occur to each other in time.
Worst Case Method
The Worst Case Method control allows the user to specify which measurement component characteristics are used to represent the
aggregated measurement. A popular method of performing phase aggregation is by finding the "worst-case" measurement component from the measurement components associated with that phase.
• Max V Deviation
Using this method, the component exhibiting the maximum deviation from nominal voltage is used to represent the aggregate measurement. Thus, the sag or swell that deviates the farthest in absolute value from nominal voltage (1.0 per unit) is
selected.
• Max Area
Using this method, the component exhibiting the maximum product of voltage deviation and duration from within tolerance
is used to represent the aggregate measurement. Thus, the sag or swell that has the largest volt-seconds area deviation
from nominal voltage is selected.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–77
•
•
Min V
Using this method, the component exhibiting the minimum voltage is used to represent the aggregate measurement. Thus,
the largest sag is selected.
Max V
Using this method, the component exhibiting the maximum voltage is used to represent the aggregate measurement. Thus,
the largest swell is selected.
UPS Verification
The UPS Verification Answer Module verifies the operation of a UPS or another mitigation device. This requires a pair of DataNodes for
monitoring the UPS, one monitoring input and another monitoring output. This Answer Module allows for creating up to five UPS
DataNode pairs. See setup screen below.
The implementation of UPS Verification requires Cross Triggering between each DataNode pair. See chapter 8.3.17 Advanced tab on
page 105 for instructions on how to enable cross triggering functions in the Advanced Tab under 5530/5520 DataNode Setup.
Figure 99 Setup screen for UPS Verification
UPS Pair Name
This is a descriptive name for the DataNode pair monitoring the UPS.
UPS Input DataNode
Select the DataNode monitoring the UPS input from the list of available DataNodes. Selecting "Not Set" deactivates this pair for the
Answer Module.
UPS Output DataNode
Select the DataNode monitoring the UPS output from the list of available DataNodes. Selecting "Not Set" deactivates this pair for the
Answer Module.
Delta (sec) for time synchronization
The delta between the input event time and the output event time allowed for it to be considered the same event. If the DataNodes are
time-synched together, this should be set to 1.
DataNodes
DataNodes, being the frontline, data-acquisition component of the Encore Series Software system, are available in various models and
configurations. The setup of a DataNode is dependent on the DataNode type. Click on DataNodes in the left frame to view the different
DataNode types that the Encore Series Software currently supports. The list of DataNodes supported by the Encore Series Software
system appears below.
The Encore Series Software system can handle up to 32 DataNodes with full parameter monitoring of about 200 parameters for each
DataNode. The system can also handle up to 50 DataNodes with reduced parameter monitoring of about 100 parameters for each
DataNode.
5530/5520 DataNode
The 5530/5520 belong to the Enhanced Power Quality (EPQ) family of DataNodes. EPQ DataNode is available in three model types:
Model 5530, Model 5520, and Model 5510. They are designed to do comprehensive and PQ-optimized acquisition of power quality
related disturbances and events. The salient features of EPQ Datanode include voltage and current trigger and capture mechanisms,
increased system performance allowing users to identify data of interest and to record only that data, cross-triggering feature that permits linking of many DataNodes, and TCP/IP Ethernet communications.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–78
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
5540 DataNode
The 5540 is known as the Energy Management (EM) DataNode. It is designed to help users manage their energy consumption. The
5540 is equipped with a 3-line LED display for viewing all measured parameters without the use of a computer. Among the more
important parameters it can measure are true RMS voltage and current, kW, kVA, power factor, frequency, kWh, and kVAR. Energy
data from the 5540 EM DataNode can be viewed in real time by multiple users using Encore Series Software via a standard web
browser.
5560 DataNode
The 5560 DataNode is designed to monitor quality of supply compliance as specified by European Standard EN50160. It can be set in
Strict compliance with EN50160 or can be customized using Custom setups. Under Strict compliance, only the Identification and Status, Communication, Polling, and Basic tabs are visible and modifiable. This is the standard method in using the 5560. For those who
have unique applications requiring modification of the standard setups, the Compliance Setup selection box on the Basic tab can be
changed to Custom.
5571 DataNode
The 5571 DataNode is an upgrade path for users of the 7100 PQNode who wish to access the Encore Series Software and its webbased interface. An inexpensive upgrade kit is available to convert existing 7100 PQNodes into 5571s for use in the Encore Series
Software system. The 5571 is available in two model types, distinguished by their enlosures and connections to the circuit: Model 5571
and Model 5571S.
Mavosys 10 Digital DataNode
Encore Series Model 61MDIS (Mavosys 10 series, module, digital, input, screw terminals) is an eight channel, digital input module, providing the user with the capability to monitor on/off-type digital signals, such as breaker or switch position indicators. The functionality
of the inputs can be configured on a channel basis to also provide pulse counting, KYZ metering, or start/stop monitoring control.
Mavosys 10 Power Quality DataNode
Encore Series Model Mavosys 10 is a modular instrument that allows the user to choose the appropriate modules for their application.
The instrument can support up to 4 modules. It provides dedicated processing power via the separate and independent connection for
each input module installed. This modular configuration is packaged in groups of typically 4 measuring channels with a maximum of 4
input modules, for a total of 16 analog channels per instrument.
Model Mavosys 10 also has built-in standard support for Ethernet, RS232 and RS485 communications. Modem and GSM/GPRS
communications are also available using external interfaces that are available from GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH. Encore Series Software
supports all of these methods of communications so users can choose what is appropriate for their application.
ADAM Modules
The Encore Series Software system readily interfaces with and acquires data from the popular Advantech® ADAM-4000 and ADAM5000 series data acquisition and control modules. The ADAM-4000 series modules interface through RS-485 to an Encore Series
Software. The ADAM-5000 series system is a backplane configuration. Any combination of 5000 series plug-in modules may be used
to monitor various types of applications. The 5000 series is one of the most diverse and flexible DA&C systems and is available in four
or eight slot configurations. Both are equipped with CPU, Watchdog Timer, RS-232 & RS-485 (x2) interfaces, error checking, system
diagnostics, and diagnostic display.
GEkV DataNode
GE's kV Vector Electricity Meter is the first of a new
generation of electronic meters that extend functionality beyond the the bounds of traditional metering. The kV Meter adds automatic
installation verification plus power quality and cost of service measurements. The kV Meter also improves traditional meter tasks by
adding consolidated forms, 57 to 120 or 120 to 480 volt measurement capability, improved billing protection, and standardized meter
reading and programming.
Modbus DataNode
The Generic Modbus DataNode setup allows the user to connect Modbus-compatible instruments or meters into the Encore Series
Software, communicating over direct connect (RS484) or network (Modbus TCP/IP). Both analog and status registers can be read,
scaled, stored, and compared against thresholds to detect out of limit conditions. Data can also be calculated over user specified intervals.
7.3
General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes through the Encore Series Software Setup Page
The following guidelines help promote smooth and optimal system performance of DataNode program settings. Bear in mind that while
the Encore Series Software system setup is generic, the DataNode is not. This means that the software setup section is not affected by
the types of DataNodes connected to it. On the other hand, the DataNode setup section is customized and dependent on particular
DataNode model configurations.
1.
Privileges to change DataNode settings depend on the Security Level assigned by the system administrator (see section
Security Level on page 46). Without the proper access privileges, you can only view the setup pages.
2.
Make sure to select the appropriate DataNode type that you wish to configure under the DataNode setup tree. The Tree
Directory of groups and sites is displayed on the left side of the screen. It uses the standard convention of collapsible
trees and folders.
3.
Clicking on a plus sign (+) that is adjacent to a DataNode type will open up that folder and display the elements (Template and specific DataNodes site/s) contained within it. Clicking on a minus sign (-) will collapse that folder and no
longer display the elements within it.
4.
Each type of DataNode can have its own set of templates. The templating functionality allows you to copy the same setups that work well for most applications and then modify a few of the settings specific to your application as they apply
to one or more DataNodes. Adding a template is just like adding a DataNode: you right-click on the appropriate Tem-
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–79
plate tree branch and select the "Add Template" button. A new template appears in the "Templates" setup tree branch.
You can then change the template settings as you would those of an actual DataNode. See chapter 7.4 Using the Template Function in DataNode Setup on page 82 for a full discussion of the Template function.
5.
To add a DataNode site, select the appropriate DataNode type and click on the right mouse button. The “Add DataNode” button will appear; click on it. A new DataNode name will appear in the tree directory. Click on the new name to
display the DataNode parameter screen on the right window pane. Use this screen to modify the DataNode parameters.
Below is a sample DataNode site setup display.
sample
DataNode
template
sample
DataNode
site
arrow
keys
tabs
Figure 100
6.
The Encore Series Software Setup page provides a wide variety of user-configured features represented as tabs located
across the bottom of the Setup page. Click on a specific DataNode site to display the various parameters on the right
hand pane. Consider this screen area as your work space. The parameters change depending on which tab is selected.
7.
Use the arrow keys to navigate through the different tabs.
<| - automatically selects the first or leftmost tab
< - selects one tab left of another
> - selects one tab right of another
|> - automatically selects the end or rightmost tab
8.
DataNode setup display screens appear in two column format: the Properties column and the Values column. The Properties column lists the names of available parameters in each tab. The Values column contains either textual notations,
numeric values, or check boxes pertaining to the parameters described. Use the scroll bars to view and access the different properties and values available on screen.
9.
Parameters are enabled when Value settings appear in black (or blue when selected) and the field is clickable. Users
may make appropriate changes on enabled parameters anytime.
10.
Parameters are disabled when value settings appear in gray. Disabled value settings have either been configured as
such so they cannot be altered or they need to be activated in order to trend the values listed on the page.
11.
After putting in the desired value changes, click on the Save Setup button. You must always save the changes you
made before exiting or selecting a different setup tab. Otherwise, the changes will not take effect. To help ensure that
changes are saved, a confirmation window appears after encoding new value settings and just before you switch to a
different tab or exit setups.
12.
Checkboxes may be found under the Values column of select properties in various tabs. A checked box means that the
parameter it represents is activated/enabled. An unchecked box means that the parameter is not activated /disabled.
13.
The Active property is found under the Communications tab in all DataNode types. Click on the Active checkbox in the
value field. The Encore Series Software does not start communications with the DataNode until the Active box is
checked. It is recommended that all changes and settings are made prior to activating the DataNode.
14.
Remember that the Encore Series Software acts as a complete gateway for the various data captured and stored in the
DataNode. The application’s Setup tab is where users configure properties and values for specific DataNode sites.
Users can view the resulting data using the Views tab, Real-time tab, and Reports tab.
15.
Help is available from any page, though it is tab-sensitive, not context-sensitive. On-screen help is available for various
topics under the Help Desk folder. The Help Desk can be accessed through hyperlinks to jump to a selected topic, or by
using the index.
16.
Further assistance can be obtained by contacting GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH Technical Support staff at +49 911 86020.
Below is a sample display screen showing the Save Setup button, the confirmation window for saving changes, and scroll bar to view
the different properties and values available on screen.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–80
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Save Changes confirmation window
Properties column
Values column
scroll
bar
scroll bar
Save Setup button
Figure 101
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–81
7.4
Using the Template Function in DataNode Setup
The Encore Series Software is designed with a powerful templating functionality that can be used in setting up DataNodes. The templating feature allows users to:
• Choose from pre-defined settings when adding a DataNode;
• Create settings specific to user application and apply them to one or more DataNode;
• Apply settings to one or more DataNode/s by modifying settings on the template.
Template settings look and work just like actual DataNode settings. Each type of DataNode has its own set of templates. These are
listed on a special setup tree branch within the DataNode type.
Template
When you first add in a template, the default settings for that type of DataNode are stored in the template. The name and description,
along with all of the setup information displayed for that particular type of DataNode, can then be customized for your particular application. Multiple templates can be created and saved for each type of DataNode, or a basic one can be copied to each DataNode and
then the settings modified uniquely for that DataNode.
Adding a template is just like adding a DataNode: you right-click on the appropriate Template tree branch and select the "Add Template" item.
Figure 102 Right-click on the Template folder to display the Add template button
A new template appears in the "Templates" setup tree branch. The users can then change the template settings as they would those of
an actual DataNode. They can create as many templates as they like. They can delete a User Defined template by "right-clicking" on
the template's setup tree branch and selecting the "Delete Template" menu item.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–82
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Template Setup Tab
Each template has a "Template" setup tab. From this tab, users can set the name and description of the template. In addition, this tab
contains a list of all of the DataNodes of the same type as the template. Each DataNode in the list has a check box that indicates if the
template is associated with the respective DataNode. When a template is associated with a DataNode, all of the setup values from the
template are initially copied to the DataNode's setup values. Thereafter, any change that the user makes to the template is copied to all
of the DataNodes associated with the template. The user can modify specific DataNode settings after such.
Figure 103 Sample template setup tab for Mavosys 10 Power Quality DataNode
All of the setup parameters except for those on the Identification and Status, Communication, and Polling tabs are part of the template.
The setup values on these tabs (e.g. DataNode name, IP address, polling rate, etc.) are not affected by changes to the Templates.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–83
Associating a DataNode with the Template Settings
The templating feature adds a setup item to the DataNode's Identification and Status tab. This drop down list allows users to select the
template that is associated with the DataNode. Changing this value has the same effect as selecting the DataNode on the respective
Template's list of associated DataNodes.
Figure 104 Sample Mavosys 10 Power Quality DataNode Setup - Identification and Status tab;
Users may associate this DataNode with a template in the drop down list
Once the template has been applied to a DataNode, individual setup parameters can then be altered on the individual DataNode’s
setup pages. For example, the threshold limits of a particular parameter could be changed to reflect the operational requirements at
the site, such as High and Low limits for Vthd. The initial copying of the template into a DataNode will overwrite all existing setup
parameters. If the template is changed subsequently, only those setup parameters that were altered will be sent to the associated
DataNodes.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–84
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
8
5530/5520 DataNode Setup
This chapter describes the procedures on how to program the 5530/5520 DataNode. It covers the following topics:
Template and DataNode Tabs
Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear
Programming the Tabs
8.1
Template and DataNode Tabs
The General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes (chapter 7.3 General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes through the Encore Series
Software Setup Page on page 79) and Using the Template Function in DataNode Setup (chapter 7.4 Using the Template Function in
DataNode Setup on page 82) provide important background information for DataNode setup. Read these sections before continuing
on with the discussion below.
Below is a list of the various 5530/5520 Template and DataNode tabs available and the programmable setups found in each tab. Template settings look and work just like actual DataNode settings. All of the DataNode setup parameters except for those on the Identification and Status, Communication, and Polling tabs are part of the template. The setup values on these tabs (e.g. DataNode name, IP
address, polling rate, etc.) are not affected by changes to the Templates.
The list also notes which tabs are trending pages. A trending page contains an enable/disable checkbox which allows trending of values listed on that page. All trending pages are displayed and the enabling checkboxes can be found in the individual tabs.
Template tab (available in Template setup only) - features template Name and Description, and allows users to select which DataNode
to associate with the template settings.
Identification and Status tab (available in DataNode setup only) - features Identification and Status information of a specific
DataNode, Polling status, and Template selection.
Communication tab (available in DataNode setup only) - features parameters to enter Connection type and Address to establish
communication between the Encore Series Software and DataNode.
Polling tab (available in DataNode setup only) - features parameters to schedule when Encore Series Software can poll the DataNode
for new data, can retrieve and/or delete data stored in DataNode, and can update DataNode firmware version.
Basic tab - features Power System, Steady State Trending, and Thresholds data.
Rms Variations tab - features Limit, Pre- and Post- Event Captures, Rms Variations Sampling Intervals, and Intervals data.
Transients tab - features Cycle Counts and Individual Channel Parameters data.
Metering tab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Metering properties and to Select the journal entry/
entries to change.
Revenue tab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Revenue properties and to Select the journal entry/
entries to change.
Demand tab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Demand properties and to Select the journal entry/entries
to change.
Advanced Energy tab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Advanced Energy properties and to Select the
journal entry/entries to change.
Advanced Metering tab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Advanced Metering properties and to Select
the journal entry/entries to change.
Unbalance tab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Unbalance properties and to Select the journal entry/
entries to change.
Harmonics tab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Harmonics properties and to Select the journal entry/
entries to change.
Flicker tab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Flicker properties and to Select the journal entry/entries to
change; it also allows the setting of Sample Intervals (minutes).
Advanced Harmonics tab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Advanced Harmonics properties and to
Select the journal entry/entries to change.
Transducers tab - features data on Phase rotation, Channel Mapping and Transducer Ratios.
Advanced tab - features data on Cross Triggering, additional data on Communications, Passwords, One Time Operations, Channel
Mapping, and One Time Firmware Operations.
Accumulator Resets tab - features checkboxes to enable/disable Demand Resets and Energy Accumulators.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–85
Template Setup tabs - All tabs except Template are the same as that of its associated DataNode tabs. From the Template setup tab
shown below, you can set the name and description of the template. This tab also contains a list of all of the DataNodes of the same
type as the template. Each DataNode in the list has a checkbox that indicates if the template is associated with the respective DataNode. When you associate a template with a DataNode, all of the setup values from the template are copied to the DataNode's setup
values. Thereafter, any change that you make to the template is copied to all of the DataNodes associated with the template.
check box to
associate
template with
DataNode
Figure 105
DataNode Setup tabs - All setup parameters except for those on the Identification and Status, Communication, and Polling tabs are
part of the template. The setup values on these tabs (e.g. DataNode name, IP address, polling rate, etc.) are not affected by the
changes to Templates.
Figure 106
To illustrate DataNode program settings in detail, this Chapter provides a detailed discussion of the functionalities in each tab.
8.2
Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear
The Encore Series Software/DataNode is designed to provide programming support as well as data display. The software setup page
is where the parameters and value settings are programmed. The programmed parameters and value settings are translated and displayed in meaningful data format under the Views page, Real-time page, and Reports page. Refer to the previous chapters for more
details on the Views, Real-time, and Reports pages.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–86
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
8.3
Programming the Tabs
LEGEND (Please note the following conventions are used in the screen displays):
Items in gray text are not programmable, but included for information purpose to the user.
Items in bold are examples of what can be entered.
Selections available in drop down menu are enclosed in brackets { xxxx }.
!
Caution!
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH has already set default values for the various parameters in each DataNode. The default values
have been tested to result in optimal system performance. Users are advised not to change the default value settings unless
there are applications which require advanced setups.
8.3.1
Identification and Status tab
Properties
Name
Description
Serial Number
Version
Health
Communication status
Last poll at
Next poll at
Values
Identification Information
Edison 5530
Service Entrance
00-01-32-00-01-b9
V3.0.21050920
Status Information
System health is normal
Getting real-time data
03/26/2006 15:56:17
03/26/2006 15:57:00
Use the settings below to associate this DataNode with a template. Note: selecting a template causes all DataNode specific settings
to be updated to those of the template; however, the DataNode’s settings can be changed after a template is applied.
Template
Template1
{None, Template1}
typically describes
where DataNode
is located
indicate when
Encore Series last
requested data
from DataNode &
when next data
poll will take place
select template to
associate
DataNode settings
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION includes the Name and Description which users can assign for a particular DataNode type. Simply
click on the Name or Description value field and the cursor is set for users to type in the space provided. Description typically
describes the place where the DataNode hardware is located. Users are allowed to enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters under the
Name and Description fields. The Serial Number and Version of the DataNode hardware are automatically set by default. This instrument-specific information is available only for viewing and cannot be altered or changed from the Encore Series Software.
STATUS INFORMATION properties includes Health status, whether the DataNode system is functioning normally or not.
It also includes status of Encore Series Software to DataNode Communications.
Polling Status is also displayed, indicating when the Encore Series Software last requested data from the DataNode and when the
next poll is scheduled to take place.
Template users may also associate this DataNode with the settings from a template.
Remember to click the Save Setup button found at the bottom of the page to save any changes that have been done. To aid users, a
Save confirmation window appears after changes have been made and when users are about to switch to a different tab.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–87
8.3.2
Communication tab
Properties
Values
Set the active flag to allow communication with the DataNode.
Note: the active flag must be cleared in order to change the other communication settings.
;
Active
A direct network connection is required. Address strings are Internet Protocol (IP) addresses (e.g., 192.168.1.10).
Connection
Address
User name
Password
Local Area Network (LAN)
198.69.18.235
admin
************
enable to activate
communication
between DataNode
and Encore Series
Software
COMMUNICATION parameters for 5530/5520 DataNode include the following:
Active which indicates whether communications between the Encore Series Software and DataNode is enabled. When checked, this
means that the DataNode is actively communicating and exchanging information with the software application. When making changes
in the different value settings of a DataNode, it is recommended to uncheck the Active box again. Also when adding a new DataNode,
the Active box should be checked last to establish link with the DataNode site. Click on the Home page to see which DataNodes are
actively communicating with the Encore Series.
Connection can be through local area network, Internet, Intranet using 10/100BaseT Ethernet, RS232, RS485.
Address is where the IP information for the specific DataNode is entered. Each 5530/5520 DataNode is shipped from the factory with
an IP Address. This IP Address is entered here.
User name and Password are the name and password for Encore Series Software to DataNode communications. The password is
typically left at factory default. A wrong IP or password will result in DataNode communication error and users will not be able to access
the particular DataNode.
☞
8.3.3
Note
The password entered must match that of the DataNode.
Polling tab
Properties
Values
Polling schedule
Enable scheduled polling
;
Start at
01/01/2006 00:00:00
Repeat every
1
minutes
Repeat units
{minutes, hours, days, weeks, months}
Maximum number of retries
3
Time to wait between retries (minutes)
1
Operations performed at each poll
Download and store data
;
Operations performed only once at the next poll
Send settings to DataNode
…
Delete data in DataNode
…
Update DataNode firmware
…
POLLING SCHEDULE parameters include Enable scheduled polling, which indicates whether scheduled polling of the DataNode
should take place. When checked, this means that Encore Series Software will poll the DataNode for new information according to a
defined schedule. This includes a Start at date and time, a Repeat every numerical value, and Repeat units which can be minutes,
hours, days, weeks, or months. The Maximum number of retries can be specified along with the Time to wait between retries (in
minutes).
OPERATIONS PERFORMED AT EACH POLL include
a Download and store data checkbox to enable the Encore Series Software to retrieve data stored in the DataNode.
OPERATIONS PERFORMED ONLY ONCE AT THE NEXT POLL include checkboxes to enable/disable: Send settings to DataNode use to match DataNode setups with those listed in the software; Delete data in DataNode - use to remove stored data in the DataNode; and Update DataNode firmware - use to update DataNode firmware with the version stored on the Encore Series Software.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–88
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
8.3.4
Basic tab
Properties
PT Primary
PT Secondary
Base Voltage (Vrms)
Wiring configuration
Time between periodic samples (min)
Demand Interval (min)
Demand Sub Interval (min)
Instruments Thresholds set in
Values
Power System
1.00000000
1.00000000
120.0
Wye
{Single Phase, Wye, Delta, Split Single Phase}
Steady State Trending
5
15
5
Thresholds
Percent
{Volts, Per Unit, Percent}
click fields
to display
drop down
menu
The Basic tab contains value settings for the following: Power System, Steady State Trending, and Thresholds.
Under POWER SYSTEM, users can set values for PT Primary, PT Secondary, and Base Voltage (Vrms). PT Primary and PT Secondary allow the setting of the primary and secondary components respectively, of all transducer ratios. Ratios for all three phases are set
when this field is changed and saved. If the values for the individual phases are different, the phase A setting is displayed. No setup values are changed unless the user modifies this field and saves the changes. The values being modified here are the same as the individual values on the Transducers page (see chapter 8.3.16 Transducers tab on page 103). For a 5530/ 5520, the default value of both PT
Primary and PT Secondary is 1.
Users can also input values for the Base voltage (Vrms). This field is where the user specifies the nominal line voltage. The value
serves as the basis for computing High and Low limits under the Rms Variations tab when percent of nominal or per unit options are
used. Users can also select the Wiring configuration of the circuit. Simply click on the value field and a drop down menu lists Single
Phase, Wye, Delta, and Split Single Phase.
When making voltage connections to a Single phase circuit, use channel A differential inputs. Neutral to ground measurements are recommended but not required for proper operation. When making Split Phase measurements, use both channels A and B for voltage
and current connections. The neutral is chosen as the reference for measurement purposes. Neutral to ground measurements are recommended but not required for proper operation. When using the Wye setup mode, channels A, B and C are connected to voltage
and current. The neutral is connected to common and is the reference for the three channels. Neutral to ground measurements are
recommended but not required for proper operation. Various setups are possible when using the Delta setup mode. For example, the
3 Phase Delta uses voltage channels A, B and C as differential inputs with channel A using source voltage A-B, channel B using B-C,
and channel C using C-A as the reference. Use channels A, B and C for current connections. Neutral to ground measurements are recommended but not required for proper operation. Refer to the Series 5500 DataNode User’s Guide, chapter 2 Preparation for Use on
page 3, for illustrations of the different wiring configurations using DataNode 5520 and DataNode 5510/5530.
STEADY STATE TRENDING allows for the periodic sampling of the voltage and/or current waveforms. For instance, the Time between
periodic samples allows users to set the time (in minutes) of how often rms and waveform snapshots will be recorded.
Demand Interval and Demand Sub-Interval refer to that time period used in calculating power demand values. Both Demand properties can be assigned value settings within the range of 1 to 120 minutes. Note however that the value set for Demand Sub-interval
must be an integer-divisor of Demand Interval since the former applies when updating certain parameters of the latter.
Under THRESHOLDS, users can choose the threshold units under Instruments thresholds set in. Click on the value field and a drop
down selection of Volts, Per Unit, and Percent appears. The limits entered in subsequent tabs will correspond to the setting made here.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–89
8.3.5
Rms Variations tab
Properties
Values
Limits
A-N Voltage
{Bank selection enables programming limits below}
B-N Voltage
C-N Voltage
N-G Voltage
A-B Voltage
B-C Voltage
C-A Voltage
A Current
B Current
C Current
N Current
Limit enabled
High limit
Low limit
phase-to-neutral or
phase-to-phase
values displayed
depend upon the
Wiring
Configuration set
under the Basic tab
…
110.0
90.0
units of measure
depend on setting
in Basic tab
Pre- and Post- Event Captures
Pre-event start rms samples (cycles)
2
Post-event start rms samples (cycles)
238
Pre-event start waveform samples (cycles)
2
Post-event start waveform samples (cycles)
6
Post-event end rms samples (cycles)
2
Pre-event end waveform samples (cycles)
6
Post-event end waveform samples (cycles)
2
Cycles in range to end event
1
Number of Rates to Use
Reduced sampling rate #1
Reduced sampling rate #2
Reduced sampling rate #3
Sample min/max/avg every N cycles
Number of seconds to use this rate
Rms Variations Sampling Intervals
3
Intervals
6
6.000000
RMS stands for root mean square, a mathematical formula used to measure the average voltage and current behaviors. Voltage and
current activities are measured to check their behavior patterns within a set or programmed threshold. Threshold is the point within
which the voltage or current parameter is said to be within tolerance. Thresholds are set in ranges with high limit (threshold above the
programmed limit) and low limit (threshold below the programmed limit). Rms Variations result whenever voltage or current behaviors
rise above or fall below the programmed thresholds. GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH instruments label rms voltage or current variations as
either sags (voltage or current decreases below low limit) or swells (voltage or current increases above high limit) as per IEEE 1159.
In the Rms Variations tab, the following properties can be set: Limits, Pre and Post- Event Captures, Rms Variations Sampling Intervals,
and Intervals.
Under LIMITS, letters A, B and C represent each leg or phase of a three-phase system, while letter N represents the neutral conductor.
The channels used to trigger threshold values are automatically set depending on the wiring configuration selected under the Basic
tab. High limit and Low limit values can be enabled and programmed individually for each phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase setting.
To program individual limit values, select the appropriate line that describes the phase-neutral or phase-to-phase setting that you wish
to change. If the same limit value will be assigned to more than one phase, press Shift + click to select multiple phases. Enter your limit
value for the corresponding phase in the High limit and Low limit fields. Click the Limit enabled box to activate. Click the Save Setup
button every time you assign different limit values.
PRE- AND POST- EVENT CAPTURES contain parameters that help users program the number of rms and waveform cycles to be
saved before (pre-) and after (post-) the start and the end of the event. These parameters are Pre-event start rms samples, Postevent start rms samples, Pre-event start waveform samples, Post-event start waveform samples, Post-event end rms
samples, Pre-event end waveform samples, and Post-event end waveform samples. The parameters capture rms sample or
rms waveform cycles that may be used to analyze and manage power event patterns and behavior.
With regard to the beginning and end of rms variation events, such transition points are determined according to the following rules. As
per IEC and IEEE standards for multi-phase systems, the beginning of the event occurs when any phase goes outside the limits. The
start of an rms variation event is denoted as the time one or more phases of voltage or current goes outside of the programmed high
or low thresholds. The end point of the event is defined as the point when all channels for which triggers are enabled have come back
within limits (plus internally calculated hysteresis) for a minimum duration of Cycles in range to end event. Until this criteria is met,
any subsequent excursions beyond the thresholds are considered part of the original disturbance. Disturbance monitoring requires
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–90
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
that voltage be continuously sampled, and recorded only if the signals exceed specified values. Most types of disturbances, with the
exception of voltage variations, require that current be recorded as well.
The user also has the ability to specify how rms trace data is recorded during the event. This mechanism is found under RMS VARIATIONS SAMPLING INTERVALS, where Number of rates to use refers to the number of reduced sampling rate ranges to be used to
record rms variation activities. The sampling data referred to here may be any or all of the three sample rates found under INTERVALS
- Reduced sampling rate #1, Reduced sampling rate #2, and Reduced sampling rate #3. When one of these items is selected,
the reduced sampling rate parameters can be set for that item. Data for the sample rates only apply to rms, not waveform, variations.
The reason behind storing sampling rates is that the memory capacity of the monitoring instrument makes it impractical to record an
entire long duration sag or swell point by point. The waveforms before and after the trigger are digitized to help identify the cause of the
excursion, but only rms values are stored over the full duration event that is longer than the pre- and post- trigger setting. If the event
has not ended after a programmed time period, the instrument switches to averaging cycles of rms data to further conserve memory
yet accurately represent the event. At this point, the rms plot diverges from a single-valued line to a band of minimum, maximum and
average values. During extremely long events, the instrument switches to successively longer averaging periods explained next.
The sample rates represent three supplemental recording interval or chart speeds defined for recording long events. When recording at
reduced rates, three values are saved for each data point - the minimum, maximum, and average value of the previous interval. The
Sample min/max/avg every N cycles refers to the number of cycles to average for the selected reduced sampling rate. While Number of seconds to use this rate refer to the number of seconds to record at the selected reduced sampling rate.
The following default sequence is used to program reduced sampling rates:
For 60 Hz systems
a. 6 cycle intervals for 8 seconds (80 samples)
b. 30 cycle intervals for 20 seconds (40 samples)
c. 60 cycle intervals for 90 seconds (90 samples)
For 50 Hz systems
a. 5 cycle intervals for 8 seconds (80 samples)
b. 25 cycle intervals for 20 seconds (40 samples)
c. 50 cycle intervals for 90 seconds (90 samples)
For further discussion on RMS Variation Triggering and Recording, please refer to the EPQ DataNode Series User's Guide.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–91
8.3.6
Transients tab
Properties
Number of pre-trigger cycles
Number of post-trigger cycles
Values
Cycle Counts
1
2
Individual Channel Parameters
A-N Voltage
B-N Voltage
C-N Voltage
N-G Voltage
A Current
B Current
C Current
N Current
Instantaneous limit enabled
Instantaneous limit
Peak detector limit enabled
Peak detector limit
Waveform change limit enabled
Waveform change magnitude limit
Waveform change duration limit (% of cycle)
phase-to-neutral
or phase-to-phase
values displayed
depend upon the
Wiring Configuration set under the
Basic tab
…
120.0
…
100
…
10.0
10.0
Transients are disturbances which are shorter in duration than sags and swells. There are two basic types of transients: 1) impulsive
transients commonly caused by lightning and load switching, and 2) oscillatory transients often attributed to capacitor bank switching.
The EPQ DataNode has extensive transient recording capabilities for all transient events, using waveshape, instantaneous peak, and
dual positive and negative high frequency peak detectors.
Impulsive transients are characterized by a very rapid change in the magnitude of the measured quantity. Because these types of disturbances exhibit high frequencies, they are quickly damped by the system. They tend to be unidirectional when close to their source.
Impulses are commonly caused by capacitors or inductors switching on line, loose wires, lightning, static, and power failures.
Oscillatory transients are defined as a temporary, rapid discontinuity of the waveform. Frequency is the most important characteristic in
identifying this type of transient event. Frequencies are further classified into high (500 kHz or greater), medium (5 to 500 kHz), or low (5
kHz or less).
Transient events in the form of wave faults are captured using the waveform change detection technique. This is done by recording
present cycle samples and comparing it to samples from the previous cycle. Waveshape trigger values include the magnitude and
duration of the difference between the present and previous cycle.
Transients can be captured using the high frequency positive/negative peak detectors, crest factor peak (instantaneous), and/or the
waveshape variation triggering functions. The high frequency detected transient uses special circuitry to detect and capture impulsive
transients as small as 1 microsecond. These transients are the positive and/or negative value above or below the low frequency waveshape. These are only enabled if the flicker tab is disabled. The crest factor or instantaneous peak is the absolute peak sample
value within one cycle. The high frequency peak detector and instantaneous transients are triggerable for voltage and current.
Under the CYCLE COUNTS, the user can define a number of cycles of waveform to record prior to the trigger point. This is set under
the value field Number of pre-trigger cycles. Users can also define the number of cycles of waveform to record after the trigger. This
value is set under Number of post-trigger cycles. Typical values for these settings are 1 and 2 respectively. Setting these values to
0 causes one cycle of data to be recorded for each event - the cycle in which the transient was detected. Note also that the cycle of
waveform containing the trigger point is always recorded. For example, if the pre-trigger cycle count is 1 and the post-trigger count is
set to 2, then a total of 4 cycles (including the cycle containing the trigger point) of waveform and peak detector values are recorded.
Under INDIVIDUAL CHANNEL PARAMETERS, letters A, B and C represent different channels, N stands for neutral, while G stands for
ground conductor. The channel values are pre-defined and automatically set depending upon the Wiring configuration selected under
the Basic tab.
The DataNode provides configuration variables that specifies how many cycles to record the Instantaneous limit, Peak detector
limit and Waveform change magnitude limit. These limit values can be enabled and programmed individually for each phase and
phase-to-phase setting.
The instantaneous limit value is compared against the absolute value of each A/D sample of the voltage and current channel waveforms (128 A/D samples taken per cycle). If any point is greater than the specified limit, the cycle the trigger occurred on plus the specified number of pre- and post- trigger cycles will be recorded as an event. Enter your limit values in the corresponding field for each
phase-neutral or phase-to-phase setting, and click the Instantaneous limit enabled box to activate. In earlier versions of the software, this same value is used for the high frequency dual peak detectors as well.
The instantaneous limit is in units of Volts or Percent of base depending on the unit of thresholds selected under the Basic tab. If the
instantaneous limit is set at or below 100%, transients are effectively disabled because a permanent trigger condition exists and locks
out further events. The Peak detector limit can also be set in units of Volts or Percent of base depending on the thresholds unit set
under the Basic tab. Since the fundamental frequency component is filtered out using the peak detector trigger mechanism, peak
detector limits set below 100% can be specified.
Other configuration variables that determine the operation of transient capture capability of the DataNode are the waveform trigger
parameter, instantaneous peak waveform trigger level, and dual peak high frequency detector output trigger level. Values for these
parameters are set under Waveform change magnitude limit and Waveform change duration limit. Normally the default values
for these is 10%. These limit values can be enabled and programmed individually for each phase and phase-to-phase setting. To activate the waveform limit values, click the Waveform change limit enabled box.
For further discussion on Transient Event Recording, refer to the EPQ DataNode Series User's Guide.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–92
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Trending Tabs
The following tabs are known as trending pages: Metering, Revenue, Demand, Advanced Energy, Advanced Metering, Imbalance, Harmonics, Flicker, and Advanced Harmonics. These tabs contain an enable/disable checkbox at the top of the page. The purpose of the
checkbox on any trending page is to enable trending of properties and values listed on that page. If the box is checked, the settings on
that page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect. When exiting from the
page, a save confirmation window appears. Click on Yes to save changes. Click on No to exit the menu tab without saving changes.
☞
8.3.7
Note
All trending tabs operate in the same manner, the difference being the parameter measured. Therefore the same description of
how to use can appear once and not be repeated.
Metering tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Basic Metering (Metering, MMXUO)
;
Trending options
Enable high-resolution frequency monitoring
…
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Line-Neutral Voltage (A-N)
Line-Neutral Voltage (B-N)
Apparent Power (A)
Line-Neutral Voltage (C-N)
Apparent power (B)
Neutral-Ground Voltage
Apparent Power (C)
Line-Line Voltage (A-B)
Total Apparent Power
Line-Line Voltage (B-C)
Power Factor (A)
Line-Line Voltage (C-A)
Power Factor (B)
Line Current (A)
Power Factor (C)
Line Current (B)
Average Power Factor
Line Current (C)
Angle Between Phases (A)
Line Current (N)
Angle Between Phases (B)
Active Power (A)
Angle Between Phases (C)
Active Power (B)
Frequency
Active Power (C)
Total Active Power
Enable Periodic Sampling
;
High-High limit enabled
…
High-High limit
135.0
High limit enabled
…
High limit
125.0
Low limit enabled
…
Low limit
105.0
Low-Low limit enabled
…
Low-Low limit
90.0
Deadband enabled
…
Deadband
3.0
phase-to-neutral or
phase-to-phase
values displayed
depend upon the
Wiring Configuration
set under the Basic
tab
The rms voltage variations have their own tab relative to capturing and monitoring power quality events such as sags and swells (see
chapter 8.3.5 Rms Variations tab on page 90). In addition, the rms voltage and current values can be trended using periodic readings
that are stored in a journal.
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Basic Metering. The box enables the trending of
values listed in Metering page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining
settings are persisted but are not in effect.
Under SELECT JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE, the various phase-neutral and phase-to-phase parameters are displayed.
High and low limits can be enabled and individually set for each phase-neutral and phase-to-phase value. Note however that the available phase values depend on the Wiring Configuration selected under the Basic tab. For instance, for wye circuits L-N, N-G and L-L
limits can be set. For delta circuits, only L-L limits can be set.
Highlight the parameter value you wish to change, then check the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box,
and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest.
☞
Note
The 5530 DataNode has an internal limit on the number of variables it can track for the purpose of periodic recording and
limit rule evaluation. Indiscriminate selection of parameters should be avoided.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–93
Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, Low-Low, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system and
not programmable by the user. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place.
Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on, not a percent of fixed or floating base as can be used in Voltage
Rms Variation and Transient limits.
For example, if the frequency is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the frequency goes from out of limits
to within limits (that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis) then another event is
recorded.
Enabling the parameters for periodic sampling make them appear in the Real-time tab.
8.3.8
Revenue tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Basic Revenue Metering (Revenue, MMTRO)
…
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Phase Energy (A)
Phase Energy (B)
Phase Energy (C)
Total Energy
Integrated Reactive Power (A)
Integrated Reactive Power (B)
Integrated Reactive Power (C)
Total Integrated Reactive Power
Enable periodic sampling
High-High limit enabled
High-High limit
High limit enabled
High limit
Low limit enabled
Low limit
Low-Low limit enabled
Low-Low limit
Deadband enabled
Deadband
…
…
135.0
…
125.0
…
105.0
…
90.0
…
3.0
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Basic Revenue Metering. The box enables the
trending of values listed in Basic Revenue Metering page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not
checked, the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect.
Each of the individual phase and three phase total energy and integrated reactive power values found under SELECT THE JOURNAL
ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE can be enabled.
Highlight the parameter value you wish to change, then check the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box
and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest.
Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, Low-Low, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take
place. Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on, not a percent of fixed or floating base as can be used in
Voltage Rms Variation and Transient limits.
For example, if the Total Energy is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the Total Energy goes from out of
limits to within limits (that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis), then the event is
recorded.
Enabling the parameters for periodic sampling make them appear in the Real-time tab.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–94
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
8.3.9
Demand tab
Properties
Demand (Demand, MDMDUO)
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
…
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Real Power, Dmd, Total
Reactive Power, Dmd, Total
Apparent Power Dmd, Total
Average PF Over Last Interval
Peak Real Power Dmd Total
Var Dmd Coincident w/Pk W Dmd
VA Dmd Coincident w/Pk W Dmd
Avg PF Coincident w/Pk W Dmd
Peak Reactive Power Dmd, Total
W Dmd Coincident w/Pk Var Dmd
VA Dmd Coincident w/Pk Var Dmd
Avg PF Coincident w/Pk Var DMd
Peak Apparent Power Dmd, Total
W Dmd Coincident w/Pk W Dmd
Var Dmd Coincident w/Pk VA Dmd
Avg PF Coincident w/Pk VA Dmd
Predicted Real Power Dmd, Total
Predicted Reactive Power Dmd, Total
Predicted Apparent Power Dmd, Total
Current Demand (A)
Current Demand (B)
Current Demand (C)
Average Current Demand
Peak Current Demand (A)
Peak Current Demand (B)
Peak Current Demand (C)
Average Peak Current Demand
Enable periodic sampling
High-High limit enabled
High-High limit
High limit enabled
High limit
Low limit enabled
Low limit
Low-Low limit enabled
Low-Low limit
Deadband enabled
Deadband
…
…
135.0
…
125.0
…
105.0
…
90.0
…
3.0
Demand values are computed as the average value over the demand interval, which can be programmed as a different value than the
periodic readings. The following parameter values can be enabled: individual phase and three phase total real power demand, reactive
demand, apparent power demand, average PF and peak real power values.
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Demand. The box enables the trending of values
listed in Demand page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings
are persisted but are not in effect.
The following parameter values can be enabled under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE: individual phase and
three phase total real power demand, reactive demand, apparent power demand, average PF, and peak real power values.
Highlight the parameter value you wish to change, then check the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box,
and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest.
Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, Low-Low, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–95
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take
place. Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on, not a percent of fixed or floating base as can be used in
Voltage Rms Variation and Transient limits.
For example, if the Real Power Demand is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the Real Power Demand
goes from out of limits to within limits (that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis), then
the event is recorded.
8.3.10
Advanced Energy tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Advanced Energy (Adv. Anergy, MFLOO)
…
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Forward fund. freq. WHrs (A)
Forward fund. freq. WHrs (B)
Forward fund. freq. WHrs (C)
Reverse fund. freq. WHrs (A)
Reverse fund. freq. WHrs (B)
Reverse fund. freq. WHrs (C)
Forward tot. fund. freq. WHrs
Reverse tot. fund. freq. WHrs
Forward fund. freq. VarHrs (A)
Forward fund. freq. VarHrs (B)
Forward fund. freq. VarHrs (C)
Reverse fund. freq. VarHrs (A)
Reverse fund. freq. VarHrs (B)
Reverse fund. freq. VarHrs (C)
Forward tot. fund. freq. VarHrs
Reverse tot. fund. freq. VarHrs
Fundamental freq. VA hours (A)
Fundamental freq. VA hours (B)
Fundamental freq. VA hours (C)
Total fundamental freq. VA hours
Enable periodic sampling
High-High limit enabled
High-High limit
High limit enabled
High limit
Low limit enabled
Low limit
Low-Low limit enabled
Low-Low limit
Deadband enabled
Deadband
…
…
135.0
…
125.0
…
105.0
…
90.0
…
3.0
The Advanced Energy tab shows various energy parameters on per phase and total basis as well as in forward and reverse mode.
Fundamental frequency is used as the reference unit. Frequency is specified in hertz. Fundamental frequency refers to the principal
component of a wave, i.e. the component with the lowest frequency or greatest amplitude.
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Advanced Energy. The box enables the trending of
values listed in Advanced Energy page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the
remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect.
Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE, highlight the phase value parameter you wish to change then check
the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all
parameters of interest.
Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, Low-Low, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–96
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take
place. Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on, not a percent of fixed or floating base as can be used in
Voltage Rms Variation and Transient limits.
For example, if the Total Fundamental Frequency VA hours is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the
Total Fundamental Frequency VA hours goes from out of limits to within limits (that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and
above the low limit plus the hysteresis), then the event is recorded.
8.3.11
Advanced Metering tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Advanced Metering (Adv. Metering, MADVO)
…
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Total VA - Arith. Method
Total VA - Vect. Method
Total Fund. VA - Arith. Method
Total Fund. VA - Vect. Method
Worst True Power Factor
Total Arithmetic True PF
Total Vector True Power Factor
Displacement Power Factor (A)
Displacement Power Factor (B)
Displacement Power Factor (C)
Worst Displacement Power Factor
Average Displacement PF
Total Arithmetic Disp. PF
Total Vector Disp. Power Factor
Residual Current
Net Current
Enable periodic sampling
…
High-High limit enabled
…
High-High limit
135.0
High limit enabled
…
High limit
125.0
Low limit enabled
…
Low limit
105.0
Low-Low limit enabled
…
Low-Low limit
90.0
Deadband enabled
…
Deadband
3.0
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Advanced Metering. The box enables the trending
of values listed in Advanced Metering page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the
remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect.
Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE, multiple total apparent power and power factor parameters, calculated using arithmetic and vector sums of the individual phases, can be enabled. Highlight the parameter value you wish to change,
then check the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box, and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat
this for all parameters of interest.
Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-High, High, Low, Low-Low, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take
place.
For example, if the Displacement Power Factor is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the Displacement
Power Factor goes from out of limits to within limits (that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the
hysteresis), then the event is recorded.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–97
8.3.12
Unbalance tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Unbalance and Sequence Components
…
(Sequence, MSQIO)
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Sequence Voltage (Pos)
Sequence Voltage (Neg)
Sequence Voltage (Zero)
Sequence Current (Pos)
Sequence Current (Neg)
Sequence Current (Zero)
V Imbalance: L-N dev. from avg (A-N)
V Imbalance: L-N dev. from avg (B-N)
V Imbalance: L-N dev. from avg (C-N)
V Imbalance: L-L dev. from avg (A-B)
V Imbalance: L-L dev. from avg (B-C)
V Imbalance: L-L dev. from avg (C-A)
V Imbalance: L-N Max from avg
V Imbalance: L-L Max from avg
V Imbalance: Neg. Seq. Method
V Imbalance: Zero Seq. Method
I Imbalance: dev. from avg (A)
I Imbalance: dev. from avg (B)
I Imbalance: dev. from avg (C)
I Imbalance: Max dev. from avg
I Imbalance: Neg. Seq. Method
I Imbalance: Zero Seq. Method
Enable periodic sampling
…
High-High limit enabled
…
High-High limit
135.0
High limit enabled
…
High limit
125.0
Low limit enabled
…
Low limit
105.0
Low-Low limit enabled
…
Low-Low limit
90.0
Deadband enabled
…
Deadband
3.0
The voltage and current imbalance for each phase from the average value for all three phases can be trended and limits set. The positive, negative and zero sequence components for voltage and current can be trended.
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Unbalance and Sequence Components. The box
enables the trending of values listed in Unbalance page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not
checked, the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect.
Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE, highlight the parameter value you wish to change, then check the
Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box, and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all
parameters of interest.
Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, Low-Low, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–98
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
8.3.13
Harmonics tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Harmonics (MHAIO)
…
Percent Eddy Current Loss
8.000
Maximum Demand Load Current
100.000
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Voltage THD - Fund. Normalized (A-N)
Voltage THD - Fund. Normalized (B-N)
Current TID - Fund. Normalized (A)
Voltage THD - Fund. Normalized (C-N)
Current TID - Fund. Normalized (B)
Voltage THD - Fund. Normalized (N-G)
Current TID - Fund. Normalized (C)
Voltage THD - RMS Normalized (A-N)
Current TID - Fund. Normalized (N)
Voltage THD - RMS Normalized (B-N)
Current TID - RMS Normalized (A)
Voltage THD - RMS Normalized (C-N)
Current TID - RMS Normalized (B)
Voltage THD - RMS Normalized (N-G)
Current TID - RMS Normalized (C)
Voltage TID - Fund. Normalized (A-N)
Current TID - RMS Normalized (N)
Voltage TID - Fund. Normalized (B-N)
Current Harmonic RMS (A)
Voltage TID - Fund. Normalized (C-N)
Current Harmonic RMS (B)
Voltage TID - Fund. Normalized (N-G)
Current Harmonic RMS (C)
Voltage TID - RMS Normalized (A-N)
Current Harmonic RMS (N)
Voltage TID - RMS Normalized (B-N)
Current Interharmonic RMS (A)
Voltage TID - RMS Normalized (C-N)
Current Interharmonic RMS (B)
Voltage TID - RMS Normalized (N-G)
Current Interharmonic RMS (C)
Voltage Harmonic RMS (A-N)
Current Interharmonic RMS (N)
Voltage Harmonic RMS (B-N)
IT Product (A)
Voltage Harmonic RMS (C-N)
IT Product (B)
Voltage Harmonic RMS (N-G)
IT Product (C)
Voltage Interharmonic RMS (A-N)
IT Product (N)
Voltage Interharmonic RMS (B-N)
Current Crest Factor (A)
Voltage Interharmonic RMS (C-N)
Current Crest Factor (B)
Voltage Interharmonic RMS (N-G)
Current Crest Factor (C)
Voltage TIF - Fund. Normalized (A-N)
Current Crest Factor (N)
Voltage TIF - Fund. Normalized (B-N)
Current Total Demand Distortion (A)
Voltage TIF - Fund. Normalized (C-N)
Current Total Demand Distortion (B)
Voltage TIF - Fund. Normalized (N-G)
Current Total Demand Distortion (C)
Voltage TIF - RMS Normalized (A-N)
K Factor (A)
Voltage TIF - RMS Normalized (B-N)
K Factor (B)
Voltage TIF - RMS Normalized (C-N)
K Factor (C)
Voltage TIF - RMS Normalized (N-G)
K Factor (N)
Voltage Crest Factor (A-N)
Transformer Derating Factor (A)
Voltage Crest Factor (B-N)
Transformer Derating Factor (B)
Voltage Crest Factor (C-N)
Transformer Derating Factor (C)
Voltage Crest Factor (N-G)
Total Phase Harmonic Power (A-N)
Current THD - Fund. Normalized (A)
Total Phase Harmonic Power (B-N)
Current THD - Fund. Normalized (B)
Total Phase Harmonic Power (C-N)
Current THD - Fund. Normalized (C)
Signed Phase Harmonic Power (A-N)
Current THD - Fund. Normalized (N)
Signed Phase Harmonic Power (B-N)
Current THD - RMS Normalized (A)
Signed Phase Harmonic Power (C-N)
Current THD - RMS Normalized (B)
Current THD - RMS Normalized (C)
Current THD - RMS Normalized (N)
Enable periodic sampling
…
High-High limit enabled
…
High-High limit
135.0
High limit enabled
…
High limit
125.0
Low limit enabled
…
Low limit
105.0
Low-Low limit enabled
…
Low-Low limit
90.0
Deadband enabled
…
Deadband
3.0
Harmonics are waveform distortion, a steady-state deviation from an ideal power frequency sinusoid and is characterized by the spectral content of the waveform. Many non-linear devices such as battery chargers, switching power supplies or transformers inject currents at harmonic (integer multiples of the fundamental) frequencies into the system. Harmonic currents and the voltage distortion they
create as they flow through system impedances can reduce equipment operating reliability and service life. Harmonics can be particularly troublesome where capacitors are applied on the distribution system. Capacitors may result in resonance at a harmonic frequency,
leading to high harmonic voltages and currents throughout the system.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–99
Interharmonics are frequency components between the harmonic frequencies. The IEC 1000-4-7 Standard dictates that harmonic
analysis is done using 5Hz bins. The rms of the frequency bins between the 2nd and 3rd harmonic is referred to as the H2-3 interharmonic.
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Harmonics. The box enables the trending of values
listed in Harmonics page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings
are persisted but are not in effect.
Under SELECT JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE, various harmonic parameters can be trended using periodic readings that
are stored in a journal. Harmonic distortion of voltage or current is calculated through a Fourier transformation of the waveform into harmonic magnitudes and phase angle spectra. These spectra are used to determine figures of merit such as total harmonic distortion
(THD) and telephone influence factor (TIF). The total interharmonic distortion (TID) is calculated similar to the THD. (See chapter
APPENDIX A. Quantities Calculated from Periodic Voltage and Current Measurements on page 203)
The Encore Series Software/DataNode system allows simultaneous measurements of voltage and current so that harmonic power flow
can be obtained. Depending on value parameters set, the program can record a sampling of the waveform synchronized to the fundamental frequency, to ensure accurate calculation of harmonic phase angles. The sampling rate is sufficient to determine up to the 50th
harmonic and interharmonic or better. A comprehensive range of high and low limits can be enabled and individually set for each measured parameter. Highlight the value parameter you wish to change, then check the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the
threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest.
Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, Low-Low, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take
place. Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on, not a percent of fixed or floating base as can be used in
Voltage Rms Variation and Transient limits.
For example, if the Voltage Harmonic RMS is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the Voltage Harmonic
Rms goes from out of limits to within limits (that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis),
then the event is recorded. All activated Harmonic parameters and value settings defined can be viewed under the Real-time tab.
For further discussion on Harmonic Distortion, please refer to the EPQ DataNode Series User's Guide.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–100
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
8.3.14
Flicker tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Flicker (Flicker, MFLKO)
;
Sample Intervals
Pst Sample Interval (minutes)
10
Plt Sample Interval (Pst intervals)
180
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Pst of last complete interval (A)
Pst of last complete interval (B)
Pst of last complete interval (C)
Plt of last complete interval (A)
Plt of last complete interval (B)
Plt of last complete interval (C)
Sliding window Plt calculation (A)
Sliding window Plt calculation (B)
Sliding window Plt calculation (C)
Output 5-Pinst-peak value (A)
Output 5-Pinst-peak value (B)
Output 5-Pinst-peak value (C)
Output 4-1 min TC LPF of Pinst (A)
Output 4-1 min TC LPF of Pinst (B)
Output 4-1 min TC LPF of Pinst (C)
Output 3-square root of Pinst (A)
Output 3-square root of Pinst (B)
Output 3-square root of Pinst (C)
LPF of Output 3 (A)
LPF of Output 3 (B)
LPF of Output 3 (C)
Enable periodic sampling
High-High limit enabled
High-High limit
High limit enabled
High limit
Low limit enabled
Low limit
Low-Low limit enabled
Low-Low limit
Deadband enabled
Deadband
;
…
0.00
…
0.00
…
0.00
…
0.00
…
0.00
There are three flicker values available for trending: the Short term flicker or Pst, the long term flicker or Plt, and Plt calculated on a sliding window. The other parameters shown above (journal entries) are used primarily for specialized testing. Flicker measurements are
classified per IEC 1000-4-15.
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Flicker which enables the trending of values listed in
this page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. Enabling this will automatically disable the high-frequency dual peak detectors located in the Transients tab. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings are persisted but are
not in effect.
Under SAMPLE INTERVALS are two numeric edit controls: the Pst Sample Interval and the Plt Sample Interval. Pst is short term
perceptibility, used to set the Pst calculation interval. Typical calculation is over 10 minute interval, though this can be programmed. Plt
is long term perceptibility, used to set Plt calculation interval. Typical calculation is over 2 hour interval, though this can also be programmed. The Plt interval must be an integer multiple of the Pst interval. Sliding Plt recalculates the Plt value at each Pst interval, rather
than only at the Plt interval.
Under SELECT JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE, various flicker parameters can be trended using periodic readings that are
stored in a journal.
Highlight the value parameter you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box
and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–101
Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, Low-Low, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take
place. Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on, not a percent of fixed or floating base as can be used in
Voltage RMS Variation and Transients limits.
8.3.15
Advanced Harmonics tab
Properties
Enable Trending (This page)
Advanced Harmonics (Individual, MHAIO)
;
Trend harmonics for phase A
;
Trend harmonics for phase B
;
Trend harmonics for phase C
;
Harmonics to Trend
Phase Voltages
2-25
Neutral Voltages
Phase Currents
Neutral Current
Interharmonics to Trend
Phase Voltages
2-25
Neutral Voltages
Phase Currents
Neutral Current
Values
sample
Harmonic
values to trend
sample
Interharmonic
values to trend
The following parameters are found under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE): Advanced harmonics (Individual) and Trend harmonics for phases A, B and C. Opposite these parameters are checkboxes which enable the trending of values listed in Advanced
harmonics page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect.
!
Caution!
Selection of numerous harmonics and interharmonics can exceed the total number of journal parameters (typically 200) that
can be trended. Harmonics will not be trended unless the corresponding channel is selected for Harmonic/Interharmonic RMS
Voltage or Current under the Harmonics tab.
Voltage and current harmonics for each phase and neutral channel can be trended under HARMONICS TO TREND. Similarly, voltage
and current interharmonics for each phase and neutral channel can also be trended under INTERHARMONICS TO TREND. The value
fields are left blank to allow the users to choose the numbers or the range of harmonic frequencies to trend.
Numbers can be entered individually with commas separating the numbers, or a range of harmonics can be specified using a dash
between lower and upper values. Also, the suffix ‘o’ or ‘e’ can be used to specify only the odd or even harmonics, respectively, in a
given range. Selecting numerous harmonics indiscriminately can take up all of the allowable trending parameters. Users are advised to
select harmonics to trend prudently.
Resulting individual harmonic sampling and graphs can be seen in the Smart Trends folder under the Views tab.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–102
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
8.3.16
Transducers tab
Properties
Phase rotation
Phase A voltage
Phase A current
Phase B voltage
Phase B current
Phase C voltage
Phase C current
Neutral voltage
Neutral current
Signal is connected to
Channel is inverted
Values
Normal (counter clockwise)
{Normal (counter clockwise), Reverse (clockwise)}
Channel Mapping
Channel 1
…
Transducer Ratios
Phase A-N VT
Phase B-N VT
Phase C-N VT
Neutral VT
Phase A CT
Phase B CT
Phase C CT
Neutral CT
Phase A-B VT
Phase B-C VT
Phase C-A VT
Transducer Primary
Transducer Secondary
Magnitude correction
Phase correction
DC offset
phase-to-neutral or
phase-to-phase
values displayed
depend upon the
Wiring Configuration
set under the Basic
tab
1.00000000
1.00000000
1.00000000
0.00000000
0.00000000
Transducers are typically PTs (potential transformers) and CTs (current transformers) that are used to interface the instrument to the
power circuit. PTs allow the instrument to measure circuits that are not within the measurement range of the instrument. CTs measure
the current of the circuit and convert it to within the measurement range of the instrument.
For Phase rotation, users can choose whether to have phasor shift clockwise or counterclockwise, depending on the way they have
set up their system. Click the value field to display the drop down menu featuring Normal (counter clockwise) or Reverse (clockwise).
Either orientation will yield the same mathematical calculations of voltage and current measurements. The 5530 is able to automatically
determine phase rotation of the voltage channels and then match up the current channels.
The 5530 DataNode will swap voltage phases to ensure positive sequence phase rotation (counter clockwise according to IEEE definitions) and then swap and invert current channels to match.
The Encore Series Software allows users to do channel swapping and inversion information. Channel mapping is used to correct for
errors in wiring the instrument to the circuit. If a mistake is made, such as an inverted CT or a phase is connected to the wrong channel, it can be corrected in the software instead of changing the wiring to the instrument. Note that it is recommended that the actual
wiring be changed, but channel mapping can correct the problem if this is not practical.
A channel-mapping array is provided to permit manual configuration of channel swapping and inversion. Under CHANNEL MAPPING,
click on the corresponding voltage or current phase to show which channel the Signal is connected to. Click and enable the value
field opposite Channel is inverted to as it applies.
The channel-mapping array works by specifying a numeric code in each array slot that indicates which phase is connected to the
physical 5530 DataNode channel.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–103
Normally, the channels and phases are matched as shown below. Channels can be swapped and/or inverted to correct mistakes in
wiring.
Voltage Phase A
Voltage Phase B
Voltage Phase C
Voltage Neutral
Current Phase A
Current Phase B
Current Phase C
Current Neutral
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
The DataNode employs two A/D converters to sample the voltage and current channels for a given phase simultaneously. Measurement errors may result if the voltage and current signals are not correctly paired.
Under TRANSDUCER RATIOS, users can set values for the Transducer Primary and Transducer Secondary. Values to account for
any voltage or current transformers can be entered for each input channel. The primary and secondary values are entered. For example, if the primary voltage is 2400 volts and the secondary voltage is 120 volts, then those values should be entered. This gives an
effective 20:1 reduction in voltage. When the input voltage to the DataNode is 120V, the displayed value will be 2400 volts. The Phase
correction and DC offset values are not programmable.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–104
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
8.3.17
Advanced tab
Properties
Values
Cross Triggering
Broadcast Group ID
1234
Enable sending rms trigger
…
Enable responding to received rms trigger
…
Enbable sending transient trigger
…
Enable responding to received transient trigger
…
Broadcast address - if empty, uses local
Communications
... use the DataNode setup
When configurations differ ...
{use the DataNode setup}
{use the InfoNode setup}
Passwords
User Account Password
*************
Admin Account Password
*************
InfoNode Access User ID
admin
InfoNode Access Password
*************
Firmware Access User ID
admin
Firmware Access Password
*************
One Time Operations
Reset 302 Default Setup
…
Clear 332 Database and reboot
…
Don't save data from next download
…
Clear last journal ID
…
One Time Firmware Operations
CAUTION: These operations will copy new firmware to the DataNode
Load IOP (302) firmware
…
Load ACP (332) firmware
…
Load both IOP (302) and ACP (332) firmware
…
Load both to all DataNodes
…
click to display
drop down menu
Parameters under the Advanced tab allow the administrator or user to set up functions that affect communications, information
access, and download between the Encore Series Software and DataNode systems.
The 5530/5520 can be configured to issue a UDP (cross trigger) broadcast message when an RMS variation and/or transient occurs.
The 5530/5520 can also be configured to listen for such messages and cause an rms variation or transient recording to occur regardless of whether or not its own trigger conditions for that instrument were met. Under CROSS TRIGGERING, a Broadcast Group ID is
assigned to allow for different groups of cross trigger senders/recipients.
The broadcast ID number in the Encore Series Software must match the broadcast group ID set under the TCP/IP parameter of the
Datanode. The DataNode also uses this ID mechanism for multiple DataNode cross triggering, and is guaranteed only on an un-routed
network. The group ID is sent along with the broadcast message and only those receivers with the same group ID will respond to the
broadcast if so enabled. The broadcast address can be specified to send a broadcast to a directed address other than the local network if desired. However, results cannot be guaranteed and data may be lost if the message takes too long to arrive at its destination.
Checkboxes are seen opposite the next four items Enable sending rms trigger, Enable responding to received rms trigger,
Enable sending transient trigger, Enable responding to received transient trigger. The user specifies which event types are
generated and/or listened for through these checkboxes. When said parameters are activated, the system in effect utilizes trigger messages as trip signals. If Broadcast address is empty, message broadcast is routed through the local network. The user specifies a
group ID and optionally a broadcast address.
Under COMMUNICATIONS, users are given the option to return to the default Encore Series Software or DataNode settings When
configurations differ and communication errors occur.
Access privileges are determined under PASSWORDS. The passwords entered in the Encore Series system must match the ones
stored under the Password section of the Signature System DataNode. Otherwise, access to information may be denied. The User
Account Password and Admin Account Password refer to two different user categories. An Admin User can create and add an
account for a new Basic User. Both Admin and Basic users can assign properties such as their own user name and password. See
section Users on page 45 for more details.
The default Encore Series Access User ID is ‘admin’. The default Encore Series Access Password is ‘password’. These parameters allow access to view and change information in the Encore Series Software system. The default Firmware Access User ID is
'admin'. The default Firmware Access Password is ‘password’. These parameters allow access to view and change information in the
DataNode system. To change passwords, simply click on the Password value fields. A confirmation window appears everytime you
click on the password value field. The window asks whether you want to change and save a new password.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–105
Parameters are also available for ONE TIME OPERATIONS on the EPQ DataNode. These one time procedures include configuring the
DataNode to its default settings and/or clearing memory space by rebooting. Observe caution in undertaking these procedures since
they cannot be undone. To return to the default DataNode settings, activate the Reset 302 default setup value field. To clear old data
and reboot DataNode, activate the Clear 332 Database and reboot value field. To save memory space, the administrator or user may
choose to activate Don't save data from next download. To discard the most recent journal ID entries, activate the Clear last journal ID value field.
Finally, parameters for downloading new or updated firmware are available under ONE TIME FIRMWARE OPERATIONS. A firmware is
a program or instruction stored in Flash memory which implements the communications interface and data acquisition between the
outside world and the instrument.
Based on the parameters available, the administrator or user can activate value fields to Load IOP firmware or to Load ACP firmware or to Load both IOP and ACP firmware. The IOP and ACP firmware are two different sets of firmware. The IOP communicates
directly with the Encore Series Software, while the ACP is comprised of the host CPU and DSP. If the value fields are activated, new
firmware is downloaded on demand from the software to DataNode. New firmware is downloaded automatically if the boot ROM finds
that the existing firmware in the DataNode is missing or corrupt. The administrator or user also has the option to Load Both (IOP and
ACP) firmware to all DataNodes. Download is accomplished using the standard Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP). The DataNode
must be connected to the network where the updates are to be extracted from to ensure a successful download. Since these one time
operations cannot be undone, observe caution when performing download firmware procedures.
8.3.18
Accumulator Resets tab
Properties
Values
Demand Resets
Reset Real Power, DMD, total (Never reset)
…
Reset Reactive Power, DMD, total (Never reset)
…
Reset Apparent Power, DMD, total (Never reset)
…
Reset Peak Current Demand (A) (Never reset)
…
Reset Peak Current Demand (B) (Never reset)
…
Reset Peak Current Demand (C) (Never reset)
…
Reset Peak Current Demand (N) (Never reset)
…
Reset Average Peak Current Demand (Never reset)
…
Reset All Values
…
Energy Accumulators
Reset Phase Energy (Never reset)
…
Reset Total Energy (Never reset)
…
Reset Integrated Reactive Power (Never reset)
…
Reset Total integrated Reactive Power (Never reset)
…
Reset Forward fund. freq. WHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Reverse fund. freq. WHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Forward tot. fund. freq. WHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Reverse tot. fund. freq. WHrs (Never
…
Reset Forward fund. freq. VarHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Reverse fund. freq. VarHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Forward tot. fund. freq. VarHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Reverse tot. fund. freq. VarHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Fundamental freq. V A Hours (Never reset)
…
Reset Total Fund. freq. VA Hours (Never reset)
…
In connection with electric utility billing practices, the Encore Series Software and DataNode system has an interface to reset demand
and energy accumulation readings. The Accumulator Resets tab allows one to reset the parameters to defined values, but not to
change or configure new values. The notation 'Never reset' appears to mean that the parameter values register original readings and
have never been reset at any time. The moment the reset parameter is activated/enabled, the notation will change and will reflect the
date and time of last reset.
Under DEMAND RESETS, Real or True Phase power demand, Reactive power demand, and Apparent power demand can be reset.
See chapter APPENDIX G. Glossary on page 218 for the definitions of the various power parameter values. The system maintains a
running maximum known as "peak demand" on per phase basis and per average demand current value. It also stores the date and
time of each peak demand. Peak demand is the maximum electrical power load consumed or produced in a defined period of time.
Under ENERGY ACCUMULATORS, the system calculates and stores accumulated values for energy (in kWHr unit), reactive energy (in
kVarH unit), and apparent energy (in kVAH unit). Kilowatt-Hour (kWHr) is the equivalent energy supplied by a power of 1000 watts for
one hour. Watt is the unit for real power. Kilovar-hour (kVarH) is equal to 1000 reactive volt-ampere hours. Var is an abbreviation for volt
ampere reactive. It measures the integral of the reactive power of the circuit into which the instrument is connected. Var is the unit for
reactive power. Kilovolt-ampere (kVA) is equivalent to 1000 volt-amperes. VA is the unit for apparent power. Apparent power is the
product of voltage and current of a single-phase circuit in which the two reach their peaks at different times. See chapter APPENDIX G.
Glossary on page 218 for the definitions of the various power parameter values.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–106
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
The accumulated energy values include real power factor (average three-phase) which is mathematically defined as "demand kW/
demand kVA". It also displays integrated and total integrated reactive power. The system also calculates and stores apparent energy
(VA). Real Power (W) and Apparent Power (VA) are reset together; you cannot reset one without resetting the other. Likewise, the Watthour Meter and Varhour Meter are reset together.
The system uses the fundamental frequency as reference for calculating energy values in one of two modes: forward or reverse. In forward mode, the circuit monitor considers the direction of power flow, allowing the accumulated energy magnitude to both increase and
decrease. In reverse mode, the circuit monitor accumulates energy as positive, regardless of the direction of power flow. In other
words, the energy value increases, even during reverse power flow. The default accumulation mode is reverse.
Summary of EPQ DataNode Setup Parameters and Tabs Where they can be Found
PARAMETERS
Active Power
Active Power Demand
ANSI Transformer Derating Factor
Apparent Power
Apparent Power Demand
Arith. Sum PF
Arithmetic Sum DF
Arithmetic Sum VA
Avg PF @ Peak P Dmd
Avg PF @ Peak Q Dmd
Current Crest Factor
Current THD
Current THD (Rms)
Current TID
Current TID (Rms)
Displacement Power Factor
Frequency
Fund Arithmetic Sum VA
Fund Freq VA Hrs
Fund Vector Sum VA
Fwd Fund Freq varHrs
Fwd Fund. Freq WHrs
Harmonic Power
HRms Voltage
I Imbalance (rms/rms avg)
I Imbalance (S0/S1)
I Imbalance (S2/S1)
IEEE 519 Current TDD
Interharmonic Rms Current
Interharmonic Rms Voltage
IT Product
Negative Sequence Current
Negative Sequence Voltage
Net Current
P Dmd @ Peak Q Dmd
P Dmd @ Peak S Dmd
Peak Active Power Demand
Peak Apparent Power Demand
Peak Demand Current
Peak Reactive Power Demand
PF @ Peak VA Dmd
PF Demand
Positive Sequence Current
Positive Sequence Voltage
Predicted P Dmd
Predicted Q Dmd
Predicted VA Dmd
Pst
Plt
Plt Sliding
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
TAB WHERE FOUND
METER
DEMAND
HARMONICS
METER
DEMAND
ADVANCED METER
ADVANCED METER
ADVANCED METER
DEMAND
DEMAND
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
ADVANCED METER
METER
ADVANCED METER
ADVANCED METER
ADVANCED METER
ADVANCED ENERGY
ADVANCED ENERGY
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
ADVANCED METER
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
FLICKER
FLICKER
FLICKER
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–107
PARAMETERS
Q Dmd @ Peak P Dmd
Q Dmd @ Peak VA Dmd
Reactive Power Demand
Reactive Power Demand
Residual Current
Rms Current
Rms Current Demand
Rms Current Individual Harmonics
Rms Harmonic Current
Rms Voltage
Rms Voltage Individual Harmonics
Rvs Fund Freq varHrs
Rvs. Fund. Freq. WHrs
Total Fund Freq Q
Transformer K Factor
True Power Factor
V Imbalance (rms/rms avg)
V Imbalance (S0/S1)
V Imbalance (S2/S1)
V RMS Harmonic
V/I Angle
VA Dmd @ Peak Q Dmd
VA Dmd @ Peak P Dmd
Var Hours
Vector Sum DF
Vector Sum PF
Vector Sum VA
Voltage Crest Factor
Voltage THD
Voltage THD (Rms)
Voltage TID
Voltage TID (Rms)
Voltage TIF
Voltage TIF (Rms)
Watt Hours
Zero Sequence Current
Zero Sequence Voltage
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–108
TAB WHERE FOUND
DEMAND
DEMAND
METER
DEMAND
ADVANCED METER
RMS Variation, TRANSIENTS, METER
DEMAND
ADVANCED HARMONICS
HARMONICS
RMS Variation, TRANSIENTS, METER
ADVANCED HARMONICS
ADVANCED ENERGY
ADVANCED ENERGY
ADVANCED ENERGY
HARMONICS
METER, ADVANCED METER
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
HARMONICS
METER
DEMAND
DEMAND
REVENUE
ADVANCED METER
ADVANCED METER
ADVANCED METER
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
REVENUE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
9
5540 DataNode Setup
9.1
5540 Energy Management (EM) DataNode Setup
Refer to the 5540 DataNode User's Guide for more detailed information about connections and setups.
Figure 107 A 5540 Series DataNode
Recommended Setup before connecting to an Encore Series Software
The 5540 DataNode must be programmed from its front panel to properly communicate with the Encore Series Software. To enter the
program mode, see the DataNode 5540 User's Guide. The communications should be set as follows:
8 BIT EVEN
9600 baud
XON/XOFF
BINARY RS232
ADDRESS x (where x matches the value setup in the Encore Series for that 5540)
If using RS232 or RS485, the cables between the Encore Series and 5540 must go though a null modem; that is, transmit and receive
must be interchanged, as well as interchanging the positive (+) and negative (-) lines for both transmit and receive.
9.2
Specifications for 5540 EM DataNode
Measurements
23 parameters including true RMS voltage and current, kVA, kW, PF, frequency, kVAR, kWh, kVAh, kVARh, current demand, kVA
demand, kW demand
Voltages
3-phase L-L or L-N (660 Vrms L-L, 500 Vrms L-N FS), 45-65 Hz fundamental, accuracy +0.3% RDG (FS for 10%-120% FS)
Currents
3-phase (5 Arms or 1Arms FS), accuracy ±0.3% RDG (FS for 2%-120% FS)
Instrument Power
96-138 Vac / 185-250 Vac; 50-60 Hz, 10 Va
Enclosure Environments
ABS panel mount, cutout 92x92mm (3.375” square); screw terminal connections for voltage and current; operating -20oC to +60oC,
0-95% RH non-condensing
Front Panel
GE Lexan film; daylight-visible display, sealed tactile feedback controls
Communications
Mechanism for information exchange between Encore Series Software and 5540 DataNode: either MODBUS or ASCII.
Additional Features
External synchronization via dry contacts; supports voltage and current multipliers, user-selected wiring configuration, communications
address, kW demand period, and Ampere demand period
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–109
9.3
Template and DataNode Tabs
The General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes (chapter 7.3 General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes through the Encore Series
Software Setup Page on page 79) and Using the Template Function in DataNode Setup (chapter 7.4 Using the Template Function in
DataNode Setup on page 82) provide important background information for DataNode setup. Read these sections before continuing
on with the discussion below.
Template Setup tabs - All tabs except Template are the same as that of its associated DataNode tabs. From the Template setup tab
shown below, you can set the name and description of the template. This tab also contains a list of all of the DataNodes of the same
type as the template. Each DataNode in the list has a checkbox that indicates if the template is associated with the respective DataNode. When you associate a template with a DataNode, all of the setup values from the template are copied to the DataNode's setup
values. Thereafter, any change that you make to the template is copied to all of the DataNodes associated with the template.
check box to
associate
template with
DataNode
Figure 108
DataNode Setup tabs - All setup parameters except for those on the Identification and Status, Communication, and Polling tabs are
part of the template. The setup values on these tabs (e.g. DataNode name, IP address, polling rate, etc.) are not affected by the
changes to Templates.
Figure 109
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–110
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
9.4
Programming Standard Tabs
LEGEND (Please note the following conventions used in the screen displays):
Items in gray text are not programmable, but included for information purpose to the user.
Items in bold are examples of what can be entered.
Selections available in drop down menu are enclosed in brackets { xxxx }.
!
Caution!
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH has already set default values for the various parameters in each DataNode. The default values
have been tested to result in optimal system performance. Users are advised not to change the default value settings unless
there are applications which require advanced setups.
9.4.1
Identification and Status tab
Properties
Values
Identification Information
Edison 5540
Name
Description
Serial Number
Version
Health
Communication status
Last poll at
Next poll at
Unknown
980
Status Information
System health is normal
Idle
03/28/2006 20:46:38
03/28/2006 20:51:34
Use the settings below to associate this DataNode with a template. Note: selecting a template causes all DataNode specific settings to
be updated to those of the template; however, the DataNode’s settings can be changed after a template is applied.
5540 Template
{None, 5540 Template}
Template
The Identification and Status tab contains identification and health status description of the DataNode.
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION includes the Name and Description which users can assign for a particular DataNode type. Simply
click on the Name or Description value field and the cursor is set for users to type in the space provided. Description typically describes
the place where the DataNode hardware is located. Users are allowed to enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters under the Name and
Description fields. The Serial Number and Version of the DataNode hardware are automatically set by default. This instrument-specific information is available only for viewing and cannot be altered or changed from the Encore Series.
STATUS INFORMATION properties includes Health status, whether the DataNode system is functioning normally or not. It also
includes status of Encore Series Software to DataNode Communications.
Polling Status is also displayed, indicating when the Encore Series Software last requested data from the DataNode and when the
next poll is scheduled to take place.
Template users may also associate this DataNode with the settings from a template.
Remember to click the Save Setup button found at the bottom of the page to save any changes that have been done. To aid users, a
Save confirmation window appears after changes have been made and when users are about to switch to a different tab.
9.4.2
Communication tab
Properties
Values
Set the active flag to allow communication with the DataNode.
Note: the active flag must be cleared in order to change the other communication settings.
;
Active
Direct serial connections are supported. Address strings are of the form /ID where ID is the unit id number (0-255).
Connection
Address
Protocol
COM2
/1
Modbus
COMMUNICATION parameters for 5540 DataNode include the following:
Active which indicates whether communications between the Encore Series Software and DataNode is enabled. When checked, this
means that the DataNode is actively communicating and exchanging information with the software. When making changes in the different value settings of a DataNode, it is recommended to uncheck the Active box again. Also when adding a new DataNode, the
Active box should be checked last to establish link with the DataNode site. Click on the Home page to see which DataNodes are
actively communicating with the Encore Series.
Connection can be through Serial Port COM 1 thru COM 255 (Hardware or Virtual ports) or Modem as installed and recognized by the
Windows operating system.
Address must be a unique address between 1 and 99 for each DataNode. However, if only one DataNode is connected to the COM
port and the present address is unknown, zero (0) can be used. If the connection is via Modem as opposed to Serial Port, then the
telephone number would be entered before the “/” separating the device address.
Protocol mechanism for information exchange between Encore Series Software and 5540 DataNode: either MODBUS or ASCII.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–111
9.4.3
Polling tab
Properties
Values
Polling schedule
Enable scheduled polling
;
Start at
01/01/2006 00:00:00
Repeat every
1
minutes
Repeat units
{minutes, hours, days, weeks, months}
Maximum number of retries
3
Time to wait between retries (minutes)
1
Operations performed at each poll
Download and store data
;
Operations performed only once at the next poll
Send settings to DataNode
…
Delete data in DataNode
…
POLLING SCHEDULE parameters include Enable scheduled polling, which indicates whether scheduled polling of the DataNode
should take place. When checked, this means that the Encore Series will poll the DataNode for new information according to a defined
schedule. This includes a Start at date and time, a Repeat every numerical value, and Repeat units which can be minutes, hours,
days, weeks, or months. The Maximum number of retries can be specified along with the Time to wait between retries (in minutes).
OPERATIONS PERFORMED AT EACH POLL include a Download and store data checkbox to enable the Encore Series Software to
retrieve data stored in the DataNode.
OPERATIONS PERFORMED ONLY ONCE AT THE NEXT POLL include checkboxes to enable/disable: Send settings to DataNode use to match DataNode setups with those listed in the Encore Series Software, and Delete data in DataNode - use to remove stored
data in the DataNode.
9.4.4
Basic tab
Properties
Time between periodic samples (sec)
Display Thresholds as:
Base Voltage
Wiring Configuration
PT Ratio
CT Primary
Phase A Rms Voltage (L-L or L-G)
Phase B Rms Voltage (L-L or L-G)
Phase C Rms Voltage (L-L or L-G)
Phase A Rms Current (Amps)
Phase B Rms Current (Amps)
Phase C Rms Current (Amps)
Phase A Active Power (kW)
Phase B Active Power (kW)
Phase C Active Power (kW)
Total Active Power (kW)
Phase A Reactive Power (kvar)
Phase B Reactive Power (kvar)
Phase C Reactive Power (kvar)
Total Reactive Power (kvar)
Phase A Apparent Power (kVA)
Phase B Apparent Power (kVA)
Phase C Apparent Power (kVA)
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–112
Values
Communications
300
Display
Percent
{Volts, Per Unit, Percent}
208.0
Inputs
4-wire, L-N
{3-wire, open delta}
{3-wire, direct}
{4-wire, L-L}
1.0000
20
Registers
…
;
;
;
;
;
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Properties
Total Apparent Power (kVA)
Phase A Power Factor (PU)
Phase B Power Factor (PU)
Phase C Power Factor (PU)
Total Power Factor (PU)
Frequency (Hz)
Total Positive Energy Flow (kWh)
Total Negative Energy Flow (kWh)
Total Positive Integrated Reactive Power Flow
(kvarhours)
Total Negative Integrated Reactive Power Flow
(kvarhours)
kVA Demand
kW Demand
Values
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
Basic tab setup contains data on Communications, Display, Inputs, and Registers.
COMMUNICATIONS parameters include the following:
• Polling Interval (sec): typically 300 seconds
DISPLAY parameters include the following:
• Display Thresholds as: displays parameters in either Volts, Percent, or PU (per unit)
• Base Voltage: needed if using percent or per unit
• Base Power: needed if using percent or per unit
INPUTS parameters include the following:
• Wiring Configuration: set to either 3 wire open delta, 4 wire Line-to-Neutral, 3 wire direct, or 4 wire L-L
• PT Ratio: if the voltage inputs are connected to an external PT
• CT Primary: the maximum nominal current on the primary side of the CT; the secondary ratio is determined by the version
of the instrument in use
REGISTERS parameters include the following:
• Registers: checkboxes to select those to save for trending
• Rms Voltage and Current
• Active Power in kilowatts, Reactive Power in kVARs, Apparent Power in kVA, Power Factor
• Frequency in Hz
• Total Energy Flow: three phase sum of the real or active energy flowing from the source to the load (positive) and from the
load to the source (negative) in kWhr
• Total Reactive Integrated Power Flow: three phase sum of the reactive energy flowing from the source to the load (positive)
and from the load to the source (negative) in kVARhr
• Total Apparent Integrated Power Flow: three phase sum of the apparent energy flowing in kVAhr
• KW Demand: average real or active power over the demand interval
• KVA Demand: average apparent power over the demand interval
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–113
9.4.5
Advanced tab
Properties
Reset Accumulators on Next Connect
…
Demand Period (min)
15
Average Buffer Size
8 entries
Front Panel Reset Enabled
;
Phase A Rms Voltage (L-L or L-G)
Enabled
;
High-High Threshold
120.000
High Threshold
110.000
Low Threshold
90.000
Low-Low Threshold
80.000
Phase B Rms Voltage (L-L or L-G)
Enabled
;
High-High Threshold
120.000
High Threshold
110.000
Low Threshold
90.000
Low-Low Threshold
80.000
Phase C Rms Voltage (L-L or L-G)
Enabled
;
High-High Threshold
120.000
High Threshold
110.000
Low Threshold
90.000
Low-Low Threshold
80.000
Phase A Rms Current (Amps)
Enabled
;
High-High Threshold
24.000
High Threshold
20.000
Low Threshold
5.000
Low-Low Threshold
0.000
Phase B Rms Current (Amps)
Enabled
;
High-High Threshold
24.000
High Threshold
20.000
Low Threshold
5.000
Low-Low Threshold
0.000
Phase C Rms Current (Amps)
Enabled
;
High-High Threshold
24.000
High Threshold
20.000
Low Threshold
5.000
Low-Low Threshold
0.000
Phase A Active Power (kW)
Enabled
…
High-High Threshold
5750.000
High Threshold
4420.000
Low Threshold
985.000
Low-Low Threshold
0.000
Phase B Active Power (kW)
Enabled
…
High-High Threshold
5750.000
High Threshold
4420.000
Low Threshold
985.000
Low-Low Threshold
0.000
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–114
Values
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Properties
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Values
Phase C Active Power (kW)
…
5750.000
4420.000
985.000
0.000
Total Active Power (kW)
…
17250.000
13260.000
2955.000
0.000
Phase A Reactive Power (kvar)
…
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Phase B Reactive Power (kvar)
…
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Phase C Reactive Power (kvar)
…
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Total Reactive Power (kvar)
…
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Phase A Apparent Power (kVA)
…
5750.000
4420.000
985.000
0.000
Phase B Apparent Power (kVA)
…
5750.000
4420.000
985.000
0.000
Phase C Apparent Power (kVA)
…
5750.000
4420.000
985.000
0.000
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–115
Properties
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Enabled
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Enabled
Low Threshold
Low-Low Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Enabled
High-High Threshold
High Threshold
Values
Total Apparent Power (kVA)
…
17250.000
13260.000
2955.000
0.000
Phase A Power Factor (PU)
…
0.000
0.000
Phase B Power Factor (PU)
…
0.000
0.000
Phase C Power Factor (PU)
…
0.000
0.000
Total Power Factor (PU)
…
0.000
0.000
Frequency
…
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Total Positive Energy Flow (kWh)
…
0.000
0.000
Total Negative Energy Flow (kWh)
…
0.000
0.000
Total Positive Integrated Reactive Power Flow (kvarhours)
…
0.000
0.000
Total Negative Integrated Reactive Power Flow (kvarhours)
…
0.000
0.000
Total Integrated Apparent Power Flow (kVAhours)
…
0.000
0.000
kVA Demand
…
17250.000
13260.000
kW Demand
…
17250.000
13260.000
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–116
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Advanced Setup provides you with the ability to set limits for triggering of various parameters, as well as to setup other functions, such
as demand interval.
• Demand Period: in minutes, typically 15
• Average Buffer Size: typically 8
• Front Panel Reset Enabled: check box to set
• Limits for each parameter, typically HI-HI, HI, LO, LO-LO: Some parameters will only have the first two or the last two,
where the numbers could only be positive or negative, respectively
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–117
10
5560 QOS DataNode Setup
10.1
Introduction
The 5560 DataNode is designed to monitor and report quality of supply compliance as specified by European Standard EN50160. The
5560 DataNode provides the full set of data required to verify compliance with EN50160, while maintaining the power quality diagnostic capabilities expected from GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH.
10.2
Scope of EN50160 Standard 1)
It is important to note that EN50160 is defined for the electricity supplied at the supply terminals, and does not deal with the supply
system or the consumer’s installation or equipment itself.
As the standard deals with the voltage characteristics in public distribution networks, other aspects essential for the supply quality (for
instance short circuit power) are not treated in this standard. The standard is applicable only under normal operating conditions of the
supply system. This includes also the correct operation of protection devices in the case of a fault in the network (blowing of a fuse,
operation of a circuit-breaker, etc.), the operation of loads agreed between customer and supplier, and changes in the network.
The standard lists several specific examples of exceptional conditions, out of supplier's control, that can cause one or more of the
characteristics to go beyond the values given. These conditions include exceptional weather conditions and other natural disasters,
third party interference, acts by public authorities, industrial action, force majeure, and power shortages resulting from external events.
Under such conditions the EN50160 does not apply.
EN50160 is not an EMC standard. It does not give compatibility levels or emission limits. Moreover the standard does not have the
function of specifying the requirements for electrical equipment. Its sole function is to give values for the main voltage characteristics of
electricity supplied by Low Voltage (LV) and Medium Voltage (MV) public networks. That means EN50160 is a product standard giving
the voltage characteristics which can be expected at the supply terminals. This standard does not describe the average situation in the
public supply networks but the maximum values or variations of the voltage characteristics under normal operating conditions which
can be expected by the customer at any place of the network.
10.3
5560 DataNode QOS Functional Components
The QOS compliance monitoring functionality of the 5560 DataNode is optimized to ensure error-free setup and reporting for EN50160
applications. Selections are provided to allow a user to configure the system to collect either a super-set or sub-set of the measurements required for EN50160 monitoring. Statistical data is calculated on the required 12 parameters specified in EN50160 over the (1
week) interval to produce a PASS/FAIL decision of compliance. Statistical and trending visualizations show what the values of each of
the parameters were over the interval, and at what time did they approach or exceed limits.
As with other GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH DataNodes, the 5560 DataNode is set up and viewed through a web browser, with no software to learn and install.
The QOS functional components built into the 5560 DataNode are incorporated into the various tab pages of the Encore Series Software system. The user interface employed by the 5560 DataNode is identical to that of other DataNodes, except that additional monitoring and setup protocols were installed to meet the data acquisition requirements of the QOS compliance standards.
This Chapter describes the following QOS functional components built into the 5560 DataNode.
• Specifications for 5560 DataNode
• Home Page Reporting of QOS Compliance
• QOS Status Views
> QOS Status Query
> QOS Status Summary
> Compliance Statistical Graph
> Smart Views
• QOS Compliance Reports
> Smart Reports
> Standard Reports
• Real-time Display of QOS Data
• 5560 DataNode System Setup
> EN50160 General Setup tab
> 5560 DataNode Setup
References to the sections above are advertently made in the other Chapters of this manual where they relate.
1)
Based on Draft Guide to the Application EN50160, CENELEC Report, CLC/BTTF 68-6(SG)1 Rev., January 1999.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–118
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
10.4
5560 DataNode Specifications
Configurations: External CT and voltage pods; 1A/5A current with 5x overcurrent.
Voltages: 4 channels, accuracy +/- 0.1% of reading, +/- 0.1% FS.
Currents: 4 channels, accuracy +/- 0.1% of reading, +/- 0.1% FS.
Instrument Power: 90-250Vac, 50/60Hz; optional 105-150Vdc; built-in UPS with 4-year battery life.
Enclosure/Environments: Rack, panel, desktop, NEMA 4x options; 0-60 deg C standard.
Communications: 10BaseT Ethernet to Encore Series. Software access through Internet, Intranet, dial-up or wireless telephone line.
Additional Features: Remote firmware update; automatic report writer software option.
Certifications and design standards: CE, ISO9001, EMC Directive (89/366/EEC), IEC 61000-4-7, IEC 61000-4-15, EN61010-1 (1993),
EN61010-1/A2.
☞
Note
The 5560 DataNode is actually a 5520/5530 EPQ DataNode with different firmware. EPQ DataNodes can be upgraded to
5560. Please contact GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH factory for details.
Measurements:
Power Frequency - Mean value based on time between zero crossings of voltage of Phase A calculated over 10 second window.
Magnitude of the supply voltage - Rms calculated over 1 cycle with ½ cycle steps.
Supply voltage variations - Ten minute mean of rms calculated over 1 cycle with ½ cycle steps.
Rapid voltage changes (Flicker) - As per EN61000-4-15.
Supply voltage dips - 1% to 90% of Un. Depth of Rms calculated over 1 cycle with ½ cycle steps, along with 10msec to 60 seconds in
duration, reported in tabular form.
Short interruptions of the supply voltage - <1% of Un on ½ cycle RMS with duration less or equal to 3 min. Rms calculated over 1 cycle
with ½ cycle steps.
Temporary power - Frequency overvoltage between live conductors and earth - 110% of Un or Uc. Rms calculated over 1 cycle with ½
cycle steps
Transient overvoltages between live conductors and earth - Captured at 128 samples/cycle along with crest and waveshape triggers.
Supply voltage unbalance - Negative phase sequence divided by positive phase sequence components.
Harmonic voltage - As per EN61000-4-7.
Interharmonic voltage - As per EN61000-4-7.
Mains signalling voltage on the supply voltage - User selectable 5 frequencies below 3KHz.
Parameters measured include kVA, KW, True PF, DPF, KVAR, kWhr, kVAR and other power related parameters.
10.5
Home Page Reporting of QOS Compliance
The Quality of Supply compliance status for the latest complete evaluation period of each DataNode is reported via the Encore Series
Software Home page. Information about QOS compliance appears in two parts of the Home page: the DataNode status paragraph
and the DataNode status table.
☞
Note
Other types of DataNode (EPQ, 5540, Mavosys 10 Digital, Mavosys 10 PQ, etc.) may exist in the system. Voltage compliance
status applies to DataNodes with QOS data-acquisition modules in it i.e. 5560, Mavosys 10 PQ, and Mavosys 10 Voltage
DataNodes.
Compliance Message on DataNode Status Paragraph
A report on QOS compliance appears in the DataNode status paragraph. If the 5560 DataNode is compliant, the following message is
shown “There is one DataNode for monitoring Quality of Supply compliance. This DataNode is reporting compliance.” If the 5560
DataNode is non-compliant or have undetermined compliance, further messages appear under the DataNode status table described
next. The non-compliance message is hyperlinked to the Quality of Supply Compliance section in the DataNode status table.
Compliance Message on DataNode Status Table
An additional section featuring the non-compliance status of 5560 DataNodes appear in the DataNode status table. The table indicates
which DataNodes are not in compliance and/or have undetermined compliance status for the specified interval. DataNodes that are
non-compliant are hyperlinked to the QOS Status view.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–119
Compliance
message on
DataNode
status
paragraph
Compliance
message on
DataNode
status table
Figure 110 5560 DataNode Home Page
10.6
QOS Status View
10.6.1
QOS Status Query
The QOS Status functionality is found in Views page. QOS Status will appear in Encore Series Software systems that have QOS dataacquisition modules i.e. 5560 DataNode in it. Click on the QOS Status to display the standard query selection shown below. Users
have the option to view QOS status data for single or multiple DataNode(s). Users can also select the time range or specify a time
period to view data from. Only data for 5560 DataNodes will be displayed in the set once the Display or Display in New Window button
is clicked.
Once selections have been made, click on either Display or Display in New Window. The QOS Status Summary table shown next page
is displayed.
Figure 111 QOS Status Query Screen
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–120
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
10.6.2
QOS Status Summary
The QOS Status Summary table lists the monitoring periods (weeks) that fall within the selected date range for the selected DataNode(s), as well as how many rms and transient events occurred during the monitoring periods. The standard monitoring period is one
complete week, beginning Sunday 00:00. Any Time/Date Query that specifies a range that would include part of a monitoring period
(less than one week) will have that particular Evaluation Status marked as Incomplete and the Compliance marked as Undetermined.
For completed monitoring periods, Compliance status may either be PASS or FAIL. A PASS or FAIL status is hyperlinked to the Compliance Statistical Bar Chart. See text below for the description of the items contained in the QOS Status Summary table.
PASS/FAIL status is
hyperlinked to the
Compliance Statistical
Graph (see Figure 113
on page 122)
Figure 112 QOS Status Summary Table
Evaluation Status: The evaluation status is either Complete (full week) or Incomplete (less than a week). An evaluation status is Incomplete under the following scenarios.
• It is the current evaluation period and it has simply not completed.
• It is a previous evaluation period but not enough data samples were included in the statistical analysis. This may be due to
the following reasons: data was not collected or too many samples were tagged as unusable due to RMS variations or
some other EN50160 criteria.
☞
Note
The criteria defining completeness of an evaluation period is described on chapter 10.10.1 Quality of Supply General Setup tab
on page 137.
Evaluation Period: This column displays the date and time of the beginning of the evaluation period. Each evaluation period is independent of each other.
Monitor: This column displays the name of the DataNode to which the evaluation period belongs.
Compliance: TheQuality of Supply Answer Module determines voltage compliance. For completed periods, Compliance displays PASS
(Green) or FAIL (Red). For incomplete periods, Compliance displays Undetermined (Black). A PASS or FAIL voltage compliance status
is hyperlinked to the Compliance Statistical Bar Chart featuring the 7 parameters required for determining compliance. See sample bar
chart in Figure 113 on page 122.
Rms Variation Event Count: The rms variation event count is a hyperlink to EN50160 DISDIP table for rms variation events. See Figure
120 on page 131 for the EN50160 DISDIP Table and Figure 121 on page 131 for 3D Bar Chart for Rms Variations.
Transient Event Count: The Transient event count is a hyperlink to EN50160 Transient DISDIP table for Transient Events and Transient
Overvoltages. See Figure 120 on page 131.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–121
10.6.3
Compliance Statistical Graph
The Compliance Statistical Bar Chart shown below displays the seven parameters that are required for determining compliance. The
bar chart indicates the percentage of the intervals passing the specified compliance criteria. The color of the bar indicates the compliance status. A green bar indicates that the parameter is within compliance. A red bar indicates that the parameter does not comply
with EN50160 Standard.
The graph autoscales to enable maximum viewing. The minimum value on the left of the horizontal axis will be the 10% multiple that is
less than the lowest compliance level for the seven parameters displayed. If the value is less than 1%, the bar will graph 1% so that is
visible. See text below for the description of each parameter. For QOS compliance limits of each parameter, refer to the Compliance
Limits in QOS Setups and Reports table on page 124.
Figure 113 Compliance Statistical Bar Chart
Power Frequency: In case of fault operation, parts of an interconnected system may become isolated. Compliance will be assessed
over an observation period of one week, by a statistical analysis carried out over the sequence of 10 seconds measurements. Frequency is represented by a single value and a single bar. The bar is a hyperlink to the Power Frequency Graph. See section Power Frequency Graph on page 133.
Supply Voltage Variations: Under normal operating conditions, load changes cause variations of the 10 minute average supply voltage.
Generally this is compensated by automatic voltage regulation within a period of a few tens of seconds. Supply Voltage Variations display a cluster of bars, one for each phase. The color of each bar indicates the compliance status for its phase. A green bar indicates
that the parameter is within compliance. A red bar indicates that the parameter does not comply with EN50160.
Rapid Voltage Changes (Flicker): Typical rapid voltage changes do not exceed a magnitude of + 5% or - 5% of the nominal or declared
voltage. This limitation is possible because connection of loads capable of creating rapid voltage changes is usually subjected to regulations. But under certain conditions, higher values up to 10% may occasionally occur. These higher values can occur for instance in
areas where higher power motor equipment (blowers, pumps, compressors, etc.) is used. Flickers display a cluster of bars, one for
each phase. The color of each bar indicates the compliance status for its phase. A green bar indicates that the parameter is within
compliance. A red bar indicates that the parameter does not comply with EN50160.
Supply Voltage Unbalance: The unbalance of a three phase supply voltage consists of a loss of symmetry of the phase voltage vectors
(magnitude and/or angle), created mainly by unbalanced load. Compliance is verified when 95% of the sequence of valid 10 minute
values are within the specified tolerance of normally 2% (in single phase/two phase supplies 3%). Supply Voltage Unbalance is represented by a single value and a single bar. The color of the bar indicates the compliance status. A green bar indicates that the parameter
is within compliance. A red bar indicates that the parameter does not comply with EN50160.
Harmonic Voltage: Harmonics display a cluster of bars, one for each phase. The color of each bar indicates the compliance status that
is calculated by ‘anding’ the statuses of Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) and each Harmonic 2 thru 25. The bars for Harmonic Voltage
all link to the same graph. See section Harmonics Graph on page 132.
With regard to the Harmonic bars (see graph above, figure 113), if 3 bars all go to 100% but one phase is red, this indicates that the
THD is in compliance but one or more of the individual harmonic components is not in compliance. Clicking on the bars will show harmonic component detail.
Many instruments used for harmonic measurements of power supply systems express their output with reference to the fundamental
component of the voltage, especially those indicating the THD Factor.
Harmonic values are specified only up to order 25 (EN50160 limit), for the practical reason that for higher orders the values are generally so small as to be impractical to measure. Another reason is because of the difficulty of giving values which would be relevant to all
networks.
Interharmonic Voltage: Interharmonics display a cluster of bars, one for each phase. The color of each bar indicates the compliance
status that is calculated by adding the statuses of Total Interharmonic Distortion (TID) and each Interharmonic 2 thru 25. The bars for
Interharmonic Voltage all link to the same graph. See section Interharmonics Graph on page 132.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–122
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Mains Signaling: With regard to signal transmission over the public supply network it is necessary to distinguish between ripple control
systems (frequency range from 100 Hz to 3 kHz) and mains communication systems (frequency range 3 kHz to 148,5 kHz).
Mains Signalling display a cluster of bars, one for each phase. The color of each bar indicates the compliance status that is calculated
by adding the statuses of each of the defined frequencies (a maximum of five) for its phase. A green bar indicates that the parameter is
within compliance. A red bar indicates that the parameter does not comply with EN50160.
Harmonic Compliance Limit Values
Harmonic Number
DC
2
3
4
5
6 thru 24
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Limit
2%
5%
1%
6%
0.5%
5%
1.5%
3.5%
3%
0.5%
2%
1.5%
0.5%
1.5%
1.5%
The general approach of EN50160 is to express all
voltage characteristics by reference to the nominal
voltage or declared voltage, as appropriate. The
following are the Harmonic Compliance Limit values
in relation to the nominal voltage.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–123
Compliance Limits in QOS Setup and Reports
•
•
Low-Voltaqe Supply nominal voltage Un, upper limit 1Kv
Medium-Voltaqe Supply Characteristics - declared voltage Uc, range 1kV to 35kV
Category
Limits for QOS Compliance to Pass
Magnitude of the supply voltage
(In low voltage systems, declared and
nominal voltage are equal)
Mean value over 10 seconds
• ± 1% during 95% of a week
• +4% / -6% during 100% of a week
Mean value over 10 seconds
• ±2% during 95 % of a week
• ±15% during 100% of a week
Mean rms over 10 minutes
• ±10% of Un or Uc during 95% of one week
• ±10%, -15% of Un during 100% of one week
Supply voltage variations
(Under normal operating conditions,
excluding situations arising from faults or
voltage interruptions)
Mean rms over 10 minutes
• ±10% of Un or Uc during 95% of one week
• ±10%, -15% of Un during 100% of one week
Power frequency with synchronous
connection to an interconnected system
Power frequency with no synchronous
connection to an interconnected system
Rapid voltage changes
Supply voltage dips
Short interruptions of the supply voltage
Temporary power-frequency overvoltage
between live conductors and earth
Transient overvoltages between live
conductors and earth
Supply voltage unbalance
(Under normal operating conditions)
Harmonic voltage
(Under normal operating conditions)
Interharmonic voltage
Mains signaling voltage on the supply
voltage
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–124
Plt ≤ 1 for 95 % of the time
Also 5% normal, 10% infrequent for LV, 4 & 6 for MV
No criteria specified, just reported in DISDIP table
<1 second for 70 % of the short interruptions
1.5KV for LV
170% for solidly or impedance earth, 200%
(unearthed of resonate earth)
Short duration surges: < 1 µs
Medium duration surges: > 1 to < 100 µs
Long duration surges: > 100 µs
10 minute mean rms values of the negative phase sequence
component / positive phase sequence component
• ≤2 % during 95 % each period of one week
10 minute mean rms values Individual harmonic voltage up to
25th shall be less than or equal to the value of Un given under
Harmonic Compliance Limits (on page 123) during 95% of one
week
• ≤8% THD (THD up to the 40)
No criteria specified so use same as Harmonics
Individual interharmonic voltage up to 24-25th shall be less than
or equal to the value of Un given under Harmonic Compliance
Limits (on page 123) during 95% of one week
• ≤8% THD (THD up to the 39/40)
3 second mean of signal voltages compared against the Meister
curve
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
10.6.4
Smart Views
Smart Views are similar to Reports of the same name. While Reports are used to summarize data, Smart Views are typically used to
zoom in on data, fix data properties, and add/change channels for data trending (see Figure 115 on page 126).
10.6.4.1 Smart Trend
Smart Trend displays timeline types of graph of a large range of parameters, based on the type of DataNode and which parameters
were saved for trending. After using the standard query to select the DataNodes and time/date range, a display of all possible parameters that can be trended is shown. Clicking a green check mark will trend that parameter for the selected phase and will also show a
histogram of the different values with a cumulative probability line. Red X marks indicate that the particular parameter is not available for
trending. In the sample screens below, a 5560 DataNode is selected for display under the standard query selection. Clicking on the
Display or Display in New Window will show the list of parameters available for trending as the bottom screen shows.
Smart Trends Query Screen
Click the green check mark to
trend the parameter for the
selected DataNode. See Figure
115 on page 126. (Screen capture shows only a partial list of
parameters)
Trend Parameters for 5560 DataNode
Figure 114
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–125
10.6.4.2 Timeline Graphs for Smart Trends
As discussed in the previous page, clicking on a green check mark will trend the parameter for the selected phase and will also show a
histogram of the different values with a cumulative probability line. Sample display screens below show timeline graphs for Long Term
Flicker (Pst) and Short Term Flicker (Plt) quantities. Plt Slide is also available for trending. See chapter 10.14.14 Flicker tab on page 155
for the list of other Flicker parameters available for trending. Smart trends which are linked from the EN50160 Status View display an
item for 95% CPF in the data block.
Right-click to view menu options for
other parameters. For example, to view
data plots of other channels, select
Channels and follow instructions on the
Channel Selection dialog box below.
Timeline Graph with data trend for Short Term Flicker
Timeline Graph with additional data trend for Long Term Flicker
Figure 115 Timeline Graph
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–126
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
10.7
QOS Compliance Reports
10.7.1
Smart Reports
QOS Compliance allows the user to look at voltage compliance information for DataNodes with QOS data-acquisition modules in it.
Click on QOS Compliance to display the standard query selection shown below. Users have the option to view compliance reports for
single or multiple DataNode(s). Users can also select the time range or specify a time period to view data from. Only data for QOS
DataNodes will be displayed in the result set once the Display or Display in New Window button is clicked.
Once selections have been made, click on either Display or Display in New Window. The QOS Compliance table shown next page is
displayed.
Figure 116 QOS Compliance Query Screen
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–127
10.7.1.1 QOS Compliance Summary Table and Table of Contents
The QOS Compliance table shown below displays the 5560 DataNodes and time intervals specified in the QOS Compliance Query
screen. A check sign indicates the availability of a report for the DataNode in the specified interval. The check sign is color coded:
green means the DataNode is compliant during the specified interval; red means the DataNode is non-compliant during the specified
interval; gray means undetermined since evaluation status is still incomplete. The ‘X’ sign indicates the inavailability of a compliance
report (the interval specified in the query screen is not available for the DataNode device). Select and click on a check sign to produce
the desired QOS Compliance Summary Report. The report is summarily presented in Table of Contents format, wherein content data
appear in hyperlinks. See sample QOS Compliance Table of Contents at the bottom of this page.
QOS Compliance Summary Table
See page 129
page 130
page 131
page 132
page 132
page 133
page 134
QOS Compliance Table of Contents
Figure 117
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–128
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
10.7.1.2 QOS Compliance Reports
The compliance reports listed under the Table of Contents are for a single 5560 DataNode and appear as hyperlinks. Click on the
hyperlink to view the report in detail. Each compliance report, graph and statistical data is described below. Note that these reports are
identical to data that are accessible from the Views tab, except that Reports do not produce data in hyperlinks (e.g. user will not be
able to click on a bar as if it is a link).
Compliance Summary
The QOS Status Summary table lists the evaluation periods that fall within the selected date range of a single DataNode. For completed periods (weeks), Compliance status may either be PASS or FAIL. For incomplete periods (less than a week), Compliance status
is Undetermined. Unlike the QOS Status Summary (see chapter 10.6.2 QOS Status Summary on page 121) accessible from Views,
Compliance information accessed from Reports (i.e. PASS or FAIL status) is not hyperlinked. Refer to Figure 112 on page 121 for the
description of each column heading found in the Compliance Summary table below.
Figure 118
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–129
Compliance Graph
The Compliance Graph displays the seven parameters that are required for determining compliance. The bars indicate the percentage
of the intervals passing the specified compliance criteria. A green bar indicates that the parameter is within compliance. A red bar indicates that the parameter does not comply with EN50160 Standard. Unlike the Compliance Statistical Bar Chart (see Figure 113 on
page 122) accessible from Views, users cannot click on the bar as if it is a link. Refer to chapter 10.6.3 Compliance Statistical Graph on
page 122 for the description of each parameter contained in the graph below.
Figure 119
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–130
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Event Statistics
The DISDIP table is based upon the statistics calculated by the 5560 Answer Module. It includes the Table for Transient Overvoltages
and the DISDIP 3D Graph. UNIPEDE DISDIP data is collected and saved on a weekly basis with the counts reset as the final save
occurs. If additional data is detected for an evaluation period after that period has been saved, that interval data is retrieved and
updated. The DISDIP sag and swells table is shown below. All data required for this table is collected and saved. The observations
containing the weekly data are marked for one-year expiration allowing the data to be retained in the InfoNode for at least one year.
Figure 120 DISDIP Table for Transient Events & Transient Overvoltages
Figure 121 3D Graph for Rms Variations
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–131
Harmonics Graph
The Harmonics Graph displays the status of each of the individual harmonics and THD for each phase. The bar chart indicates the percentage of the intervals passing the specified compliance. Odd harmonic numbers are marked on vertical axis. Even harmonic numbers are located in between. A sample harmonics plot is shown below.
Figure 122
Interharmonics Graph
The Interharmonics Graph displays the status of each of the individual interharmonics and TID for each phase. The bar chart indicates
the percentage of the intervals passing the specified compliance. Interharmonic numbers are actually groups of 5Hz frequency bars
between the adjacent harmonic values. For example, the IH3 is the interharmonic values between 2nd and 3rd harmonic. A sample
plot is shown below.
Figure 123
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–132
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Power Frequency Graph
The Power Frequency parameter has two ranges considered for compliance. This graph displays the status of parameter with respect
to each range. The bar chart indicates the percentage of the intervals passing the specified compliance. A sample plot is shown below
Figure 124
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–133
Min/Max Tables
The Min/Max table displays the minimum, maximum and average values for Power Frequency and Rms Voltage along with time and
date of occurrence. Maximum phase values of Rapid Voltage Change, Flicker, Supply Voltage Unbalance, and Harmonics are also displayed along with time and date of occurrence. A sample min/max table is shown below.
Harmonic values up to order
no. 25 (complete harmonic
values not captured on
screen)
Figure 125
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–134
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
10.8
Standard Reports
10.8.1
Quality of Supply
Quality of Supply Report is an analysis of the voltage, similar to the requirements of the EN50160, which specifies that various parameters must be within a specified percentage for 95% of the time. Users can select from an analysis of the Voltage Regulation, Unbalance, and Frequency, with the information presented as a trend and/or histogram. The screen below shows the standard query selection for Quality of Supply Report. Once DataNode, Date, Time range, Data to Plot, and Plot type selections have been made, click on
the Display or Display in New Window button. A table of contents featuring data trends in hyperlinks will appear as shown at the bottom of this page. QOS Regulation Trend and Frequency Trend link to the same graphs as that of Rms Voltage and Frequency respectively under Views - Smart Trends (see chapter 10.6.4 Smart Views on page 125).
Quality of Supply Query Screen
Quality of Supply Table of Contents
Figure 126
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–135
10.9
Real-time Display of QOS Data
Among the parameters included in the 5560 DataNode, in addition to those available in DataNode 5530/5520, are those required to
meet the specification of a flicker meter as per EN61000-4-15. Channels are defined under Real-time page to support real-time display
of flicker measurements. Flicker is the effect on the visual human perception by a changing emission of light by lamps subjected to fluctuations of their supply voltage. Voltage fluctuations consist of a sequence of rapid voltage changes, spaced in time close enough to
stimulate the response of the eye-brain is defined as flicker.
As the annoyance created by flicker is a function of both the intensity of Flicker and the duration of exposure, the severity of the disturbance is described by two parameters: the short term severity (Pst) and the long term severity (Plt).
Values for the flicker parameter include the Pst of last complete interval, Plt of last complete interval, Plt calculated using a sliding interval, maximum instantaneous P (Max. Pinst), LPF of Pinst, the square root of Pinst, and LPF of the square root of Pinst. These values
are included in the channel selection when configuring the journal recordings (see chapter 10.14.14 Flicker tab on page 155). Note that
only channels for which flicker data is present in the system are included in the selection. A sample real time display parameter screen
is shown below. Users can choose which channels (A, B, C, N, Total) to activate by clicking on the respective checkbox. Refer to chapter 6 Real-time Page on page 40 for information on how to generate meter-type readings.
Real Time Setup Tab
Real Time Display Parameters
Figure 127
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–136
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
10.10
5560 DataNode System Setup
Quality of Supply (QOS) General tab requires several setup parameters. All Answer Module setups are global to the Encore Series Software and apply to all instruments that are gathering voltage compliance information.
10.10.1 Quality of Supply General Setup tab
QOS GENERAL setup properties include Enable compliance monitoring, which describes current communications interface
between the QOS DataNode and the Encore Series Software. When checked, this means that QOS DataNode is actively communicating and exchanging information with the software. When making changes in the different value settings of a DataNode, it is wise to disable the box first, make the changes, then enable compliance box again. This helps ease and speed up processing time. Also when
adding a new DataNode, the Enable compliance monitoring box must be checked to establish link with the DataNode site. Check the
Home page to see which DataNodes are actively communicating with the software.
Figure 128
EN50160 is a European standard that stipulates the voltage characteristics that can be expected in public distribution networks. The
QOS functionality is equipped with monitoring and setup protocols to meet the measurements required for EN50160 monitoring. EN50
160 specifies that various parameters must be within a specified percentage for 95% of the standard one week monitoring period.
Users also have the option to Use EN50160 compliance settings. When checked, the default Mavosys 10 DataNode EN50160 settings will be re-configured and re-displayed. All fields will populate with EN50160 settings. The settings in DataNode EN50160 will
overwrite those in the Encore Series Software and be used for monitoring.
Remember to click the Save Setup button found at the bottom of the page to save any change that have been done. To aid users, a
Save confirmation window appears after changes have been made and when users are about to switch to a different tab.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–137
10.10.2 Quality of Supply Evaluation Period tab
QOS EVALUATION PERIOD properties consist of the Start day, Start time, and Length of the evaluation period. The Start day and
Start time properties can be altered and the unit will remain in strict compliance with EN50160. The Length cannot be altered due to
the 7-day week period by which the unit calculates information in strict compliance with the EN50160. To program the properties, click
on the respective value fields to display the drop down menu.
Figure 129
Start day - Specifies the day of the week when the statistics will be reset. Day is selected from a drop down menu containing the days
of the week. The default start day is Sunday.
Start time - Specifies the time of day when the statistics will be reset. Time is an edit box that defaults to 00:00:00 (midnight of Sunday
according to standard). Click on the value field to change time.
Length - Allows the user to set the evaluation period to a value other than the EN50160 specified period of 1 week. Users are cautioned against changing this value as this will result in a non-standard evaluation. The default is 1 week.
EN50160 compliance period specifies the day of the week when compliance monitoring Period ends, and statistics will be reset.
Day is selected from a drop down menu containing the days of the week. The default compliance monitoring start day is Sunday. The
start day can be altered and the unit will remain in strict compliance with EN50160. However, the length of the evaluation period cannot
be altered due to the 7-day week period by which the unit calculates information in strict compliance with EN50160. The monitoring
site is said to be IN COMPLIANCE if the statistical value over a 7-day week period for the specified parameters is 95% or greater.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–138
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
10.10.3 Quality of Supply Limits tab
QOS LIMITS indicate the limit numbers or range of values required for each parameter to satisfy EN50160 standard.
Figure 130
The Minimum and Maximum values for Rms Voltage parameters can be configured. The table on chapter 10.11 EN50160 Compliance Limits on page 140 shows the limit numbers or range of values required for each parameter to satisfy EN50160 standard.
Statistical data is calculated based on the parameters required by EN50160 for determining QOS compliance. Encore Series Software
displays the parameters in the form of tables and graphs available in the QOS Compliance Smart Report, under Reports tab. The following is a description of each measurement parameter required by EN50160 for determining QOS compliance.
Power Frequency: In case of fault operation, parts of an interconnected system may become isolated. Compliance will be assessed
over an observation period of one week, by a statistical analysis carried out over the sequence of 10 seconds measurement.
Supply Voltage Variations: Under normal operating conditions, load changes cause variations of the 10 minute average supply voltage. Generally this is compensated by automatic voltage regulation within a period of a few tenths of seconds.
Flicker: Typical rapid voltage changes or flicker do not exceed a magnitude of +5% or -5% of the nominal or declared voltage. This
limitation is possible because connection of loads capable of creating rapid voltage changes is usually subjected to regulations. However under certain conditions, higher values of up to 10% may occur. These higher values can occur for instance in areas where high
power motor equipment (blower, pumps, compressors, etc.) is used.
Supply Voltage Unbalance: The unbalance of a three phase supply voltage consists of a loss of symmetry of the phase voltage vectors (magnitude and/or angle), created mainly by unbalanced load. Compliance is verified when 95% of the sequence of valid 10
minute values are within the specified tolerance of normally 2% (in single phase/two phase supplies 3%).
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–139
10.11
EN50160 Compliance Limits
Parameter
Limits for QOS Compliance to Pass
Un = Low Voltage (LV) Supply nominal voltage, upper limit 1kV
Uc = Medium Voltage (MV) Supply Characteristics - declared voltage, range 1kV to 35kV
Mean rms over 10 minutes
Supply voltage variations
(Under normal operating conditions, excluding situations arising
• ±10% of Un or Uc during 95% of one week
from faults or voltage interruptions)
• ±10%, -15% of Un for 100% of one week
Supply voltage unbalance
10 minute mean rms values of the negative phase sequence
(Under normal operating conditions) 10 minute mean rms values of component/positive phase sequence component
the negative phase sequence component/positive phase sequence
• ≤2% during 95% each period of one week
component
Flicker
Harmonic voltage
(Under normal operating conditions)
Interharmonic voltage
Plt ≤ 1 for 95% of the time
Also 5% normal, 10% infrequent for LV, 4 &6 for MV
10 minute mean rms values
Individual Harmonic voltage up to the 25th shall be ≤ the value of
Un given under Harmonic
Compliance Limits (see table below) during 95% of one week
• ≤8% THD (THD up to the 40th)
Individual Interharmonic voltage up to the 24th-25th shall be <
the value of Un given under Interharmonic Compliance Limits
during 95% of one week
• <8% TID (TID up to the 39th/40th)
Harmonics are waveform distortion, a steady-state deviation from an ideal power frequency sinusoid and is characterized by the
spectral content of the waveform. See chapter 13.3.10 on page 186 for detailed discussion of harmonics.
Interharmonics are frequency components between the harmonic frequencies.
☞
Note
Harmonic and Interharmonic values are specified only up to order 25 (EN50160 limit), for the practical reason that for higher
orders, the values are generally so small as to be impractical to measure. Another reason is because of the difficulty of giving
values which would be relevant to all networks.
Mains signaling compliance or non-compliance is determined by calculating/adding the status of each of the defined frequencies.
Mains signaling limits for QOS compliance should be within the 3 second mean of signal voltages compared against the Meister curve.
10.11.1 EN50160 Calculations and Statistics
This section lists the calculations and statistics that are gathered from incoming data collected by 5560 DataNode and processed by
the Quality of Supply Answer Module.
For each 5560 DataNode configured in the system, the Answer Module compiles the required statistics and persists them to the database for retrieval under the Views and Reports pages of the Encore Series. The partial statistics are persisted as each set of incoming
data is analyzed so that partial period statistics are available, even though it cannot predict that a site will pass in compliance until interval is complete.
Intermediate statistics for the current evaluation period are made available but are marked as incomplete. Early in an evaluation period
there may not be enough data to provide meaningful statistics and Pass/Fail evaluations for the various criteria. Due to this fact, partial
statistics are not available until at least 100 valid samples have been accumulated and evaluated.
As disturbance based statistics (DISDIP) are simple counts of events in various ranges, this information is made available at any time
during an evaluation period.
At the end of the evaluation period, the statistic calculations are completed and the statistical observation is marked as Complete. If for
some reason, the evaluation period was less than a complete period, the observation is marked as an Incomplete period so the reporting elements can take appropriate action.
All EN50160 compliance statistics are calculated from data retrieved from the 5560 DataNode journal (steady state values) and characterized events (transients and rms variations).
For all periodic quantities, the total number of valid measurements in the evaluation period is tabulated. A particular period is excluded
from the analysis if a sag below 85% of nominal or a swell above 115% of nominal occurred based on cycle-by-cycle rms voltage minima and maxima. For those items tabulated in the Encore Series, the exclusion is based on the minimum and maximum value available
in 10-minute rms voltage min/max/avg trend value log.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–140
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
The table below details the statistical information gathered by the Answer Module.
Parameter
Magnitude of Supply
Supply Voltage
Unbalance
Power Frequency
Interval
(default)
Data Source
Stats
Additional Data Collection
Min
Max
3
Avg
w/TS
w/TS
Phase
10 Min
SS VRMS
Valid Intervals Within +/- 10%
YES
YES
YES
YES
10 Min
SS S2/S1
Valid Intervals <= 2%
YES
NO
YES
NO
10 Min*
SS Count Reports
from DataNode
DataNode Calculation - Pass in all
intervals within broad limit and 95%
of intervals with narrow limits
NO
NO
NO
YES
SS Plt
2 Hour Plt <= 1.0
YES
YES
YES
YES
RMS Variations
90% to 95% LV, 94% to 96% MV
NO
NO
NO
YES
THD <= 8%, Table for Individual
Harmonics
YES
NO
YES
YES
TID <= 1%, All components <= 0.5% YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
Rapid Voltage
2 Hours
Changes – Flicker
Rapid Voltage Changes
1 Week
- Step Changes
Harmonic Voltage
10 Min
Interharmonic Voltage
10 Min
SS Harmonic Group
Spectra, THD + 2 to
25 Harmonics
SS Interharmonic
Group, TID and
components 2 to 25
SS Count Reports
from DataNode
Mains Signaling
DataNode Calculation - Pass if in
10 Min**
NO
NO
Frequencies
range 99% of intervals
Notes:
*Power Frequency sampling done in DataNode at 10 second intervals, reported to journal every 10 minutes.
**Mains Signalling sampling done in DataNode at 3 second intervals, reported to journal every 10 minutes.
10.12
5560 DataNode Setup
10.12.1 General Information
DataNodes have a wide variety of user-programmable features that can be set under the DataNode Setup tab of the Encore Series.
Select the appropriate folder under the DataNode setup tree, then select the DataNode type that you wish to program. DataNode
Properties and Values will be displayed on the right frame. Use the tabs across the bottom of the page to select the appropriate category of programmable features. Users can change the tab setups depending on their access privileges.
10.12.2 5560 DataNode
The setup of a DataNode is dependent on the DataNode type. 5560 DataNodes can be set up in Strict compliance with EN50160 or
can be set up using Custom setups.
Under Strict compliance, only the Identification and Status, Communication, Polling, and Basic tabs are visible and modifiable. This is
the standard method for using the 5560. For those who have unique applications requiring modification of the standard setups, the
Compliance Setup selection box on the Basic tab can be changed to Custom. See sample screens below.
10.12.3 Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear
Data is recorded based upon programmed settings and displayed in Views page, Real-time page and Reports page. Refer to the previous pages of this chapter as well as to the previous chapters for more details on the Views, Real-time and Reports pages.
5560 DataNode with
Compliance Setup: Strict
Tabs available under Strict
compliance: Identification and
Status, Communication, Polling,
and Basic (Basic tab shown)
Figure 131
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–141
5560 DataNode with
Compliance Setup: Custom
Tabs available under
Custom compliance:
Identification and Status,
Communication, Polling, Basic,
Rms Variations, Transients,
Metering, Revenue, Demand,
Adv. Energy, Adv. Metering,
Imbalance, Harmonics, Flicker,
Adv. Harmonics, Transducers,
Advanced, Accumulated Resets
Figure 132
10.13
Template and DataNode Tabs
The General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes (chapter 7.3 General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes through the Encore Series
Software Setup Page on page 79) and Using the Template Function in DataNode Setup (chapter 7.4 Using the Template Function in
DataNode Setup on page 82) provide important background information for DataNode setup. Read these sections before continuing
on with the discussion below.
Template Setup tabs - All tabs except Template are the same as that of its associated DataNode tabs. From the Template setup tab
shown below, you can set the name and description of the template. This tab also contains a list of all of the DataNodes of the same
type as the template. Each DataNode in the list has a checkbox that indicates if the template is associated with the respective DataNode. When you associate a template with a DataNode, all of the setup values from the template are copied to the DataNode's setup
values. Thereafter, any change that you make to the template is copied to all of the DataNodes associated with the template.
Figure 133
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–142
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
DataNode Setup tabs - All setup parameters except for those on the Identification and Status, Communication, and Polling tabs are
part of the template. The setup values on these tabs (e.g. DataNode name, IP address, polling rate, etc.) are not affected by the
changes to Templates.
Figure 134
10.14
5560 DataNode Tabs
The parameters available in each tab are discussed in detail in the next sections. Note the following conventions used in the screen displays.
LEGEND:
Items in gray text are not programmable, but included for information purpose to the user.
Items in bold are examples of what can be entered.
Selections available in drop down menu are enclosed in brackets { xxxx }.
!
Caution!
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH has already set default values for the various parameters in each DataNode. The default values
have been tested to result in optimal system performance. Users are advised not to change the default value settings (except
user-defined properties i.e. Name, IP Address, etc.) unless there are applications which require advanced setups.
10.14.1 Identification and Status tab
Properties
Name
Description
Serial Number
Version
Health
Communication status
Last contact at
Last poll at
Next poll at
Values
Identification Information
Edison 5560
Encore Series QOS DataNode
00-01-32-00-08-30
V3.0.21050920
Status Information
System health is normal
Idle
03/24/2008 21:07:00
03/24/2008 21:07:05
03/24/2008 21:08:00
Use the settings below to associate this DataNode with a template. Note: selecting a template causes all DataNode specific settings
to be updated to those of the template; however, the DataNode’s settings can be changed after a template is applied.
Template
5560 Template
{None, 5560 Template}
Use the setting below to record annotations for this DataNode.
Notes
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–143
The Identification and Status tab contains identification and health status description of the DataNode.
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION includes the Name and Description which users can assign for a particular DataNode type. Simply
click on the Name or Description value field and the cursor is set for users to type in the space provided. Description typically describes
the place where the DataNode hardware is located. Users are allowed to enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters under the Name and
Description fields. The Serial Number and Version of the DataNode hardware are automatically set by default. This instrument-specific information is available only for viewing and cannot be altered or changed from the Encore Series.
STATUS INFORMATION properties includes Health status, whether the DataNode system is functioning normally or not. It also
includes Communication status of Encore Series Software to DataNode.
Polling Status is also displayed, indicating when the Encore Series Software last contacted the DataNode, when data was last
requested from the DataNode, and when the next poll is scheduled to take place.
Template users may also associate this DataNode with the settings from a template.
Remember to click the Save Setup button found at the bottom of the page to save any changes that have been done. To aid users, a
Save confirmation window appears after changes have been made and when users are about to switch to a different tab.
10.14.2 Communication tab
Properties
Values
Set the active flag to allow communication with the DataNode.
Note: the active flag must be cleared in order to change the other communication settings.
;
Active
A direct network connection is required. Address strings are Internet Protocol (IP) addresses (e.g., 192.168.1.10).
Connection
Address
User name
Password
Local Area Network (LAN)
198.69.18.234
admin
************
enable to activate
communication
between DataNode
and Encore Series
Software
COMMUNICATION parameters for 5560 DataNode include the following:
Active which indicates whether communications between the Encore Series Software and DataNode is enabled. When checked, this
means that the DataNode is actively communicating and exchanging information with the software. When making changes in the different value settings of a DataNode, it is recommended to uncheck the Active box again. Also when adding a new DataNode, the
Active box should be checked last to establish link with the DataNode site. Click on the Home page to see which DataNodes are
actively communicating with the Encore Series.
Connection can be through local area network, Internet, Intranet using 10/100BaseT Ethernet, RS232, RS485.
Address is where the IP information for the specific DataNode is entered. Each 5560 DataNode is shipped from the factory with an IP
Address. This IP Address is entered here.
User name and Password are the name and password for Encore Series to DataNode communications. The password is typically
left at factory default. A wrong IP or password will result in DataNode communication error and users will not be able to access the particular DataNode.
☞
Note
The password entered must match that of the DataNode.
10.14.3 Polling tab
Properties
Values
Polling schedule
Enable scheduled polling
;
Start at
04/01/2008 00:00:00
Repeat every
1
minutes
Repeat units
{minutes, hours, days, weeks, months}
Maximum number of retries
3
Time to wait between retries (minutes)
1
Operations performed at each poll
send settings to the DataNode
When InfoNode and DataNode settings differ
{get settings from the DataNode,
send settings to the DataNode}
Download and store data
;
Operations performed only once at the next poll
Send settings to DataNode
…
Delete data in DataNode
…
Update DataNode firmware
…
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–144
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
POLLING SCHEDULE parameters include Enable scheduled polling, which indicates whether scheduled polling of the DataNode
should take place. When checked, this means that the Encore Series will poll the DataNode for new information according to a defined
schedule. This includes a Start at date and time, a Repeat every numerical value, and Repeat units which can be minutes, hours,
days, weeks, or months. The Maximum number of retries can be specified along with the Time to wait between retries (in minutes).
OPERATIONS PERFORMED AT EACH POLL include
the folowing parameters: When InfoNode and DataNode settings differ allows users to match DataNode setups with those listed in the
Encore Series/InfoNode system when configurations differ and/or communication errors occur; the Download and store data check
box enables the Encore Series to retrieve data stored in the DataNode.
OPERATIONS PERFORMED ONLY ONCE AT THE NEXT POLL include check boxes to enable/disable: Send settings to DataNode use to match DataNode setups with those listed in the Encore Series Software; Delete data in DataNode - use to remove stored data
in the DataNode; and Update DataNode firmware - use to update DataNode firmware with the version stored on the Encore Series
Software.
10.14.4 Basic tab
Properties
PT Primary
PT Secondary
Declared Voltage
Wiring configuration
Compliance Setup
Values
Power System
1.00000000
1.00000000
230
Wye
{Single Phase, Wye, Delta, Split Single Phase}
Custom
{Strict, Custom}
click fields
to display
drop down
menu
For a 5560 DataNode, the Basic page highlights those fields necessary for the DataNode to properly acquire data.
PT Primary allows for setting the primary component of all the transducer ratios. Ratios for all three phases are set when this field is
changed and saved. If the values for the individual phases are different, the phase A setting is displayed. No setup values are changed
unless the user modifies this field and saves the changes. The values being modified here are the same as the individual values on the
Transducers page. For a 5560 DataNode, the default PT Primary value is 1.0 if the Voltage Class is Low and 120.0 if the Voltage class
is Medium (120:1 with 10V nominal input is for monitoring 13kV distribution
voltage).
PT Secondary allows for setting the secondary component of all the transducer ratios. Ratios for all three phases (A, B, C) are set
when this field is changed and saved. If the values for the individual phases are different when using custom setups, the phase A setting is displayed. No setup values are changed unless the user modifies this field and saves the changes. The values being modified
here are the same as the individual values on the Transducers page. The default value is 1.0 in all cases.
Declared Voltage (also known as Nominal Voltage in a 5530 DataNode) is where users specify the nominal input line voltage. For a
5560 DataNode, the default is 230.0 when using Wye configuration. For Delta configuration, Declared Voltage is set to 400 if the Voltage Class is Low and to 11000.0 if the Voltage Class is Medium.
To set Wiring Configuration, click on the value field and a drop down menu lists Single Phase, Wye, Delta and Split Single Phase.
The default wiring configuration is Delta.
Compliance Setup is a drop down selection box containing two entries: Strict EN50160 and Custom EN50160. Compliance setup
determines which pages are visible to the user and therefore which setup fields may be changed. If Strict EN50160 is selected, only the
Identification and Status, Communication, Polling, and Basic pages are displayed. If Custom EN50160 is selected, all Setup pages are
visible. Strict EN50160 compliance setup is the default.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–145
10.14.5 Rms Variations tab
Properties
Values
Limits
A-N Voltage
{Bank selection enables programming limits below}
B-N Voltage
C-N Voltage
N-G Voltage
A-B Voltage
B-C Voltage
C-A Voltage
A Current
B Current
C Current
N Current
Limit enabled
High limit
Low limit
phase-to-neutral or
phase-to-phase
values displayed
here depend upon
the Wiring
Configuration set
under the Basic tab
;
110.0
90.0
units of measure
depend on setting in
Basic tab
Pre- and Post- Event Captures
Pre-event start rms samples (cycles)
2
Post-event start rms samples (cycles)
238
Pre-event start waveform samples (cycles)
2
Post-event start waveform samples (cycles)
6
Post-event end rms samples (cycles)
2
Pre-event end waveform samples (cycles)
6
Post-event end waveform samples (cycles)
2
Cycles in range to end event
1
Rms Variations Sampling Intervals
Number of Rates to Use
3
Intervals
Reduced sampling rate #1
Reduced sampling rate #2
Reduced sampling rate #3
Sample min/max/avg every N cycles
6
Number of seconds to use this rate
6.000000000
RMS stands for root mean square, a mathematical formula used to measure the average voltage and current. Voltage and current
changes are measured and checked against their programmed limits. Thresholds are set in ranges with high limit (threshold above the
programmed limit) and low limit (threshold below the programmed limit). Rms Variations result whenever voltage or current rms value
rises above or fall below the programmed thresholds.
The following properties can be set in the Rms Variations page: Limits, Pre- and Post- Event Captures, Rms Variations Sampling Intervals, and Intervals.
Under LIMITS, letters A, B and C represent each leg or phase of a three-phase system, while letter N represents the neutral conductor.
The channels used to trigger are auto set. High limit and Low limit values can be enabled and programmed individually for each
phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase setting.
To program individual limit values, select the appropriate line that describes the phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase setting that you
wish to change. If the same limit value will be assigned to more than one phase, press Shift + click to select multiple phases. Enter your
limit value for the corresponding phase in the High limit and Low limit fields. Click on the Limit enabled box to activate. Click the Save
Setup button every time you assign different limit values.
PRE- AND POST-EVENT CAPTURES contain parameters that help users program the number of rms and waveform cycles to be
saved before (pre-) and after (post-) the start and the end of the event. These parameters are Pre-event start rms samples, Postevent start rms samples, Pre-event start waveform samples, Post-event start waveform samples, Post-event end rms
samples, Pre-event end waveform samples, and Post-event end waveform samples. The parameters capture rms sample or
rms waveform cycles that may be used to analyze and manage power event patterns and behavior.
With regard to the beginning and end of rms variation events, such transition points are determined according to the following rules. As
per IEC and IEEE standards for multi-phase systems, the beginning of the event occurs when any phase goes outside the limits. The
start of an rms variation event is denoted as the time one or more phases of voltage or current goes outside of the programmed high
or low thresholds. The end of the event is denoted as the time all phase voltages and currents are back within the limits and the number of cycles specified within limits has been satisfied. Disturbance monitoring requires that voltage be continuously sampled, and
recorded only if the signals exceed specified values. Most types of disturbances, with the exception of voltage variations, require that
current be recorded as well.
The user also has the ability to specify how rms trace data is recorded during the event. This mechanism is found under RMS VARIATIONS SAMPLING INTERVALS, where Number of rates to use refer to the number of reduced sampling rate ranges to be used to
record rms variation activities. The sampling data referred to here may be any or all of the three sample rates found under INTERVALS
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–146
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
- Reduced sampling rate #1, Reduced sampling rate #2, and Reduced sampling rate #3. When one of these items is selected,
the reduced sampling rate parameters can be set for that item. Data for the sample rates only apply to rms, not waveform, variations.
The reason behind storing sampling rates is that the memory capacity of the monitoring instrument makes it impractical to record an
entire long duration sag or swell point by point. The waveforms before and after the trigger are digitized to help identify the cause of the
excursion, but only rms values are stored over the full duration of the event that are longer than the pre- and post- trigger settings. If
the event has not ended after a programmed time period, the instrument switches to averaging cycles of rms data to further conserve
memory yet accurately represent event. At this point, the rms plot diverges from a single-valued line to a band of minimum, maximum
and average values. During extremely long events, the instrument switches to successively longer averaging periods explained next.
The sample rates represent three supplemental recording interval or chart speeds defined for recording long events. When recording at
reduced rates, three values are saved for each data point - the minimum, maximum, and average value of the previous interval. The
Sample min/max/avg every N cycles refers to the number of cycles to average for the selected reduced sampling rate. While Number of seconds to use this rate refer to the number of seconds to record at the selected reduced sampling rate.
The following default sequence is used to program reduced sampling rates:
For 60 Hz systems
a. 6 cycle intervals for 8 seconds (80 samples)
b. 30 cycle intervals for 20 seconds (40 samples)
c. 60 cycle intervals for 90 seconds (90 samples)
For 50 Hz systems
a. 5 cycle intervals for 8 seconds (80 samples)
b. 25 cycle intervals for 20 seconds (40 samples)
c. 50 cycle intervals for 90 seconds (90 samples)
10.14.6 Transients tab
Properties
Number of pre-trigger cycles
Number of post-trigger cycles
Values
Cycle Counts
1
2
Individual Channel Parameters
A-N Voltage
B-N Voltage
C-N Voltage
N-G Voltage
A Current
B Current
C Current
N Current
Instantaneous limit enabled
Instantaneous limit
Waveform change limit enabled
Waveform change magnitude limit
Waveform change duration limit (% of cycle)
phase-to-neutral or
phase-to-phase
values displayed
here depend upon
the Wiring
Configuration set
under the Basic tab
;
200.0
;
10.0
10.0
Transients are disturbances which are shorter in duration than sags and swells. There are two basic types of transients: 1) impulsive
transients commonly caused by lightning and load switching, and 2) oscillatory transients often attributed to capacitor bank switching.
The DataNode program has extensive transient recording capabilities for all transient events, using waveshape, instantaneous peak,
and dual positive and negative high frequency peak detectors.
Under CYCLE COUNTS, the user can define a number of cycles of waveform to record prior to the trigger point. This is set under
Number of pre-trigger cycles. Users can also define the number of cycles of waveform to record after the trigger. This value is set
under Number of post-trigger cycles. Typical values for these settings are 1 and 2 respectively.
Under INDIVIDUAL CHANNEL PARAMETERS, letters A, B and C represent different channels, N stands for neutral, while G stands for
ground conductor. The channel values are pre-defined and automatically set depending upon the Wiring Configuration selected under
the Basic tab.
The DataNode program provides configuration variables that specifies how many cycles to record the Rms Instantaneous limit and
Waveform change magnitude limit. These limit values can be enabled and programmed individually for each phase-to-neutral and
phase-to-phase setting.
The instantaneous limit value is compared against the absolute value of each A/D sample of the voltage and current channel waveforms (128 A/D samples taken per cycle). Enter your limit values in the corresponding field for each phase or phase-to-phase setting,
and click the Instantaneous limit enabled box to activate.
Other configuration variables that determine the operation of transient capture capability of the DataNode are the waveform trigger
parameter, instantaneous peak waveform trigger level, and dual peak high frequency detector output trigger level. Values for these
parameters are set under Waveform change magnitude limit and Waveform change duration limit. Limit values can be enabled
and programmed individually for each phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase setting. To activate the waveform limit values, click the
Waveform change limit enabled box.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–147
Trending Tabs
The following tabs are known as trending pages: Metering, Revenue, Demand, Adv. Energy, Adv. Metering, Unbalance, Harmonics,
Flicker, and Adv. Harmonics. These pages contain an enable/disable checkbox at the top of the page. The purpose of the checkbox on
any trending page is to enable trending of properties and values listed on that page. If the box is checked, the settings on that page go
into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect. Trending pages are available only for
Custom EN50160 Compliance Setup. Trending pages are hidden under Strict EN5160 Compliance Setup.
10.14.7 Metering tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Basic Metering (Metering, MMXUO)
;
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Line-Neutral Voltage (A-N)
Line-Neutral Voltage (B-N)
Apparent Power (A)
Line-Neutral Voltage (C-N)
Apparent power (B)
Neutral-Ground Voltage
Apparent Power (C)
Line-Line Voltage (A-B)
Total Apparent Power
Line-Line Voltage (B-C)
Power Factor (A)
Line-Line Voltage (C-A)
Power Factor (B)
Line Current (A)
Power Factor (C)
Line Current (B)
Average Power Factor
Line Current (C)
Angle Between Phases (A)
Line Current (N)
Angle Between Phases (B)
Active Power (A)
Angle Between Phases (C)
Active Power (B)
Frequency
Active Power (C)
Total Active Power
Enable Periodic Sampling
;
High-High limit enabled
…
High-High limit
112.49
High limit enabled
…
High limit
154.16
Low limit enabled
…
Low limit
87.50
Low-Low limit enabled
…
Low-Low limit
75.00
Deadband enabled
…
Deadband
2.50
phase-to-neutral or
phase-to-phase
values displayed
here depend upon
the Wiring
Configuration set
under the Basic tab
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Basic Metering. The box enables the trending of
values listed in Metering page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining
settings are persisted but are not in effect.
Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE, the various phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase parameters are displayed. High and low limits can be enabled and individually set for each phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase value. Note however
that the available phase values depend on the Wiring Configuration selected under the Basic Tab. For instance, for wye circuits L-N, NG and L-L limits can be set. For delta circuits, only L-L limits can be set.
Highlight the phase value parameter you wish to change then check the enable box. Check the threshold enable box and then enter
the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest.
The enable box refers to the Enable periodic sampling parameter. Note that the 5560 DataNode has an internal limit on the number
of variables it can track for the purpose of periodic recording and limit rule evaluation. Indiscriminate selection of parameters should be
avoided.
Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, Low-Low, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit.
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit.
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit.
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit.
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded.
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system and
not programmable by the user. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place.
For example, if a frequency is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the frequency goes from out of limits to
within limits (that is, below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis) then another event is
recorded.
Enabling parameters for periodic sampling make them available in the Real-time tab.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–148
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
10.14.8 Revenue tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Basic Revenue Metering (Revenue, MMTRO)
;
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Phase Energy (A)
Phase Energy (B)
Phase Energy (C)
Total Energy
Integrated Reactive Power (A)
Integrated Reactive Power (B)
Integrated Reactive Power (C)
Total Integrated Reactive Power
Enable periodic sampling
High-High limit enabled
High-High limit
High limit enabled
High limit
Low limit enabled
Low limit
Low-Low limit enabled
Low-Low limit
Deadband enabled
Deadband
…
…
00.0
…
00.0
…
00.0
…
00.0
…
00.0
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Basic Revenue Metering. The box enables the
trending of values listed in Basic Revenue Metering page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not
checked, the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect.
Each of the individual phase-to-neutral and three phase total energy and integrated reactive power values found under SELECT THE
JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE can be enabled.
Highlight the parameter value you wish to change, then check the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box
and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest.
Threshold enable refers to the checkboxes opposite the limits. Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, LowLow, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit.
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit.
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit.
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit.
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded.
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take
place.
For example, if the Total Energy is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the Total Energy goes from out of
limits to within limits (that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis), then the event is
recorded.
Enabling parameters for periodic sampling make them available in the Real-time tab.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–149
10.14.9 Demand tab
Properties
Demand (Demand, MDMDUO)
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
;
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Real Power, Dmd, Total
Reactive Power, Dmd, Total
Apparent Power Dmd, Total
Average PF Over Last Interval
Peak Real Power Dmd Total
Var Dmd Coincident w/Pk W Dmd
VA Dmd Coincident w/Pk W Dmd
Avg PF Coincident w/Pk W Dmd
Peak Reactive Power Dmd, Total
W Dmd Coincident w/Pk Var Dmd
VA Dmd Coincident w/Pk Var Dmd
Avg PF Coincident w/Pk Var DMd
Peak Apparent Power Dmd, Total
W Dmd Coincident w/Pk W Dmd
Var Dmd Coincident w/Pk VA Dmd
Avg PF Coincident w/Pk VA Dmd
Predicted Real Power Dmd, Total
Predicted Reactive Power Dmd, Total
Predicted Apparent Power Dmd, Total
Current Demand (A)
Current Demand (B)
Current Demand (C)
Average Current Demand
Peak Current Demand (A)
Peak Current Demand (B)
Peak Current Demand (C)
Average Peak Current Demand
Enable periodic sampling
High-High limit enabled
High-High limit
High limit enabled
High limit
Low limit enabled
Low limit
Low-Low limit enabled
Low-Low limit
Deadband enabled
Deadband
;
…
1.00
…
0.00
…
0.00
…
0.00
…
0.00
Demand values are computed as the average value over the demand interval, which can be programmed as a different value than the
periodic readings.
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Demand. The box enables the trending of values
listed in Demand page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings
are persisted but are not in effect.
The following parameter values can be enabled under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE: individual phase and
three phase total real power demand, reactive demand, apparent power demand, average PF, and peak real power values.
Highlight the parameter value you wish to change, then check the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box,
and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest.
Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, Low-Low, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit.
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit.
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit.
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit.
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded.
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take
place.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–150
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
For example, if the Real Power Demand is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the Real Power Demand
goes from out of limits to within limits (that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis), then
the event is recorded.
10.14.10 Advanced Energy tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Advanced Energy (Adv. Anergy, MFLOO)
;
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Forward fund. freq. WHrs (A)
Forward fund. freq. WHrs (B)
Forward fund. freq. WHrs (C)
Reverse fund. freq. WHrs (A)
Reverse fund. freq. WHrs (B)
Reverse fund. freq. WHrs (C)
Forward tot. fund. freq. WHrs
Reverse tot. fund. freq. WHrs
Forward fund. freq. VarHrs (A)
Forward fund. freq. VarHrs (B)
Forward fund. freq. VarHrs (C)
Reverse fund. freq. VarHrs (A)
Reverse fund. freq. VarHrs (B)
Reverse fund. freq. VarHrs (C)
Forward tot. fund. freq. VarHrs
Reverse tot. fund. freq. VarHrs
Fundamental freq. VA hours (A)
Fundamental freq. VA hours (B)
Fundamental freq. VA hours (C)
Total fundamental freq. VA hours
Enable periodic sampling
High-High limit enabled
High-High limit
High limit enabled
High limit
Low limit enabled
Low limit
Low-Low limit enabled
Low-Low limit
Deadband enabled
Deadband
…
…
1.00
…
0.00
…
0.00
…
0.00
…
0.00
Journal entries in the Advanced Energy tab show various energy parameters on per phase and total basis as well as in forward and
reverse mode. Fundamental frequency is used as the reference unit. Frequency is specified in hertz. Fundamental frequency refers to
the principal component of a wave, i.e. the component with the lowest frequency or greatest amplitude.
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Advanced Energy. The box enables the trending of
values listed in Advanced Energy page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the
remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect.
Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE, highlight the phase value parameter you wish to change then check
the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all
parameters of interest.
Threshold enable refers to the checkboxes opposite the limits. Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, LowLow, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit.
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit.
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit.
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit.
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded.
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take
place.
For example, if the Total Fundamental Frequency VA hours is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the
Total Fundamental Frequency VA hours goes from out of limits to within limits (that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and
above the low limit plus the hysteresis), then the event is recorded.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–151
10.14.11 Advanced Metering tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Advanced Metering (Adv. Metering, MADVO)
…
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Total VA - Arith. Method
Total VA - Vect. Method
Total Fund. VA - Arith. Method
Total Fund. VA - Vect. Method
Worst True Power Factor
Total Arithmetic True PF
Total Vector True Power Factor
Displacement Power Factor (A)
Displacement Power Factor (B)
Displacement Power Factor (C)
Worst Displacement Power Factor
Average Displacement PF
Total Arithmetic Disp. PF
Total Vector Disp. Power Factor
Residual Current
Net Current
Enable periodic sampling
…
High-High limit enabled
…
High-High limit
1.00
High limit enabled
…
High limit
0.00
Low limit enabled
…
Low limit
0.00
Low-Low limit enabled
…
Low-Low limit
0.00
Deadband enabled
…
Deadband
0.00
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Advanced Metering. The box enables the trending
of values listed in Advanced Metering page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the
remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect.
Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE, multiple total apparent power and power factor parameters, calculated using arithmetic and vector sums of the individual phases, can be enabled. The parameters include: Total Arithmetic VA, Total
Vector VA, Total Fundamental Arithmetic VA, Total Fundamental Vector VA, True Power Factor (PF), Worst True PF, Total Arithmetic True
PF, Total Vector PF, Displacement PF, Worst Displacement PF, Average Displacement PF, Total Arithmetic Displacement PF, Total Vector
PF, Residual Current, and Net Current. Definitions of these terms can be found on Appendix G Glossary.
Highlight the parameter value you wish to change, then check the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box
and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest.
Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-High, High, Low, Low-Low, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit.
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit.
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit.
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit.
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded.
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take
place.
For example, if the Displacement Power Factor is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the Displacement
Power Factor goes from out of limits to within limits (that is, below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the
hysteresis), then the event is recorded.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–152
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
10.14.12 Unbalance tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Unbalance and Sequence Components
;
(Sequence, MSQIO)
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Sequence Voltage (Pos)
Sequence Voltage (Neg)
Sequence Voltage (Zero)
Sequence Current (Pos)
Sequence Current (Neg)
Sequence Current (Zero)
V Imbalance: L-N dev. from avg (A-N)
V Imbalance: L-N dev. from avg (B-N)
V Imbalance: L-N dev. from avg (C-N)
V Imbalance: L-L dev. from avg (A-B)
V Imbalance: L-L dev. from avg (B-C)
V Imbalance: L-L dev. from avg (C-A)
V Imbalance: L-N Max from avg
V Imbalance: L-L Max from avg
V Imbalance: Neg. Seq. Method
V Imbalance: Zero Seq. Method
I Imbalance: dev. from avg (A)
I Imbalance: dev. from avg (B)
I Imbalance: dev. from avg (C)
I Imbalance: Max dev. from avg
I Imbalance: Neg. Seq. Method
I Imbalance: Zero Seq. Method
Enable periodic sampling
;
High-High limit enabled
…
High-High limit
0.00
High limit enabled
…
High limit
0.00
Low limit enabled
…
Low limit
0.00
Low-Low limit enabled
…
Low-Low limit
0.00
Deadband enabled
…
Deadband
0.00
The voltage and current imbalance for each phase from the average value for all three phases can be trended and limits set. The positive, negative and zero sequence components for voltage and current can be trended.
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Imbalance. The box enables the trending of values
listed in Imbalance page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings
are persisted but are not in effect.
Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE, highlight the parameter value you wish to change then check the
Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest.
Threshold enable refers to the checkboxes opposite the limits. Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, LowLow, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit.
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit.
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit.
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit.
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded.
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system.
All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place.
For example, if the Positive Sequence Voltage is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the Positive
Sequence Voltage goes from out of limits to within limits (that is, below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus
the hysteresis), then the event is recorded.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–153
10.14.13 Harmonics tab
Properties
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
Harmonics (MHAIO)
;
Percent Eddy Current Loss
8.000
Maximum Demand Load Current
100.000
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Current THD - RMS Normalized (C)
Voltage THD - Fund. Normalized (A-N)
Current THD - RMS Normalized (N)
Voltage THD - Fund. Normalized (B-N)
Current TID - Fund. Normalized (A)
Voltage THD - Fund. Normalized (C-N)
Current TID - Fund. Normalized (B)
Voltage THD - Fund. Normalized (N-G)
Current TID - Fund. Normalized (C)
Voltage THD - RMS Normalized (A-N)
Current TID - Fund. Normalized (N)
Voltage THD - RMS Normalized (B-N)
Current TID - RMS Normalized (A)
Voltage THD - RMS Normalized (C-N)
Current TID - RMS Normalized (B)
Voltage THD - RMS Normalized (N-G)
Current TID - RMS Normalized (C)
Voltage TID - Fund. Normalized (A-N)
Current TID - RMS Normalized (N)
Voltage TID - Fund. Normalized (B-N)
Current Harmonic RMS (A)
Voltage TID - Fund. Normalized (C-N)
Current Harmonic RMS (B)
Voltage TID - Fund. Normalized (N-G)
Current Harmonic RMS (C)
Voltage TID - RMS Normalized (A-N)
Current Harmonic RMS (N)
Voltage TID - RMS Normalized (B-N)
Current Interharmonic RMS (A)
Voltage TID - RMS Normalized (C-N)
Current Interharmonic RMS (B)
Voltage TID - RMS Normalized (N-G)
Current Interharmonic RMS (C)
Voltage Harmonic RMS (A-N)
Current Interharmonic RMS (N)
Voltage Harmonic RMS (B-N)
IT Product (A)
Voltage Harmonic RMS (C-N)
IT Product (B)
Voltage Harmonic RMS (N-G)
IT Product (C)
Voltage Interharmonic RMS (A-N)
IT Product (N)
Voltage Interharmonic RMS (B-N)
Current Crest Factor (A)
Voltage Interharmonic RMS (C-N)
Current Crest Factor (B)
Voltage Interharmonic RMS (N-G)
Current Crest Factor (C)
Voltage TIF - Fund. Normalized (A-N)
Current Crest Factor (N)
Voltage TIF - Fund. Normalized (B-N)
Current Total Demand Distortion (A)
Voltage TIF - Fund. Normalized (C-N)
Current Total Demand Distortion (B)
Voltage TIF - Fund. Normalized (N-G)
Current Total Demand Distortion (C)
Voltage TIF - RMS Normalized (A-N)
K Factor (A)
Voltage TIF - RMS Normalized (B-N)
K Factor (B)
Voltage TIF - RMS Normalized (C-N)
K Factor (C)
Voltage TIF - RMS Normalized (N-G)
K Factor (N)
Voltage Crest Factor (A-N)
Transformer Derating Factor (A)
Voltage Crest Factor (B-N)
Transformer Derating Factor (B)
Voltage Crest Factor (C-N)
Transformer Derating Factor (C)
Voltage Crest Factor (N-G)
Total Phase Harmonic Power (A-N)
Current THD - Fund. Normalized (A)
Total Phase Harmonic Power (B-N)
Current THD - Fund. Normalized (B)
Total Phase Harmonic Power (C-N)
Current THD - Fund. Normalized (C)
Signed Phase Harmonic Power (A-N)
Current THD - Fund. Normalized (N)
Signed Phase Harmonic Power (B-N)
Current THD - RMS Normalized (A)
Signed Phase Harmonic Power (C-N)
Current THD - RMS Normalized (B)
Enable periodic sampling
;
High-High limit enabled
…
High-High limit
0.000
High limit enabled
…
High limit
0.000
Low limit enabled
…
Low limit
0.000
Low-Low limit enabled
…
Low-Low limit
0.000
Deadband enabled
…
Deadband
0.000
Harmonics are waveform distortion, a steady-state deviation from an ideal power frequency sinusoid and is characterized by the spectral content of the waveform. Many non-linear devices such as battery chargers, switching power supplies or transformers inject currents at harmonic (integer multiples of the fundamental) frequencies into the system.
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Harmonics. The box enables the trending of values
listed in Harmonics page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings
are persisted but are not in effect.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–154
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Under SELECT JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE, various harmonic parameters can be trended using periodic readings that
are stored in a journal. Harmonic distortion of voltage or current is calculated through a Fourier transformation of the waveform into harmonic magnitudes and phase angle spectra. These spectra are used to determine figures of merit such as total harmonic distortion
(THD) and telephone influence factor (TIF). (See chapter APPENDIX A. Quantities Calculated from Periodic Voltage and Current Measurements on page 203)
The Encore Series Software/DataNode system allows simultaneous measurements of voltage and current so that harmonic power flow
can be obtained. Depending on value parameters set, the program can record a sampling of the waveform synchronized to the fundamental frequency, to ensure accurate calculation of harmonic phase angles. The sampling rate is sufficient to determine up to the 50th
harmonic or better. A comprehensive range of high and low limits can be enabled and individually set for each measured parameter.
Highlight the value parameter you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box
and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest.
Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, Low-Low, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit.
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit.
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit.
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit.
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded.
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take
place.
For example, if the Voltage Harmonic rms is detected to cross the threshold limit, then an event is recorded. If the Voltage Harmonic
rms goes from out of limits to within limits (that is, below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis),
then the event is recorded. All activated Harmonic parameters and value settings defined can be viewed under the Real-time tab.
10.14.14 Flicker tab
Properties
Flicker (Flicker, MFLKO)
Pst Sample Interval
Plt Sample Interval
Values
Enable Trending (This page)
;
Sample Intervals (minutes)
10
180
Select the journal entry/entries to change
Pst of last complete interval (A)
Pst of last complete interval (B)
Pst of last complete interval (C)
Plt of last complete interval (A)
Plt of last complete interval (B)
Plt of last complete interval (C)
Sliding window Plt calculation (A)
Sliding window Plt calculation (B)
Sliding window Plt calculation (C)
Output 5-Pinst-peak value (A)
Output 5-Pinst-peak value (B)
Output 5-Pinst-peak value (C)
Output 4-1 min TC LPF of Pinst (A)
Output 4-1 min TC LPF of Pinst (B)
Output 4-1 min TC LPF of Pinst (C)
Output 3-square root of Pinst (A)
Output 3-square root of Pinst (B)
Output 3-square root of Pinst (C)
LPF of Output 3 (A)
LPF of Output 3 (B)
LPF of Output 3 (C)
Enable periodic sampling
High-High limit enabled
High-High limit
High limit enabled
High limit
Low limit enabled
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
;
…
0.00
…
0.00
…
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–155
Properties
Values
Low limit
0.00
Low-Low limit enabled
…
Low-Low limit
0.00
Deadband enabled
…
Deadband
0.00
The Flicker page is an extended trending setup page unique to the 5560 DataNode. There are three flicker values available for trending:
the Short term flicker or Pst, the long term flicker or Plt, and Plt calculated on a sliding window. Flicker is measured as per
IEC 1000-4-15.
Under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE) is a checkbox in the value field opposite Flicker which enables the trending of values listed in
this page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings are persisted
but are not in effect.
Under SAMPLE INTERVALS are two numeric edit controls: the Pst Sample Interval and the Plt Sample Interval. Pst Interval is used
to set the Pst calculation interval. The default value is 10 minutes. Plt interval is used to set the Plt calculation interval. The default value
is 120 minutes.
Under SELECT JOURNAL ENTRY/ENTRIES TO CHANGE, various flicker parameters can be trended using periodic readings that are
stored in a journal.
Highlight the value parameter you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box. Check the threshold enable box
and then enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest.
Threshold enable refers to the checkboxes opposite the limits. Each parameter has five threshold limits: High-high, High, Low, LowLow, and Deadband.
High-High limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit.
High limit - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit.
Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit.
Low-Low limit - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit.
Deadband limit - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded.
The High-High must be greater than High, Low-Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system. All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take
place.
10.14.15 Advanced Harmonics tab
Properties
Enable Trending (This page)
Advanced Harmonics (Individual, MHAIO)
;
Trend harmonics for phase A
;
Trend harmonics for phase B
;
Trend harmonics for phase C
;
Harmonics to Trend
Phase Voltages
2-25
Neutral Voltages
Phase Currents
Neutral Current
Interharmonics to Trend
Phase Voltages
2-25
Neutral Voltages
Phase Currents
Neutral Current
Values
sample
Harmonic
values to trend
sample
Interharmonic
values to trend
The following parameters are found under ENABLE TRENDING (THIS PAGE): Advanced harmonics (Individual) and Trend harmonics for phases A, B and C. Opposite these parameters are checkboxes which enable the trending of values listed in Advanced
harmonics page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect.
Voltage and current harmonics for each phase and neutral channel can be trended under HARMONICS TO TREND. Similarly, voltage
and current interharmonics for each phase and neutral channel can also be trended under INTERHARMONICS TO TREND. The value
fields are left blank to allow the users to choose the numbers or the range of harmonic frequencies to trend.
Numbers can be entered individually with commas separating the numbers, or a range of harmonics can be specified using a dash
between lower and upper values. Also, the suffix ‘o’ or ‘e’ can be used to specify only the odd or even harmonics, respectively, in a
given range.
Resulting individual harmonic sampling and graphs can be seen in the Smart Trends folder under the Views tab.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–156
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
10.14.16 Transducers tab
Properties
Phase rotation
Phase A voltage
Phase A current
Phase B voltage
Phase B current
Phase C voltage
Phase C current
Neutral voltage
Neutral current
Signal is connected to
Channel is inverted
Values
Normal (counter clockwise)
{Normal (counter clockwise), Reverse (clockwise)}
Channel Mapping
Channel 1
…
Transducer Ratios
Phase A-N VT
Phase B-N VT
Phase C-N VT
Neutral VT
Phase A CT
Phase B CT
Phase C CT
Neutral CT
Phase A-B VT
Phase B-C VT
Phase C-A VT
Transducer Primary
Transducer Secondary
Magnitude correction
Phase correction
DC offset
phase-to-neutral or
phase-to-phase
values displayed
depend upon the
Wiring Configuration
set under the Basic
tab
1.00000000
1.00000000
1.00000000
0.00000000
0.00000000
Transducers are typically PTs (potential transformers) and CTs (current transformers) that are used to interface the instrument to the
power circuit. PTs allow the instrument to measure circuits that are not within the measurement range of the instrument. CTs measure
the current of the circuit and convert it to within the measurement range of the instrument.
For Phase rotation, users can choose whether to have phasor shift clockwise or counterclockwise, depending on the way they have
set up their system. Click the value field to display the drop down menu featuring Normal (counter clockwise) or Reverse (clockwise).
Either orientation will yield the same mathematical calculations of voltage and current measurements. The 5560 is able to automatically
determine phase rotation of the voltage channels and then match up the current channels. The 5560 DataNode will swap voltage
phases to ensure positive sequence phase rotation (counter clockwise according to IEEE definitions) and then swap and invert current
channels to match.
Channel mapping is used to correct for errors in wiring the instrument to the circuit. If a mistake is made, such as an inverted CT or a
phase is connected to the wrong channel, it can be corrected in software instead of changing the wiring to the instrument. Note that it
is recommended that the actual wiring be changed but channel mapping can correct the problem if this is not practical.
A channel-mapping array is provided to permit manual configuration of channel swapping and inversion. Under CHANNEL MAPPING,
click on the corresponding voltage or current phase to show which channel the Signal is connected to. Click and enable the value
field opposite Channel is inverted to as it applies.
The channel-mapping array works by specifying a numeric code in each array slot that indicates which phase is connected to the
physical 5560 DataNode channel.
Normally, the channels and phases are matched as shown below. Channels can be swapped and/or inverted to correct recurring mistakes.
Voltage Phase A
Voltage Phase B
Voltage Phase C
Voltage Neutral
Current Phase A
Current Phase B
Current Phase C
Current Neutral
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–157
The DataNode employs two A/D converters to sample the voltage and current channels for a given phase simultaneously. Measurement errors may result if the voltage and current signals are not correctly paired.
Under TRANSDUCER RATIOS, users can set values for the Transducer Primary and Transducer Secondary. Values to account for
any voltage or current transformers can be entered for each input channel. The primary and secondary values are entered. For example, if the primary voltage is 2400 volts and the secondary voltage is 120 volts, then those values should be entered. This gives an
effective 20:1 reduction in voltage. When the input voltage to the DataNode is 120V, the displayed value will be 2400 volts. The Phase
correction and DC offset values are not programmable.
10.14.17 Advanced tab
Properties
Values
Cross Triggering
Broadcast Group ID
1234
Enable sending rms trigger
…
Enable responding to received rms trigger
…
Enbable sending transient trigger
…
Enable responding to received transient trigger
…
Broadcast address - if empty, uses local
Passwords
User Account Password
*************
Admin Account Password
*************
InfoNode Access User ID
admin
InfoNode Access Password
*************
Firmware Access User ID
admin
Firmware Access Password
*************
One Time Operations
Reset 302 Default Setup
…
Clear 332 Database and reboot
…
Don't save data from next download
…
Clear last journal ID
…
One Time Firmware Operations
CAUTION: These operations will copy new firmware to the DataNode
Load IOP (302) firmware
…
Load ACP (332) firmware
…
Load both IOP (302) and ACP (332) firmware
…
Load both to all DataNodes
…
click to display drop
down menu
Parameters under the Advanced tab allow the administrator or user to set up functions that affect communications, information access
and download between the Encore Series Software and DataNode systems.
The 5560 can be configured to issue a UDP cross-trigger broadcast message when rms variation and/or transient event occurs. The
5560 can also be configured to listen for such messages and cause rms variation or transient recording to occur regardless of whether
or not its own trigger conditions for that instrument were met. Under CROSS TRIGGERING, a Broadcast Group ID is assigned to
allow for different groups of cross-trigger senders/recipients. The broadcast ID number in the Encore Series must match thebroadcast
group ID set under the TCP/IP parameter of the DataNode. The DataNode also uses this ID mechanism for multiple DataNode cross
triggering and is guaranteed only on an un-routed network. The group ID is sent along with the broadcast message and only those
receivers with the same group ID will respond to the broadcast if so enabled. The broadcast address can be specified to send a broadcast to a directed address other than the local network if desired, but results cannot be guaranteed and data may be lost if the message takes too long to arrive at its destination.
Checkboxes are seen opposite the next four items Enable sending rms trigger, Enable responding to received rms trigger,
Enable sending transient trigger, Enable responding to received transient trigger. The user specifies which event types are
generated and/or listened for through these checkboxes.When said parameters are activated, the system in effect utilizes trigger messages as trip signals. If Broadcast address is empty, message broadcast is routed through the local network. The user specifies a
group ID and optionally a broadcast address.
Access privileges are determined under PASSWORDS. The passwords entered in the Encore Series system must match the ones
stored under the Password section of the DataNode. Otherwise, access to information may be denied. The User Account Password
and Admin Account Password refer to two different user categories. An Admin User can create and add an account for a new Basic
User. Both Admin and Basic users can assign properties such as their own user name and password. Refer to the Users section on
chapter 7 Setup Page on page 45 for more details on this.
The default Encore Series Access User ID is 'admin'. This has a matching valid Encore Series Access Password. The default
password is ‘password’. These parameters allow access to view and change information in the Encore Series system. The default
Firmware Access User ID is 'admin'. This also has a matching valid Firmware Access Password. These parameters allow access
to view and change information in the DataNode system. To change passwords, simply click on the Password value fields. A confirmation window appears everytime you click on the password value field. The window asks whether you want to change and save a new
password.
Parameters are also available for ONE TIME OPERATIONS on the 5560 DataNode. These one time procedures include configuring the
DataNode to its default settings and/or clearing memory space by rebooting. Observe caution in undertaking these procedures since
they cannot be undone. To return to the default DataNode settings, activate the Reset 302 default setup value field. To clear old data
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–158
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
and reboot DataNode, activate the Clear 332 Database and reboot value field. To save memory space, the administrator or user may
choose to activate Don't save data from next download. To discard the most recent journal ID entries, activate the Clear last journal ID value field.
Finally, parameters for downloading new or updated firmware are available under ONE TIME FIRMWARE OPERATIONS. A firmware is
a program or instruction stored in Flash memory which implements the communications interface and data acquisition between the
outside world and the instrument. Based on the parameters available, the administrator or user can activate value fields to Load IOP
firmware or to Load ACP firmware or to Load both IOP and ACP firmware. The IOP and ACP firmware are two different sets of
firmware. The IOP communicates directly with the Encore Series, while the ACP is comprised of the host CPU and DSP. If the value
fields are activated, new firmware is downloaded on demand from Encore Series to DataNode. New firmware is downloaded automatically if the boot ROM finds that the existing firmware in the DataNode is missing or corrupt. The administrator or user also has the
option to Load Both (IOP and ACP) firmware to all DataNodes. Download is accomplished using the standard Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP). The DataNode must be connected to the network where the updates are to be extracted from to ensure a successful download. Since these one time operations cannot be undone, observe caution when performing download firmware procedures.
10.14.18 Accumulator Resets tab
Properties
Values
Demand Resets
Reset Real Power, DMD, total (Never reset)
…
Reset Reactive Power, DMD, total (Never reset)
…
Reset Apparent Power, DMD, total (Never reset)
…
Reset Peak Current Demand (A) (Never reset)
…
Reset Peak Current Demand (B) (Never reset)
…
Reset Peak Current Demand (C) (Never reset)
…
Reset Peak Current Demand (N) (Never reset)
…
Reset Average Peak Current Demand (Never reset)
…
Reset All Values
…
Energy Accumulators
Reset Phase Energy (Never reset)
…
Reset Total Energy (Never reset)
…
Reset Integrated Reactive Power (Never reset)
…
Reset Total integrated Reactive Power (Never reset)
…
Reset Forward fund. freq. WHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Reverse fund. freq. WHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Forward tot. fund. freq. WHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Reverse tot. fund. freq. WHrs (Never
…
Reset Forward fund. freq. VarHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Reverse fund. freq. VarHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Forward tot. fund. freq. VarHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Reverse tot. fund. freq. VarHrs (Never reset)
…
Reset Fundamental freq. V A Hours (Never reset)
…
Reset Total Fund. freq. VA Hours (Never reset)
…
In connection with electric utility billing practices, the Encore Series Software and DataNode system has an interface to reset demand
and energy accumulation readings. The Accumulator Resets tab allows one to reset the parameters to defined values, but not to
change or configure new values. The notation 'Never reset' appears to mean that the parameter values register original readings and
have never been reset at any time. The moment the reset parameter is activated/enabled, the notation will change and will reflect the
date and time of last reset.
Under DEMAND RESETS, Real or True Phase power demand, Reactive power demand, and Apparent power demand can be reset.
See chapter APPENDIX G. Glossary on page 218 for the definitions of the various power parameter values. The system maintains a
running maximum known as "peak demand" on per phase basis and per average demand current value. It also stores the date and
time of each peak demand. Peak demand is the maximum electrical power load consumed or produced in a defined period of time.
Under ENERGY ACCUMULATORS, the system calculates and stores accumulated values for energy (in kWHr unit), reactive energy (in
kVarH unit), and apparent energy (in kVAH unit). Kilowatt-Hour (kWHr) is the equivalent energy supplied by a power of 1000 watts for
one hour. Watt is the unit for real power. Kilovar-hour (kVarH) is equal to 1000 reactive volt-ampere hours. Var is an abbreviation for volt
ampere reactive. It measures the integral of the reactive power of the circuit into which the instrument is connected. Var is the unit for
reactive power. Kilovolt-ampere (kVA) is equivalent to 1000 volt-amperes. VA is the unit for apparent power. Apparent power is the
product of voltage and current of a single-phase circuit in which the two reach their peaks at different times. See chapter APPENDIX G.
Glossary on page 218 for the definitions of the various power parameter values.
The accumulated energy values include real power factor (average three-phase) which is mathematically defined as "demand kW/
demand kVA". It also displays integrated and total integrated reactive power. The system also calculates and stores apparent energy
(VA). Real Power (W) and Apparent Power (VA) are reset together; you cannot reset one without resetting the other. Likewise, the Watthour Meter and Varhour Meter are reset together.
The system uses the fundamental frequency as reference for calculating energy values in one of two modes: forward or reverse. In forward mode, the circuit monitor considers the direction of power flow, allowing the accumulated energy magnitude to both increase and
decrease. In reverse mode, the circuit monitor accumulates energy as positive, regardless of the direction of power flow. In other
words, the energy value increases, even during reverse power flow. The default accumulation mode is reverse.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–159
10.15
EN50160 Compliance Default Trending Setup
PARAMETERS
Total Fund Freq Q
Fund Freq VA Hrs
Fwd Fund Freq varHrs
Fwd Fund. Freq WHrs
Rvs Fund Freq varHrs
Rvs. Fund. Freq. WHrs
Rms Current Individual Harmonics
Rms Voltage Individual Harmonics
Arith. Sum PF
Arithmetic Sum DF
Arithmetic Sum VA
Displacement Power Factor
Fund Arithmetic Sum VA
Fund Vector Sum VA
Vector Sum DF
Vector Sum PF
Vector Sum VA
Residual Current
Net Current
Active Power Demand
Apparent Power Demand
Avg PF @ Peak P Dmd
Avg PF @ Peak Q Dmd
P Dmd @ Peak Q Dmd
P Dmd @ Peak S Dmd
Peak Active Power Demand
Peak Apparent Power Demand
Peak Demand Current
Peak Reactive Power Demand
PF @ Peak VA Dmd
PF Demand
Predicted P Dmd
Predicted Q Dmd
Predicted VA Dmd
Q Dmd @ Peak P Dmd
Q Dmd @ Peak VA Dmd
Reactive Power Demand
Rms Current Demand
VA Dmd @ Peak P Dmd
VA Dmd @ Peak Q Dmd
ANSI Transformer Derating Factor
Current Crest Factor
Current THD
Current THD (Rms)
Current TID
Current TID (Rms)
Harmonic Power
HRms Voltage
IEEE 519 Current TDD
Interharmonic Rms Current
Interharmonic Rms Voltage
IT Product
Rms Harmonic Current
Transformer K Factor
Voltage Crest Factor
Voltage THD
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–160
TAB WHERE FOUND
ADV. ENERGY
ADV. ENERGY
ADV. ENERGY
ADV. ENERGY
ADV. ENERGY
ADV. ENERGY
ADV. HARMONICS
ADV. HARMONICS
ADV. METER
ADV. METER
ADV. METER
ADV. METER
ADV. METER
ADV. METER
ADV. METER
ADV. METER
ADV. METER
ADV. METER
ADV. METER
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
DEMAND
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
STATUS
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
DEFAULT VALUES & COMMENTS
2-25 for Va,Vb,Vc. Limits per table.
is TOTAL only
is TOTAL only
is TOTAL only
A,B,C,TOT. no limits
2/3 thru 24/25, Va,Vb, Vc. Limits per table.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
PARAMETERS
Voltage THD (Rms)
Voltage TID
Voltage TID (Rms)
Voltage TIF
Voltage TIF (Rms)
V RMS Harmonic
I Imbalance (rms/rms avg)
I Imbalance (S0/S1)
I Imbalance (S2/S1)
Negative Sequence Current
Negative Sequence Voltage
Positive Sequence Current
Positive Sequence Voltage
V Imbalance (rms/rms avg)
V Imbalance (S0/S1)
V Imbalance (S2/S1)
Zero Sequence Current
Zero Sequence Voltage
Active Power
Apparent Power
Frequency
Reactive Power Demand
V/I Angle
True Power Factor
Var Hours
Watt Hours
Rms Current
TAB WHERE FOUND
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
HARMONICS
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
UNBALANCE
METER
METER
METER
METER
METER
METER, ADV. METER
REVENUE
REVENUE
RMS VARIATION, TRANSIENTS, METER
STATUS
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Rms Voltage
RMS VARIATION
ON
Transient Voltage
TRANSIENTS
ON
Rms Voltage
METER
ON
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
DEFAULT VALUES & COMMENTS
Is TOTAL only. No limit
Is TOTAL only. No limit
Is TOTAL only. Limits per table.
Is TOTAL only. No limit
Is TOTAL only. Limits per table.
Total, no limits.
For Va, Vb, Vc: Low and High to 90 and
110%. All related values per 5530 defaults.
For Va, Vb, Vc: Waveshape 10%/10%; Crest
set to 200%.
For Va, Vb, Vc : H-Hi to 150%; Hi to 115%;
Lo to 85%; Lo-Lo to 1%, Deadband off.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–161
11
5571 DataNode Setup
11.1
5571/5571S DataNode Setup
Refer to the DataNode 5571/5571S User's Guide for more detailed information about connections and setups.
A 5571S DataNode
11.2
Template and DataNode Tabs
The General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes (chapter 7.3 General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes through the Encore Series
Software Setup Page on page 79) and Using the Template Function in DataNode Setup (chapter 7.4 Using the Template Function in
DataNode Setup on page 82) provide important background information for DataNode setup. Read these sections before continuing
on with the discussion below.
Template Setup tabs - All tabs except Template are the same as that of its associated DataNode tabs. From the Template setup tab
shown below, you can set the name and description of the template. This tab also contains a list of all of the DataNodes of the same
type as the template. Each DataNode in the list has a checkbox that indicates if the template is associated with the respective DataNode. When you associate a template with a DataNode, all of the setup values from the template are copied to the DataNode's setup
values. Thereafter, any change that you make to the template is copied to all of the DataNodes associated with the template.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–162
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
DataNode Setup tabs - All setup parameters except for those on the Identification and Status, Communication, and Polling tabs are
part of the template. The setup values on these tabs (e.g. DataNode name, IPaddress, polling rate, etc.) are not affected by the
changes to Templates.
11.3
Programming Standard Tabs
LEGEND (Please note the following conventions used in the screen displays):
Items in gray textare not programmable, but included for information purpose to the user.
Items in bold are examples of what can be entered.
Selections available in drop down menu are enclosed in brackets { xxxx }.
!
Caution!
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH has already set default values for the various parameters in each DataNode. The default values
have been tested to result in optimal system performance. Users are advised not to change the default value settings unless
there are applications which require advanced setups.
11.3.1
Identification and Status tab
Properties
Name
Description
Serial Number
Version
Health
Communication status
Last poll at
Next poll at
Values
Polling schedule
Edison 5571
7100UA53
4H
Status Information
System health is normal
Idle
03/28/2006 23:06:05
03/28/2006 23:07:00
Use the settings below to associate this DataNode with a template. Note: selecting a template causes all DataNode specific settings to be updated to
those of the template; however, the DataNode’s settings can be changed after a template is applied.
Template
5571 Template
{None, 5571 Template}
The Identification and Status tab contains identification and health status description of the DataNode.
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION includes the Name and Description which users can assign for a particular DataNode type. Simply
click on the Name or Description value field and the cursor is set for users to type in the space provided. Description typically
describes the place where the DataNode hardware is located. Users are allowed to enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters under the
Name and Description fields. The Serial Number and Version of the DataNode hardware are automatically set by default. This instrument-specific information is available only for viewing and cannot be altered or changed from the Encore Series Software.
STATUS INFORMATION properties includes Health status, whether the DataNode system is functioning normally or not. It also
includes status of Encore Series Software to DataNode Communications.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–163
Polling Status is also displayed, indicating when the Encore Series Software last requested data from the DataNode and when the
next poll is scheduled to take place.
Template users may also associate this DataNode with the settings from a template.
Remember to click the Save Setup button found at the bottom of the page to save any changes that have been done. To aid users, a
Save confirmation window appears afterchanges have been made and when users are about to switch to a different tab.
11.3.2
Communication tab
Properties
Values
Set the active flag to allow communication with the DataNode. Note: the active flag must be cleared in order to change the other communication settings.
;
Active
Direct and dialup serial connections are supported. Address strings are of the form DIAL/ID where DIAL is the phone number (ignored for direct connections) and ID is the unit id number (0-99).
Connection
Address
COM1
/1
COMMUNICATION parameters for 5571 DataNode include the following:
Active which indicates whether communications between the Encore Series Software and DataNode is enabled. When checked, this
means that the DataNode is actively communicating and exchanging information with the software. When making changes in the different value settings of a DataNode, it is recommended to uncheck the Active box again. Also when adding a new DataNode, the
Active box should be checked last to establish link with the DataNode site. Click on the Home page to see which DataNodes are
actively communicating with the Encore Series Software.
Connection can be through Serial Port COM 1 thru COM 255 (Hardware or Virtual ports) or Modem as installed and recognized by the
Windows operating system.
Address must be a unique address between 1 and 99 for each DataNode. However, if only one DataNode is connected to the COM
port and the present address is unknown, zero (0) can be used. If the connection is via Modem as opposed to Serial Port, then the
telephone number would be entered before the “/” separating the device address.
11.3.3
Polling tab
Properties
Values
Polling schedule
Enable scheduled polling
;
Start at
01/01/2006 00:00:00
Repeat every
1
minutes
Repeat units
{minutes, hours, days, weeks, months}
Maximum number of retries
3
Time to wait between retries (minutes)
1
Operations performed at each poll
Download and store data
;
Operations performed only once at the next poll
Send settings to DataNode
…
Delete data in DataNode
…
Update DataNode firmware
…
POLLING SCHEDULE parameters include Enable scheduled polling, which indicates whether scheduled polling of the DataNode
should take place. When checked, this means that the Encore Series will poll the DataNode for new information according to a defined
schedule. This includes a Start at date and time, a Repeat every numerical value, and Repeat units which can be minutes, hours,
days, weeks, or months. The Maximum number of retries can be specified along with the Time to wait between retries (in minutes).
OPERATIONS PERFORMED AT EACH POLL include a Download and store data check box to enable the Encore Series to retrieve
data stored in the DataNode.
OPERATIONS PERFORMED ONLY ONCE AT THE NEXT POLL include check boxes to enable/disable: Send settings to DataNode use to match DataNode setups with those listed in the Encore Series; Delete data in DataNode - use to remove stored data in the
DataNode; and Update DataNode firmware - use to update DataNode firmware with the version stored on the Encore Series.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–164
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
11.3.4
Basic tab
Properties
Display thresholds as:
Low Neutral Range
Power Type
Input Frequency (Hz.)
Base Voltage (Vrms)
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Values
Display
Percent
{Volts, Per Unit, Percent}
Input
…
Three Phase Wye
{Single Phase, Split Single Phase, Three Phase Wye,
Three Phase Delta}
60
{50, 60}
208.0
Voltage A - Transformer Ratios
1.000
1.000
Current A - Transformer Ratios
1.000
1.000
Voltage B - Transformer Ratios
1.000
1.000
Current B - Transformer Ratios
1.000
1.000
Voltage C - Transformer Ratios
1.000
1.000
Current C - Transformer Ratios
1.000
1.000
Voltage N - Transformer Ratios
1.000
1.000
Current N - Transformer Ratios
1.000
1.000
BASIC Setup contains data on Display, Input, and Registers.
DISPLAY parameters include:
• Display Thresholds as: to display parameters in either volts, percent, or PU (per unit)
INPUTS parameters include:
• Low Neutral Range: check box to enable Low Range on Neutral Voltage Channel
• Power Type: sets the wiring configuration to either single phase, split phase, 3 phase delta, 3 phase wye
• Input Frequency (Hz): either 50 or 60 Hz
• Base Voltage: needed if using percent or per unit
TRANSFORMER RATIOS include:
• PT Ratios: if the voltage inputs are connected to an external PT, enter the primary and secondary values
• CT Ratios: if the current inputs are connected to an external CT, enter the primary and secondary values
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–165
11.3.5
Memory tab
Properties
Enabled
Memory allocated (%)
Cycles Before
Cycles After
Enabled
Memory allocated (%)
Cycles Per Sample
Max. Event Duration (samples)
Cycles To Trigger
Cycles To End
Enabled
Memory allocated (%)
Cycles Before
Cycles After
Enabled
Memory allocated (%)
Interval (sec.)
Enabled
Memory allocated (%)
Interval (sec.)
Enabled
Memory allocated (%)
Demand Interval (min.)
Sliding Interval (min.)
Values
Waveform Changes
;
10
1
4
Rms Events
;
46
1
512
1
1
Impulses
;
4
1
1
Snapshots
;
9
10860
Timeline
;
19
900
Demand Report
;
12
15
{1, 5, 15, 30, 60}
15
{1, 5, 15, 30, 60}
MEMORY Setup allocated memory along with number of cycles captured to different types of events.
WAVEFORM CHANGES parameters include:
• Enabled: Waveshape (distortion) enabled check box
• Cycles Before: number of cycles before (typically 1)
• Cycles After: number of cycles after (typically 4)
RMS EVENTS parameters include:
• Enabled: RMS variation enabled check box
• Cycles per Sample: cycles per measurement sample (typically 1)
• Max. Event Duration (samples): maximum event duration (typ. 512)
• Cycles to Trigger: cycles to trigger (typ. 1)
• Cycles to End: cycles to end (typ. 1)
IMPULSES parameters include:
• Enabled: Impulses (transients) enabled check box
• Cycles Before: cycles before (typ. 1)
• Cycles After: cycles after (typ. 1)
SNAPSHOTS parameters include:
• Enabled: Snapshot (waveforms) enabled check box
• Interval (sec.): interval between recording in seconds (typ. 10860)
TIMELINE parameters include:
• Enabled: Timeline (steady state min/max/avg) enabled check box
• Interval (sec.): interval between recording in seconds (typ. 900)
DEMAND REPORT parameters include:
• Enabled: Demand report (power) check box enabled
• Demand Interval (min.): demand interval in minutes (typ. 15)
• Sliding Interval (min.): sliding demand interval in minutes (typ. 15)
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–166
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
11.3.6
Thresholds tab
Properties
Voltage (Percent)
Duration (% of cycle)
Swell (Percent)
Sag (Percent)
Swell (Percent)
Sag (Percent)
Swell (Percent)
Sag (Percent)
Swell (Percent)
Peak Voltage (Vpk)
Values
Waveform Changes
5.7
10
Rms Events
Rms Event - Voltage A
66.3
51.9
Rms Event - Voltage B
63.4
51.9
Rms Event - Voltage C
63.4
51.9
Rms Event - Voltage N
110.0
Impulses
200.0
Thresholds Setup provides you with the ability to set limits for triggering of various parameters. Values entered are based on the display
settings under the Basic tab (volts, percent, or per unit).
WAVEFORM CHANGES parameters include:
• Voltage: waveshape faults voltage variation from previous cycle (typ 8%)
• Duration: duration or window over which to compare against in % of cycle (typ. 10)
RMSEVENTS parameters include Rms Events on per phase basis:
• Swell (hi limit, typically 110%)
• Sag (low limit typically 90%)
IMPULSES parameter consists of:
• Peak Voltage (Vpk): Impulse in volts peak (typ. 200)
11.3.7
Advanced tab
Properties
New Device Address
UPS Duration (sec.)
Showing check sum error?
Send cal. on next connect?
5571 GPS option installed?
Values
1
300
…
…
…
Advanced Setup provides you with the ability to set limits to setup other functions such as UPS time, not previously described.
• New Device Address: must be a unique address between 1 and 99 for each DataNode. If more than one DataNode is to
be connected on the same port, they should be added one at a time. Trying to connect to multiple units with the default
address of 1 would not be succcessful.
• UPS Duration (sec.): typ 300
• Showing check sum error?: check box to enable such in log
• Send calibration on next connect?: check box to enable such from DataNode to Encore Series Software
• 5571 GPS option installed? check box for response if true
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–167
12
Mavosys 10 Digital DataNode Setup
This chapter shows the procedures on how to set up the Mavosys 10 Digital Input DataNode. It covers the followingtopics:
Overview
Template and DataNode Tabs
Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear
Programming the Tabs
12.1
Overview
The 61MDIS (Mavosys 10 series, module, digital, input, screw terminals) is an eight channel, digital input module, providing the user
with the capability to monitor on/off-type digital signals, such as breaker or switch position indicators. The functionality of the inputs
can be configured on a channel basis to also provide pulse counting, KYZ metering, or start/stop monitoring control.
The Meter screens will report the present state of the inputs. Trends and Events timeplots will indicate the signal level at either 1 or 0
state at the time of data storage, as will waveform data. There is no min/max/average value, just the instantaneous value.
12.2
Template and DataNode Tabs
The General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes (chapter 7.3 General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes through the Encore Series
Software Setup Page on page 79) and Using the Template Function in DataNode Setup (chapter 7.4 Using the Template Function in
DataNode Setup on page 82) provide important background information for DataNode setup. Read these sections before continuing
on with the discussion below.
Below is a list of the various Mavosys 10 Digital Template and Digital DataNode tabs available and the programmable setups found in
each tab. Template settings look and work just like actual DataNode settings. The Input Configuration setup parameters are part of the
template. While setup values on other non-template tabs (e.g. DataNode name, IP address, polling rate, etc.) are not affected by
changes to the Templates.
Template tab (available in Template setup only) - features template Name and Description, and allows users to select which DataNode
to associate with the template settings.
Identification and Status tab (available in DataNode setup only) - features Identification and Status information of a specific DataNode, Polling status, and Template selection.
Communication tab (available in DataNode setup only) - features parameters to enter Connection type and Address to establish
communication between the Encore Series Software and DataNode.
Polling tab (available in DataNode setup only) - features parameters to schedule when Encore Series Software can poll the DataNode
for new data, retrieve and/or delete data stored in DataNode, and update DataNode firmware version.
Input Configuration tab (available in Template setup and DataNode setup) - allows users to select what function each of the eight
digital channels will perform, the channel name or descriptor, which physical channelmaps to a displayed channel, debounce time or
how long the signal must be in the next state before becoming valid, which transition is used in the function, and how often the date is
journalled.
Change of State tab (available in Template setup if one or more input channel/s is set to COS (Change of State); also available in
DataNode setup) - the Mavosys 10 Digital Input DataNode can be programmed to record events that occur on a change of state
(edge-triggered).
Counters tab (available in Template setup if one or more input channel/s is configured as Counter; also available in DataNode setup) this tab only appears when one or more channel/s is programmed as such.
Cross-Triggering tab (available in Template setup and DataNode setup) - digital cross triggers are initiated with a Change of State
only and only the status of state is recorded when a digital module responds to a cross trigger. The user may determine what type of
cross trigger is initiated for a Change of State and what type of cross trigger will cause the digital module to record its status of state.
Cross triggering can also initiate one of the analog modules to cause either an equivalent rms or transient event recording.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–168
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Template Setup tabs
Template - You can set the name and description of the template from the Template setup tab shown below. This tab contains a list of
DataNodes of the same type as the template. Use the check box if you want to associate the template with the respective DataNode.
Template setup values are configured in the Input Configuration tab (see bottom screen). The template for Digital DataNodes also has
the Cross-Triggering tab where you can configure cross-trigger Communication parameters (Group ID and Address) and Change of
State event messaging when applicable. The COS (Change of State) tab or Counters tab only appear if one or more of the inputs is
configured to be such.
check box to
associate
template with
DataNode
Input Configuration - All setup parameters for Input Configuration tab are part of the template. When you associate atemplate with a
DataNode, all of the setup values from the template are copied to the DataNode's setup values. Thereafter,any change that you make
to the template is copied to all of the DataNodes associated with the template.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–169
This chapter provides a detailed discussion of the functionalities in each of the Mavosys 10 Digital DataNode setup tab.
12.3
Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear
The Encore Series Software/DataNode is designed to provide programming support as well as data display. The software setup page
is where the parameters and value settings are programmed. The programmed parameters and value settings are translated and displayed in meaningful data format under the Views page, Real-time page, and Reports page. Refer tothe previous chapters for more
details on the Views, Real-time, and Reports pages.
12.4
Programming the Tabs
LEGEND (Please note the following conventions are used in the screen displays):
Items in gray text are not programmable, but included for information purpose to the user.
Items in boldare examples of what can be entered.Selections available in drop down menu are enclosed in brackets { xxxx }.
!
Caution!
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH has already set default values for the various parameters in each DataNode. The default values
have been tested to result in optimal system performance. Users are advised not to change the default value settings unless
there are applications which require advanced setups.
12.4.1
Identification and Status tab
Properties
Values
Identification Information
61DIN-SE
Name
Description
Serial Number
Version
typically describes
where DataNode
is located
Unknown
H:/V1.2.12, C:V1.3.11
Status Information
Normal
Idle
11/28/2006 13:03:04
11/28/2006 13:03:22
11/28/2006 13:04:44
Health
Communication status
Last contact at
Last poll at
Next poll at
Use the setting below to associate this DataNode with a template. Note: selecting a template causes all DataNode specific settings to be updated to
those of the template; however, the DataNode’s settings can be changed after a template is applied.
Mavosys 10 Template
{None, Mavosys 10 Template}
Template
indicate when
Encore Series was
last contacted, the
last requested data
from DataNode, &
when next data poll
will take place
select template to
associate
DataNode settings
Use the setting below to record annotations for this DataNode.
Notes
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION includes the Name and Description which users can assign for a particular DataNode type. Simply
click on the Name or Description value field and the cursor is set for users to type in the space provided. Description typically
describes the place where the DataNode hardware is located. Users are allowed to enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters under the
Name and Description fields. The Serial Number and Version of the DataNode hardware are automatically set by default. This instrument-specific information is available only for viewing and cannot be altered or changed from the Encore Series Software.
STATUS INFORMATION properties includes Health status, whether the DataNode system is functioning normally or not.
It also includes status of Encore Series Software to DataNode Communications.
Contact and Polling Status are also displayed, indicating when the software was last contacted, when data was last requested from
the DataNode, and when the next poll is scheduled to take place.
Template users may also associate this DataNode with thesettings from a template.
Remember to click the Save Setup button found at the bottom of the page to save any changes that have been done. To aid users, a
Save confirmation window appears after changes have been made and when users are about to switch to a different tab.
12.4.2
Identification and Status tab
Properties
Values
Set the active flag to allow communication with the DataNode. Note: the active flag must be cleared in order to change the other communication settings.
;
Active
A direct or on-demand network connection is required. Address strings are Internet Protocol (IP) addresses (e.g., 192.168.1.10).
Connection
Address
User name
Password
Local Area Network (LAN)
15.4.2.154/2
admin
************
enable to activate
communication
between DataNode
and Encore Series
Software
COMMUNICATION parameters for Mavosys 10 Digital DataNode include the following:
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–170
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Active which indicates whether communications between the Encore Series Software and Digital DataNode is enabled. When
checked, this means that the DataNode is actively communicating and exchanging information with the Encore Series. When making
changes in the different value settings of a DataNode, it is recommended to uncheck the Active box again. Also when adding a new
DataNode, the Active box should be checked last to establish link with the DataNode site. Click on the Home page to see which
DataNodes are actively communicating with the Encore Series Software.
Mavosys 10 Digital DataNode Connection has built-in standard support for Ethernet, RS232 and RS485 communications. Modem
and GSM/GPRS communications are also available using external interfaces that are available from GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH.
Encore Series Software supports all these methods of communications so users can choose what is appropriate for your application.
Encore Series Software can directly connect to, or be easily adapted for use with, virtually any network that supports the TCP/IP Internet protocol. The RJ-45 connector allows for direct connection to most networks in use today. Other types of network like Fiber, coaxial (10Base2) or other, inexpensive off the shelf adapters should be available to connect to such networks.
Address is where the IP information for the specific DataNode is entered. Each Mavosys 10 DataNode is shipped from the factory with
an IP Address. This IP Address is entered here. After typing in the IP address, enter a slash sign (/), followed by the number to represent which Virtual Analyzer within the same mainframe this setup is for. Start with 0 to indicate the first virtual analyzer, 1 for the second,
2 for the third, and/or 3 for the fourth.
User name and Password are the name and password for Encore Series Software to DataNode communications. The password is
typically left at factory default. A wrong IP or password will result in DataNode communication error and users will not be able to access
the particular DataNode.
☞
12.4.3
Note
The password entered must match that of the DataNode.
Polling tab
Properties
Values
Polling schedule
Enable scheduled polling
;
Start at
11/28/2006 00:00:00
Repeat every
1
minutes
Repeat units
{minutes, hours, days, weeks, months}
Maximum number of retries
3
Time to wait between retries (minutes)
1
Operations performed at each poll
send settings to the DataNode
When InfoNode and DataNode settings differ
{get settings from the DataNode
send settings to the DataNode}
Download and store data
;
Operations performed only once at the next poll
Send settings to DataNode
…
Delete data in DataNode
…
Update DataNode firmware
…
POLLING SCHEDULE parameters include Enable scheduled polling, which indicates whether scheduled polling of the DataNode
should take place. When checked, this means that the Encore Series Software will poll the Digital DataNode for new information
according to a defined schedule. This includes a Start at date and time, a Repeat every numerical value, and Repeat units which
can be minutes, hours, days, weeks, or months. The Maximum number of retries can be specified along with the Time to wait
between retries (in minutes).
OPERATIONS PERFORMED AT EACH POLL include the folowing parameters: When InfoNode and DataNode settings differ
allows users to match DataNode setups with those listed in the Encore Series/InfoNode when configurations differ and/or communication errors occur; the Download and store data check box enables the Encore Series Software to retrieve data stored in the DataNode.
OPERATIONS PERFORMED ONLY ONCE AT THE NEXT POLL include checkboxes to enable/disable: Send settings to DataNode use to match DataNode setups with those listed in the Encore Series Software; Delete data in DataNode - use to remove stored data
in the DataNode; and Update DataNode firmware - use to update DataNode firmware with the version stored on the Encore Series
Software.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–171
12.4.4
Input Configuration tab
Properties
Values
Channels (select the channel(s) to change)
Overcurrent Trip
Trip Counter
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Channel name
Overcurrent Trip
Change of state
{Unused, Change of state, Counter reset,
Counter, KYZ counter (A), KYZ counter (C), KYZ
counter (Q), Frequency monitor}
I1
{I1, I2, I3, I4, I5, I6, I7,I8}
All transitions
{Low to high transitions, High to low transitions,
All transitions}
5
Function
Input
Active state
Debounce time (microseconds)
Journaling Setup (for all appropriate channels)
1 second
{1 second,
1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, or 60 minutes}
Journaling interval
Model Mavosys 10 has eight digital input channels labeled A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H. Users must turn on any input channel to be used for
monitoring. If a channel is not turned on ,no data will be collected for it. Refer to the Encore Series Mavosys 10 Installation Guide for
more information on Series Mavosys 10 setup and configuration.
The Encore Series Software has a user interface for Input Configuration, giving users the ability to select channel input/s to change.
Users can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for each digital input Channel name or descriptor of channel represented.
Each channel can be independently set to Function as either a change of state detector, a counter, a counter reset (back to count=0),
a frequency monitor, or be considered unused. See chapter 12.4.5 Change of State tab on page 172 if digital channel is set to function
as Change of state detector. See chapter 12.4.6 Counters tab on page 173 if channel function is set as a Counter.
Input maps the physical channel to the displayed channel to correct wiring mistakes. Input channel mapping is used to correct for
errors in wiring the instrument to the circuit. If a mistake is made, for example a phase is connected to the wrong channel, it can be
corrected in the software instead of changing the wiring to the instrument.
☞
Note
It is recommended that the actual wiring be changed, but input channel mapping can correct the problem if this is not practical.
Each digital channel can be individually labeled, is triggerable, and the transition set from low-to-high state, high-to-low state, or either.
Active state determines on which transition the function will be applied, such as when to count to the next number or when to record
a trigger as a change of state, from low to high, high to low, or either.
Debounce time (microseconds) refers to the 'n' sample intervals of "dead time" before looking for the next valid transition, ranging
from 0 to 9999 microseconds.
The Journaling interval menu allows users to set the interval to save the min/max/avg (where applicable) to either 1second, 1, 2, 3,
5, 10, 15, 60 minutes.
12.4.5
Change of State tab
Properties
Values
Channels (select the channel(s) to change)
Overcurrent Trip
Enable triggers
Enable trending
;
;
The Mavosys 10 Digital DataNode can be programmed to record events that occur on a change of state (edge-triggered). The Change
of State tab only appears if one or more channels is programmed as such.
Highlight the individual channel/s under CHANNELS (SELECT THE CHANNEL/S TO CHANGE) that you wish to trend. Then check the
Enable triggers and/or Enable trending box. This enabling property signals that data for the selected channel is to be monitored
and stored. The checkboxes enable the trending of values listed in the page. If the boxes are not checked, the settings are persisted
but not in effect.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–172
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
12.4.6
Counters tab
Properties
Values
Channels (select the channel(s) to change)
Trip Counter
Reset channel
Scale factor
Offset
Quantity measured
Characteristic
Units
Phase
Enable trending
Enable limit checking
Very high
High
Low
Very low
Deadband
None
1000
0
Power
Real
W
Generic
;
;
The Counters tab only appears when one or more channel/s is programmed as such.
The CHANNELS (SELECT THE CHANNEL/S TO CHANGE) shows for which channel the counter parameters are set.
A transition of a channel programmed as Reset Channel will clear the counter values of all channels programmed as Counters.
Scale factor specifies the number used to scale the value read from the digital module to the value you wish to record. This depends
on the transducers that are measuring the real signal. For instance, a flow sensor might output 5 counts per liter. If the unit is measured
in liters, the scale would be 1/5 or .20.
The Offset field allows an offset to be applied to the signal measured from the digital module. This value must be specified in scaled
units.
Quantity measured, Characteristic and Units are used to define the channel type in the Encore Series database. Selection from
these properties allow the Encore Series Software to group the channel with the appropriate channels during selection, and allow some
reports to include the signals measured in more meaningful ways.
Sample property values are Power (for Quantity measured), Real (for Characteristic), and W (for Units). The next field allows you to
select the appropriate Phase setting that you wish to change. The limit values can be enabled and programmed individually for each
phase and phase-to-phase setting.
The Enable trending box allows trending of values listed in this Counter page. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into
effect. If the box is not checked, the settings are persisted but not in effect.
High and low limits can also be enabled and individualy set for each selected channel. Check the Enable limit checking box, then
enter the value for the five threshold limits in the fields below.
Very high - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit.
High - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit.
Low - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit.
Very low - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the low limit.
Deadband - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded.
12.4.7
Cross-Triggering tab
Properties
Values
Communication Configuration (common to all messages)
Broadcast group ID
1234
Broadcast address (empty for local)
192.168.0.255
1 – Change of State Event Message Configuration
8 (default for RMS events)
Send this message when a channel 1 – Change of
{None, 0 (default for Transient events), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
State event is detected
7, 8 (default for RMS events), 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15}
0 (default for Transient events)
Record a channel 1 – Change of State event when this {None, 0 (default for Transient events), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
message is received
7, 8 (default for RMS events), 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15}
The Mavosys 10 Digital DataNode can be configured to issue a UDP (cross trigger) broadcast message when a Change-of-State event
occurs. A digital cross trigger is intiated with a Change of State only, and only the Status of State is recorded when a digital module
responds to a cross trigger.
Under COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATION, a Broadcast group ID is used to determine what group of digital modules will react
together so that only those receivers with the same group ID will respond to the broadcast if so enabled. The group ID can be any
number between 1 and 9999. With this number you can split the DataNodes into groups.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–173
The broadcast ID number in the Encore Series Software must match the broadcast group ID set under the TCP/IP parameter of the
Datanode. The DataNode also uses this ID mechanism for multiple DataNode cross triggering, and is guaranteed only on an un-routed
network. The group ID is sent along with the broadcast message and only those receivers with the same group ID will respond to the
broadcast if so enabled.
The Broadcast address is the address of the network on which the cross triggers are to be broadcast. This address acts like a mask
and is typically the local address in which the Encore system is deployed on. In the sample screen shown above, all units with IP
address starting with 192.168.0.xxx can respond to the cross trigger. Users can specify to send a broadcast to a directed address
other than the local network i.e. across a router, if desired. However, results cannot be guaranteed and data may be lost if the message
takes too long to arrive at its destination. UDP Broadcast address (empty for local) is typically not routed and only works on the
local network.
The next parameters allow users to determine what type of cross trigger is initiated and what type of cross trigger will cause the digital
module to record its status of state. For example, in the Cross Triggering tab shown above, suppose you chose to initiate a rms cross
trigger on an analog module for a digital event and respond to a transient cross trigger from an analog module with a digital recording.
Under 1-CHANGE OF STATE EVENT MESSAGE CONFIGURATION, the range of values that can be entered is between 0 to 15. Send
this message when a channel 1 - Change of State event is detected enables the sending of the rms cross trigger. The default ID
value for rms cross trigger is 8. Record a channel 1 - Change of State event when this message is received enables the DataNode to respond to received transient cross trigger. The default ID value for receiveing rms cross trigger is 0.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–174
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
13
Mavosys 10 PQ DataNode Setup
This chapter shows the procedures on how to set up the Mavosys 10 Power Quality (PQ) DataNode. It covers the following topics:
Template and DataNode Tabs
Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear
Programming the Tabs
13.1
Template and DataNode Tabs
The General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes (chapter 7.3 General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes through the Encore Series
Software Setup Page on page 79) and Using the Template Function in DataNode Setup (chapter 7.4 Using the Template Function in
DataNode Setup on page 82) provide important background information for DataNode setup. Read these sections before continuing
on with the discussion below.
Below is a list of the various Mavosys 10 PQ Template and PQ DataNode tabs available and the programmable setups found in each
tab. Template settings look and work just like actual DataNode settings. All of the DataNode setup parameters except for those on the
Identification and Status,Communication, and Polling tabs are part of the template. The setup values on these tabs (e.g. DataNode
name, IP address, polling rate, etc.) are not affected by changes to the Templates.
The list also notes which tabs are trending pages. A trending page contains an enable/disable checkbox which allows trending of values listed on that page. All trending pages are displayed and the enabling checkboxes can be found in the individual tabs.
Template tab (available in Template setup only) - features template Name and Description, and allows users to select which DataNode
to associate with the template settings.
Identification and Status tab (available in DataNode setup only) - features Identification and Status information of a specific DataNode, Polling status, and Template selection.
Communication tab (available in DataNode setup only) - features parameters to enter Connection type and Address to establish
communication between the Encore Series Software and DataNode.
Polling tab (available in DataNode setup only) - features parameters to schedule when Encore Series Software can poll the DataNode
for new data, retrieve and/or delete data stored in DataNode, and update DataNode firmware version.
Input Configuration tab - allows users to select channel input/s to change, set current probe and circuit type, configure nominal values for threshold settings, and set parameters for frequency tracking.
Rms Variations tab - features Limit, Pre- and Post-Event Captures, Rms Variations Sampling Intervals, and Intervals data.
Transients tab - features Cycle Counts and Individual Channels/Parameters data.
Waveform Capture tab - allows users to set the trigger channels/ parameters for waveform capture.
Powertab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of power parameters and to Select the journal entry/entries to
change.
Energy and Demand tab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Energy and Demand properties and to
Select the journal entry/entries to change.
Harmonics tab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Harmonics properties and to Select the journal entry/
entries to change.
Flicker tab - this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Flicker properties and to Select the journal entry/entries to
change; it also allows the setting of Sample Intervals (minutes).
Cross-Triggering tab - allows the sending and receiving of UDP (port 38642) broadcast messages and, depending on module type,
causes an rms variation, transient, or input snapshot equivalent event recording to occur whether or not the local trigger conditions for
the instrument were met.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–175
Template Setup tabs - All tabs except Template are the same as that of its associated DataNode tabs. From the Template setup tab
shown below, you can set the name and description of the template. This tab also contains a list of all of the DataNodes of the same
type as the template. Each DataNode in the list has a checkbox that indicates if the template is associated with the respective DataNode. When you associate a template with a DataNode, all of the setup values from the template are copied to the DataNode's setup
values. Thereafter, any change that you make to the template is copied to all of the DataNodes associated with the template.
check box to
associate
template with
DataNode
DataNode Setup tabs - All setup parameters except for those on the Identification and Status, Communication, and Polling tabs are
part of the template. The setup values on these tabs (e.g. DataNode name, IP address, polling rate, etc.) are not affected by the
changes to Templates.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–176
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
This chapter provides a detailed discussion of the functionalities in each of the Mavosys 10 PQ DataNode setup tab.
Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear
13.2
The Encore Series Software/DataNode is designed to provide programming support as well as data display. The softwaresetup page is
where the parameters and value settings are programmed. The programmed parameters and value settingsare translated and displayed in meaningful data format under the Views page, Real-time page, and Reports page. Refer tothe previous chapters for more
details on the Views, Real-time, and Reports pages.
13.3
Programming the Tabs
LEGEND (Please note the following conventions are used in the screen displays): Items in gray text are not programmable, but
included for information purpose to the user.Items in boldare examples of what can be entered.Selections available in drop down menu
are enclosed in brackets { xxxx }.
!
Caution!
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH has already set default values for the various parameters in each DataNode. The default values
havebeen tested to result in optimal system performance. Users are advised not to change the default value settings unless
there areapplications which require advanced setups.
13.3.1
Identification and Status tab
Properties
Name
Description
Serial Number
Version
Health
Communication status
Last contact at
Last poll at
Next poll at
Values
Identification Information
Edison 61 SE-PQ
Encore Series Mavosys 10 DataNode
Unknown
H:V2.0.29, C:V2.0.25
Status Information
Normal
Idle
03-21-2008 20:48:03
03-21-2008 20:48:03
03-21-2008 20:49:00
indicate when
Encore Series last
requested data
from DataNode &
when next data poll
will take place
Use the settings below to associate this DataNode with a template. Note: selecting a template causes all DataNode specific settings to be updated to
those of the template; however, the DataNode’s settings can be changed after a template is applied.
Template
Mavosys 10.120V.60Hz.Wye.All
{None, Mavosys 10.120V.60Hz.Wye.All}
select template to
associate
DataNode settings
Use the settings below to record annotations for this DataNode.
Notes
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION includes the Name and Description which users can assign for a particular DataNode type. Simply
click on the Name or Description value field and the cursor is set for users to type in the space provided. Description typically
describes the place where the DataNode hardware is located. Users are allowed to enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters under the
Name and Description fields. The Serial Number and Version of the DataNode hardware are automatically set by default. This instrument-specific information is available only for viewing and cannot be altered or changed from the Encore Series Software.
STATUS INFORMATION properties includes Health status, whether the DataNode system is functioning normally or not. It also
includes Communication status between Encore Series Software and DataNode.
Polling Status is also displayed, indicating the date and time when the software was last contacted by the DataNode (Last contact
at), last requested data from the DataNode (Lastpoll at), and when the next poll is scheduled to take place (Next poll at).
Template users may also associate this DataNode with the settings from a template.
Remember to click the Save Setup button found at the bottom of the page to save any changes that have been done. To aid users, a
Save confirmation window appears after changes have been made and when users are about to switch to a different tab.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–177
13.3.2
Communication tab
Properties
Values
Set the active flag to allow communication with the DataNode. Note: the active flag must be cleared in order to change the other communication settings.
;
Active
A direct or on-demand network connection is required. Address strings are Internet Protocol (IP) addresses (e.g., 192.168.1.10).
Connection
Address
User name
Password
Local Area Network (LAN)
198.69.18.216/0
admin
************
enable to activate
communication
between DataNode
and Encore Series
Software
COMMUNICATION parameters for Mavosys 10 PQ DataNodeinclude the following:
Active indicates whether communications between the Encore Series Software and PQ DataNode is enabled. When checked, this
means that the DataNode is actively communicating and exchanging information with the Encore Series. When making changes in the
different value settings of a DataNode, it is recommended touncheck the Active box again. Also when adding a new DataNode, the
Active box should be checked last to establish link with the DataNode site. Click on the Homepage to see which DataNodes are
actively communicating with the Encore Series Software.
Mavosys 10 PQ DataNode Connection has built-in standard support for Ethernet, RS232 and RS485 communications.Modem and
GSM/GPRS communications are also available using external interfaces that are available from GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH. Encore
Series Software supports all these methods of communications so users can choose what is appropriate for their application.
Encore Series Software can directly connect to, or be easily adapted for use with, virtually any network that supports the TCP/IP Internet protocol. The RJ-45 connector allows for direct connection to most networks in use today. Other types of network like Fiber, coaxial (10Base2) or other, inexpensive off the shelf adapters should be available to connect to such networks.
Address is where the IP information for the specific DataNode is entered. Each Mavosys 10 PQ DataNode is shipped from the factory
with an IP Address. This IP Address is entered here. After typing in the IP address, enter a slash sign (/), followed by the number to represent which Virtual Analyzer within the same mainframe this setup is for. Start with 0 to indicate the first virtual analyzer, 1 for the second, 2 for the third, and/or 3 for the fourth.
User name and Password are the name and password for Encore Series Software to DataNode communications. The password is
typically left at factory default. A wrong IP or password will result in DataNode communication error and users will not be able to access
the particular DataNode.
☞
13.3.3
Note
The password entered must match that of the DataNode.
Polling tab
Properties
Values
Polling schedule
Enable scheduled polling
;
Start at
04/01/2008 00:00:00
Repeat every
1
minutes
Repeat units
{minutes, hours, days, weeks, months}
Maximum number of retries
3
Time to wait between retries (minutes)
1
Operations performed at each poll
get settings from the DataNode
When InfoNode and DataNode settings differ
{get settings from the DataNode
send settings to the DataNode}
Download and store data
;
Operations performed only once at the next poll
Send settings to DataNode
…
Delete data in DataNode
…
Update DataNode firmware
…
POLLING SCHEDULE parameters include Enable scheduled polling, which indicates whether scheduled polling of the DataNode
should take place. When checked, this means that the Encore Series Software will poll the DataNode for new information according to
a defined schedule. This includes a Start at date and time, a Repeat every numerical value, and Repeat units which can be minutes,
hours, days, weeks, or months. The Maximum number of retries can be specified along with the Time to wait between retries (in
minutes).
OPERATIONS PERFORMED AT EACH POLL include the folowing parameters: When InfoNode and DataNode settings differ
allows users to match DataNode setups with those listed in the Encore Series/InfoNode system when configurations differ and/or communication errors occur; the Download and store data check box enables the Encore Series Software to retrieve data stored in the
DataNode.
OPERATIONS PERFORMED ONLY ONCE AT THENEXT POLL include checkboxes to enable/disable: Send settings to DataNode use to match DataNode setups with those listed in the Encore Series Software; Delete data in DataNode - use to remove stored data
in the DataNode; and Update DataNode firmware - use toupdate DataNode firmware with the version stored on the Encore Series
Software.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–178
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
13.3.4
Input Configuration tab
Properties
Values
Input Configuration (select the input(s) to change)
A
B
C
D
Voltage transducer primary
Voltage transducer secondary
Voltage input inverted
Voltage input order
Current transducer primary
Current transducer secondary
Current input inverted
Current input order
Current probe type
Circuit Type
Nominal voltage
Nominal current
Nominal frequency
Normalize thresholds
Tracking mode
Sync channel
Minimum frequency
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
1.000000
1.000000
;
V1
{V1, V2, V3, V4}
3000.000000
1.500000
;
I1
{I1, I2, I3, I4}
Other
{TR2500 (10A–500A RMS)
TR2510 (0A-10A RMS), TR2520 (300A-3000A RMS)
AC/DC (0A-150A RMS), AC/DC (0A-1500A RMS)
TR2019B (1A-300A RMS)
TR2021 (1A-30A RMS), TR2022 (10A-1000A RMS)
TR2023 (100A-3000A RMS)
LEMFlex RR3000-SD (Range 1, 300A)
LEMFlex RR3000-SD (Range 2, 3000A)
LEMFlex RR3035 (Range 1, 30A)
LEMFlex RR3035 (Range 2, 300A)
LEMFlex RR3035 (Range 2, 3000A)
LEMFlex RR3035A (Range 1, 30A)
LEMFlex RR3035A (Range 2, 300A)
LEMFlex RR3035A (Range 2, 3000A)
LEMFlex RR6035 (Range 1, 30A)
LEMFlex RR6035 (Range 2, 300A)
LEMFlex RR6035 (Range 2, 3000A)
LEMFlex RR6035A (Range 1, 30A)
LEMFlex RR6035A (Range 2, 300A)
LEMFlex RR6035A (Range 2, 3000A)
LEM PR150 AC/DC (0A–150A)
LEM PR1500 AC/DC (0A–1500A)
TR2501 (1A RMS), TR2530 (300A RMS)
TR2540 (1000A RMS), TR2550 (100A RMS)}
click fields
to display
drop down
menu
Wye
{Single Phase, Split Phase, Wye, Delta, Delta 2-Watt
Meter, Generic, Wye 2.5 element No B, Wye 2.5 element No C}
Nominal Values
120.0000
300.0000
60.0000
;
Frequency Tracking
Internal
{Standard (utility power line), Fast (local
generator), Internal}
A
{A, D}
45.0000
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–179
Model Mavosys 10 has input channels for voltage, current, and eight digital inputs labelled A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H. In addition, there will
also be transducer inputs and digital relay output modules, with four channels each. Users must turn on any input channel to be used
for monitoring. If a channel is not turned on, no data will be collected for it. Refer to the Encore Series Mavosys 10 Installation Guide for
more information on Series Mavosys 10 setup and configuration. The input modules allow a variety of voltage and current measurement cables, probe types, or pods to connect to the Encore Series Mavosys 10 instrument for voltage, current, and/or digital signal
monitoring.
The Encore Series Software has a user interface for INPUT CONFIGURATION, giving users the ability to select channel input/s to
change. Users can set values for Voltage/Current transducer primary and Voltage/Current transducer secondary. Values to
account for any voltage or current transformers can be entered for each input channel. The primary and secondary values are entered.
For example, if the primary voltage is 2400 volts and the secondary voltage is 120 volts, then those values should be entered. This
gives an effective 20:1 reduction in voltage. When the input voltage to the DataNode is 120V, the displayed value will be 2400 volts. No
setup values are changed unless the user modifies this field and saves the changes.
The Encore Series Software also allows users to do channel swapping and polarity inversion. Channel mapping is used to correct for
errors in wiring the instrument to the circuit. If a mistake is made, such as an inverted CT or a phase is connected to the wrong channel, it can be corrected in the software instead of changing the wiring to the instrument. Note that it is recommended that the actual
wiring be changed, but channel mapping can correct the problem if this is not practical. Enable the checkbox opposite Voltage/Current input inverted as it applies, and then click on the corresponding Voltage or Current input order to show which channel the
signal is connected to.
The channel mapping array works by specifying a numeric code in each array slot that indicates which phase is connected to the physical Mavosys 10 PQ DataNode channel. Normally, the channels and phases are matched as follows:
Voltage Phase A
Voltage Phase B
Voltage Phase C
Voltage Neutral
Current Phase A
Current Phase B
Current Phase C
Current Neutral
Channel V1
Channel V2
Channel V3
Channel V4
Channel I1
Channel I2
Channel I3
Channel I4
Measurement errors may result if the voltage and current signals are not correctly paired.
Various Current probe types are available for current monitoring. If the current probe type that you are using is not on the list, select
Other. You need to set the CT scale factor when using a current probe that is not on the list.
Users can also select from the following Circuit types:
Single Phase, Split Phase, Wye, Delta, Delta 2-Watt Meter, Generic, Wye 2 1/2 Element without Ch B, and Wye 2 1/2 Element without
Ch C. When making voltage connections to a Single phase circuit, use channel A differential inputs. Neutral to ground measurements
are recommended but not required for proper operation. When making Split Phase measurements, use both channels A and B for voltage and current connections. The neutral is chosen as the reference for measurement purposes. When using the Wye setup mode,
channels A, B and C are connected to voltage and current. The neutral is connected to common and is the reference for the three
channels. Various setups are possible when using the Delta setup mode. For example, the 3 Phase Delta uses voltage channels A, B
and C as differential inputs with channel A using source voltage A-B, channel B using B-C, and channel C using C-A as the reference.
Use channels A, B and C for current connections. Refer to the Encore Series Mavosys 10 Installation Guide for illustrations of the different wiring configurations.
NOMINAL VALUES are used as basis for setting default thresholds and other parameters for monitoring. The Encore Series Software
allows users to override the default settings to customize and enter Nominal voltage, Nominal current, and Nominal frequency
values best suited for their application, or they can use the computed nominal values displayed on screen. Users also have the option
to accept default threshold settings and enable the Normalize thresholds checkbox.
☞
Note
Make sure that the nominal values computed by the instrument are correct. These values are used as basis for setting threshold parameters for circuit monitoring.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–180
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
13.3.5
RmsVariations tab
Properties
Values
RMS Variation Limits (select the channel(s) to change)
Rms Voltage A
Rms VoltageB
Rms Voltage C
Rms Voltage N
Rms Voltage AB
Rms Voltage BC
Rms Voltage CA
Rms Current A
Rms Current B
Rms Current C
Rms Current N
High
Low
Very low
phase-tophase values
displayed
depend upon
the Wiring
Configuration
set under the
Input
Configuration
tab
110.0%
90.0%
10.0%
Rapid Voltage Change Limits (select the channel(s) to change)
Rms Voltage A
Rms VoltageB
Rms Voltage C
Rms magnitude change (%)
Pre-trigger (Cycles)
In-out post trigger (Cycles)
Out-in post trigger (Cycles)
Pre-trigger (Cycles)
Post-trigger (Cycles)
RMS Summary
6
6
6
Waveform Capture
2
2
RMS stands for root mean square, a mathematical formula used to compute the equivalent value of the voltage and current. Voltage
and current changes are measured and checked against the programmed limits. Thresholds are set as high limits (threshold above the
programmed limit) and low limits (threshold below the programmed limit). Rms variations result whenever voltage or current rms value
rise above or fall below the programmed threshold limits. The limits determine how sensitive the instrument should be (note that statistical and trending information is always captured regardless of the limit settings, so the user will never be without a data even if he/she
did not set the limits to the ideal values).
Encore Series Software allows users to set the limits for each of the triggers, as well as the amount of rms and waveform sample
(cycles) to record before and aftertrigger cycle.
Under RMS VARIATION LIMITS, letters A, B and C represent each leg or phase of a three-phase system, while letter N represents the
neutral conductor. The channels used to trigger threshold values are automatically set depending on the wiring configuration selected
under the Input Configuration tab. High limit, Low limit, and Very low limit values can be enabled and programmed individually for
each phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase setting.
To program individual limit values, select the appropriate line that describes the phase-neutral or phase-to-phase setting that you wish
to change. If the same limit value will be assigned to more than one phase, press Shift +click to select multiple phases. Enter your limit
value for the corresponding phase in the High limit and Low limit fields. Click the Save Setup button every time you assign different limit
values.
Rapid Voltage Change (RVC) is a change in the rms voltage that is generally more severe than voltage fluctations that result in light
flicker but less severe than what would be termed as sags (dips) or swells. Specificaly, an RVC is defined as a single rapid variation of
the rms value of the voltage between two consecutive levels, which are sustained for a definite but unspecified duration.
A rapid voltage change is expressed by:
% U change
∆Umax
= -------------- ⋅ 100 %, where
UN
∆Umax is the maximum difference of the rms values of a voltage change characteristic and Un is the nominal voltage.
If the voltage is stable for at least one second, an additional fast change is to be considered as another rapid voltage change.
Under RAPID VOLTAGE CHANGE LIMITS, users can also set corresponding threshold limits for rms voltage categories A, B, and C.
The Rms magnitude change (%) is defined as a percent of normal cycle for each voltage category. Once the threshold limits are
crossed, the rms disturbance category will be classified as an event.%
Users can also define the number of rms summary and waveform cycles to be saved before the start (pre-), after the start (post-start),
and after the end (post-end) of the event. Under RMS SUMMARY, Pre-trigger (Cycles) set the number of cycles for Pre-event start
rms samples. This setting is also used for Pre-event end cycles. Enter the number of cycles of rms samples to record before the event
start trigger cycle in the value field.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–181
Use the In-out post trigger (Cycles) to set the number of cycles for Post-event start cycles. Enter the number of cycles to record
after the event start cycle. On the other hand, Out-in post trigger (Cycles) allows you to set the number of cycles for Post-event end
cycles. Enter the number of cycles to record after the event end point. The Pre- and Post- trigger settings under WAVEFORM CAPTURE specify the number of waveform cycles to record before, during, and after the event. Although waveform cycle recording is
enabled by default, users have the option not to record waveform cycles. Use Pre-trigger (Cycles) to set the number of cycles for
Pre-event start waveform cycles. Enter the number of waveform cycles to be saved before the event start andevent end cycles. Use
Post-trigger (Cycles) to set the number of cycles for Post-event end waveform cycles. Enter the number of waveform cycles to be
saved after theevent start and event end cycles.
The parameters capture rms sample or rms waveformcycles that may be used to analyze and manage powerevent patterns and
behavior.
☞
13.3.6
Note
The number of pre-trigger cycles for waveformcapture should be less than or equal to the number of pre-trigger cycles for rms
summary. The same applies to thepost-trigger cycles.
Transients tab
Properties
Values
Transient Limits (select the channel(s) to change)
Instantaneous Voltage A
Instantaneous Voltage B
Instantaneous Voltage C
Instantaneous Voltage N
Instantaneous Current A
Instantaneous Current B
Instantaneous Current C
Instantaneous Current N
Absolute instantaneous peak
150.3
Integrated high frequency trigger
8.8
Cycle-to-cycle waveshape threshold
Cycle-to-cycle waveshape duration (% of cycle)
24.000000
RMS distortion waveshape
14.1
Pre-trigger and post-trigger (Cycles)
phase-to-neutral
or phase-tophase values
displayed depend
upon the Wiring
Configuration set
under the Input
Configuration tab
Waveform Capture
Use RMS Variation settings
{Default (1 pre-trigger, 2 post-trigger cycles)
Use RMS Variation settings}
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH instruments label rms voltage or current variations as either sags (voltage or current decreases below low
limit) or swells (voltage or current increases above high limit) as per IEEE 1159. Voltage disturbances which are shorter in duration than
typical sags and swells are classified as transients. Two basic types of transients are: 1) impulsive transients characterized by very
rapid changes in the magnitude of measured quantities and commonly caused by capacitors or inductors switching on line, loose
wires, lightning, static, and power failures; and 2) oscillatory transients defined as a temporary, rapid discontinuity of the waveform.
The Encore Series Software uses the following algorithms to detect and record transients:
Peak or Instantaneous trigger magnitude
High frequency negative/positive peak detectors magnitude
Waveshape threshold duration or window
Waveshape threshold magnitude or tolerance
INDIVIDUAL CHANNELS/PARAMETERS, represented by letters A, B and C refer to different channels, while N stands for neutral. The
channel values are pre-defined and automatically set depending upon the wiring configuration.
The crest factor or Absolute instantaneous peak is the absolute peak sample value within one cycle. The instantaneous peak triggers on the absolute peak value of the entire waveform. This value is compared against the absolute value of each A/D sample of the V
and I channel waveforms.
☞
Note
Do not set this value to less than or equal to thepeak of the normal waveform. For a sinusoidal waveform, the peak is 1.414 x
the rms value. Failure to do this will result in continuous triggering.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–182
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Integrated high frequency detected transients use special circuitry to detect and capture transients as small as 1 microsecond in
duration. These transients can be positive and/or negative values above or below the low frequency waveshape.
Users have the option to have their Encore Series Mavosys 10 instrument installed with the high speed sampling analog board that can
capture voltage and current transients. Because these types of disturbances usually exhibit very narrow widths and fast rise and fall
times, they are quickly dumped by the system. They tend to be unidirectional when close to their source.
Oscillatory transients are types of disturbances usually captured as waveshape faults. The PQ DataNode captures pre-trigger and
post-trigger waveform cycles. The waveshape fault triggering algorithm essentially compares samples for each cycle to the corresponding samples from the previous cycle. If the samples differ by more than the threshold tolerance for a length of time exceeding
window percent of the power frequency cycle, a waveshape fault is registered. A trigger occurs when either waveshape or rms deviation rise above the programmed Cycle-to-cycle waveshape threshold. Waveshape trigger values include the magnitude and Cycleto-cycle waveshape duration of the difference between the present and previous cycle.
Once a record trigger is detected, instantaneous waveform information is recorded for the prescribed voltage and current channel(s).
Disturbance monitoring requires that voltage be continuously sampled, and recorded only if the signals exceed specified values. Waveshape changes are only triggerable for voltage transients as the current waveshapes are usually continually changing on a normally
operating distribution system. However most types of disturbances require that current be recorded as well to help determine the
source of the disturbance.
Users can also specify the number of waveform cycles to record before (Pre-trigger) and after (Post-trigger) the trigger cycle.
Select the Default (Pre-trigger cycles = 1, Post-trigger cycles = 2) setting if you want to use the default waveform trigger cycle
counts for transient events. Select Use RMS Variation settings if you want to use the same waveform trigger cycle counts to capture
transient events and rms events (Pre-trigger cycles = 2, Post-trigger cycles = 2).
13.3.7
Waveform Capture tab
Properties
Values
Waveform Capture Enables (Select the trigger channel(s) to enable or disable)
Voltage A
Voltage B
Voltage C
Voltage N
Voltage AB
Voltage BC
Voltage CA
Current A
Current B
Current C
Current N
Voltage A
Voltage B
Voltage C
Voltage N
Current A
Current B
Current C
Current N
;
;
;
…
;
;
;
…
Encore Series Software allows users to set the trigger channels/parameters for waveform capture.
WAVEFORM CAPTURE ENABLES show the channels that will have waveforms recorded should a trigger occur. Select from the available Volts or Amps channel in the window provided. Then check/uncheck a channel field to enable/disable channel for waveform capture.
This cross-trigger function prevents recording of meaningless data from unused (disabled) channels.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–183
13.3.8
Power tab
Properties
Journaling interval
Rms Voltage A
Rms Voltage B
Rms Voltage C
Rms Voltage N
Rms Voltage AB
Rms Voltage BC
Rms Voltage CA
Rms Current A
Rms Current B
Rms Current C
Rms Current N
Enable trending
Enable limit checking
Very high
High
Low
Very low
Deadband
Values
1 minute
{Off, 1 second, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes,
5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 1 hour}
Journal Channels (select the channel(s) to change)
;
;
144.000000
132.000000
108.000000
96.000000
Encore Series Software allows power parameters to be trended using periodic readings that are stored in a journal. Statistical information is always captured regardless of the limit settings, so users will never be without a trend even if he/she did not set the limits correctly. The system collects data even when no disturbances occur by recording periodical statistical data (By Time).
The Journaling Interval menu allows users to set the timeof how often the instrument will record power parametervalues.
JOURNAL CHANNELS contain the list of journal parameters that can be trended. Select from the available Volts or Amps channel in
the window tab. Then check/uncheck Enable trending to enable/disable parameter for trending. If the box is checked, the settings on
the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect.
Enable limit checking allows users to set the threshold units by which high and low limits of voltage trigger and current trigger are
calculated. Thresholds are set in ranges with high limit (threshold above the normal range) and low limit (threshold below the normal
range). The following threshold limits are used to trend journal parameters:
Very High: specifies an absolute limit for comparisonthat is higher than the high limit
High: specifies an absolute limit for comparison that ishigher than the low limit
Low: specifies an absolute limit for comparison that islower than the high limit
Very Low: specifies an absolute limit for comparisonthat is lower than the low limit
Deadband: specifies how much a value can changebefore another event is recorded
The Very high must be greater than High, Very low lessthan Low. Deadbands or sensitivity is used to recordincremental changes in the
parameter besides whenlimits are crossed. The hysteresis values assigned tolimits are fixed and not programmable by the user. Alllimit
values are used to determine if correspondingreporting or logging action should take place.
☞
Note
Users can record data simultaneously by limits and by time. Make sure to enable the parameters to trend.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–184
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
13.3.9
Energy and Demand tab
Properties
Values
10 minutes
{Off
3 minutes
Demand sub-interval
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes}
Sub-intervals per demand interval
3
Journal Channels (select the channel(s) to change)
Watthours A
Watthours B
Watthours C
Watthours Total
Varhours A
Varhours B
Varhours C
Varhours Total
Enable trending
…
Enable limit checking
;
Very high
144.000000
High
132.000000
Low
108.000000
Very low
96.000000
Deadband
Demand Sub-Interval and Sub-Intervals per Interval refer to the time interval used in calculating power demand values. Demand
calculations are made every sub-interval on the values that occurred during the most recent Demand Interval. Values set for Demand
Sub-Interval must be an integer-divisor of the Demand Interval since the former applies when updating certain parameters of the latter.
Demand values are computed as the average value over the demand interval, which can be programmed as a different value than the
periodic readings. The following parameter values can be enabled: individual phase and three phase total real power demand, reactive
demand, apparent power demand, average PF and peak real power values.
JOURNAL CHANNELS contain the list of journal parameters that can be trended. Select from the available Energy and Demand
parameters in the window tab. Then check/uncheck Enable trending to enable/disable parameter for trending. If the box is checked,
the settings on the page go into effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect. Enable limit
checking allows users to set the threshold units by which high and low limits of voltage trigger and current trigger are calculated.
Thresholds are set in ranges with high limit (threshold above the normal range) and low limit (threshold below the normal range). The
following threshold limits are used to trend journal parameters:
Very High: specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit
High: specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit
Low: specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit
Very Low: specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the low limit
Deadband: specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded
The Very high must be greater than High, Very low less than Low. Deadbands or sensitivity is used to record incremental changes in the
parameter besides when limits are crossed. The hysteresis values assigned to limits are fixed and not programmable by the user. All
limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–185
13.3.10 Harmonics tab
Properties
Journaling Interval
Values
10 minutes
10 minutes {Off, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes,
3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 1 hour)
Journal Channels (select the channel(s) to change
Positive Sequence Voltage Total
Current THD A
Negative Sequence Voltage Total
Current THD B
Zero Sequence Voltage Total
Current THD C
Positive Sequence Current Total
Current THD N
Negative Sequence Current Total
Current TID A
Zero Sequence Current Total
Current TID B
V Unbalance (S2/S1) Total
Current TID C
V Unbalance (S0/S1) Total
Current TID N
I Unbalance (S2/S1) Total
IT Product A
I Unbalance (S0/S1) Total
IT Product B
Voltage THD A
IT Product C
Voltage THD B
IT Product N
Voltage THD C
Current Crest Factor A
Voltage THD N
Current Crest Factor B
Voltage TID A
Current Crest Factor C
Voltage TID B
Current Crest Factor N
Voltage TID C
Transformer K Factor A
Voltage TID N
Transformer K Factor B
Voltage TIF A
Transformer K Factor C
Voltage TIF B
ANSI Transformer Derating Factor A
Voltage TIF C
ANSI Transformer Derating Factor B
Voltage TIF N
ANSI Transformer Derating Factor C
Voltage TIF (Rms) A
Unsigned Harmonic Power A
Voltage TIF (Rms) B
Unsigned Harmonic Power B
Voltage TIF (Rms) C
Unsigned Harmonic Power C
Voltage TIF (Rms) N
Harmonic Power A
Voltage Crest Factor A
Harmonic Power B
Voltage Crest Factor B
Harmonic Power C
Voltage Crest Factor C
Voltage Crest Factor N
Enable trending
…
Enable limit checking
…
Very high
High
Low
Very low
Deadband
Harmonic Voltage A
Harmonic Voltage B
Harmonic Voltage C
Harmonic Voltage N
Interharmonic Voltage A
Interharmonic Voltage B
Interharmonic Voltage C
Interharmonic Voltage N
Harmonics to trend
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–186
Individual Harmonic Trending
Harmonic Current A
Harmonic Current B
Harmonic Current C
Harmonic Current N
Interharmonic Current A
Interharmonic Current B
Interharmonic Current C
Interharmonic Current N
0
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Properties
Harmonic Voltage A #1
Harmonic Voltage A #2
Harmonic Voltage A #3
Harmonic Voltage A #4
Harmonic Voltage B #1
Harmonic Voltage B #2
Harmonic Voltage B #3
Harmonic Voltage B #4
Harmonic Voltage C #1
Harmonic Voltage C #2
Harmonic Voltage C #3
Harmonic Voltage C #4
Harmonic Voltage N #1
Harmonic Voltage N #2
Harmonic Voltage N #3
Harmonic Voltage N #4
Harmonic
Enable limit checking
Very High
High
Low
Very Low
Deadband
Values
Individual Harmonic Limits
Harmonic Current A #1
Harmonic Current A #2
Harmonic Current A #3
Harmonic Current A #4
Harmonic Current B #1
Harmonic Current B #2
Harmonic Current B #3
Harmonic Current B #4
Harmonic Current C #1
Harmonic Current C #2
Harmonic Current C #3
Harmonic Current C #4
Harmonic Current N #1
Harmonic Current N #2
Harmonic Current N #3
Harmonic Current N #4
0
…
Harmonics are waveform distortion, a steady-state deviation from an ideal power frequency sinusoid and is characterized by the spectral content of the waveform. Many non-linear devices such as battery chargers, switching power supplies or transformers inject currents at harmonic (integer multiples of the fundamental) frequencies into the system. Harmonic currents and the voltage distortion they
create as they flow through system impedances can reduce equipment operating reliability and service life. Harmonics can be particularly troublesome where capacitors are applied on the distribution system. Capacitors may result in resonance at a harmonic frequency,
leading to high harmonic voltages and currents throughout the system.
Interharmonics are frequency components between the harmonic frequencies. The IEC 1000-4-7 Standard dictates that harmonic
analysis is done using 5Hz bins.
The rms of the frequency bins between the 2nd and 3rd harmonic is referred to as the H2-3 interharmonic.
Various harmonic parameters such as total harmonic distortion (THD), total interharmonic distortion (TID), and telephone influence factor (TIF) can be trended using periodic readings that are stored in the journal. Depending on the harmonic Journaling Interval set, the
instrument records a sampling of of the waveform synchronized to the fundamental frequency, to ensure accurate calculation of harmonic phase angles.
JOURNAL CHANNELS contain various harmonic parameters that can be trended using periodic readings that are stored in a journal.
Harmonic distortion of voltage or current is calculated through a Fourier transformation of the waveform into harmonic magnitudes and
phase angle spectra. These spectra are used to determine figures of merit such as total harmonic distortion (THD) and telephone influence factor (TIF). The total interharmonic distortion (TID) is calculated similar to the THD. (See chapter APPENDIX A. Quantities Calculated from Periodic Voltage and Current Measurements on page 203)
The Encore Series/DataNode system allows simultaneous measurements of voltage and current so that harmonic power flow can be
obtained. Depending on value parameters set, the program can record a sampling of the waveform synchronized to the fundamental
frequency, to ensure accurate calculation of harmonic phase angles. The sampling rate is sufficient to determine up to the 50th harmonic and interharmonic or better. A comprehensive range of high and low limits can be enabled and individually set for each measured parameter.
Highlight the value parameter you wish to change, then check the Enable trending box. Check the threshold enable box and then
enter the value for that threshold. Repeat this for all parameters of interest. If the box is checked, the settings on the page go into
effect. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings are persisted but arenot in effect.
Enable limit checking allows users to set the threshold units by which high and low limits of voltage trigger current trigger are calculated. Thresholds are set in ranges with high limit (threshold above the normal range) and low limit (threshold below the normal range).
The following threshold limits are used to trend journal parameters:
Very High - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit
High - specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit
Low - specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit
Very Low - specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit
Deadband - specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded
The Very High must be greater than High, Very Low less than Low. Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity. The hysteresis values
assigned to limits are set by the system.
All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place. Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on, not a percent of fixed or floating base as can be used in Voltage Rms Variation and Transient limits.
Voltage and current harmonics for each phase and neutralchannel can be trended under INDIVIDUALHARMONIC TRENDING. The
value fields are leftblank to allow the users to choose the numbers or therange of harmonic frequencies to trend.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–187
Numbers can be entered individually with commas separating the numbers, or a range of harmonics can be specified using a dash
between lower and upper values. Also, the suffix ‘o’ or ‘e’ can be used to specify only the odd or even harmonics, respectively, in a
given range. Selecting numerous harmonics indiscriminately can take up all of the allowable trending parameters. Users are advised to
select harmonics to trend prudently.
!
Caution!
Selection of numerous harmonics and interharmonics can exceed the total number of journal parameters (typically 200) that
can be trended. This can also result in download times when communicating through a GSM/GPRS connection that are extremely long (and costly).
Resulting individual harmonic sampling and graphs can be seen in the Smart Trends folder under the Views tab.
Users can also set threshold limits under INDIVIDUAL HARMONIC LIMITS. Enable limit checking allows users to set the threshold
units by which high and low limits of harmonic voltage trigger and harmonic current trigger are calculated.
All activated Harmonic parameters and value settings defined can be viewed under the Real-time tab.
For further discussion on Harmonic Distortion, please refer to the EPQ DataNode Series User's Guide.
13.3.11 Flicker tab
Properties
Pst (short term) interval
Plt (long term) interval
Values
10 minutes
{Off, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes, 5
minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes}
2 hours
{Off, 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours}
Journal Channels (select the channel(s) to change)
Short Term Flicker A
Short Term Flicker B
Short Term Flicker C
Long Term Flicker A
Long Term Flicker B
Long Term Flicker C
Sliding PLT A
Sliding PLT B
Sliding PLT C
Instantaneous Flicker A
Instantaneous Flicker B
Instantaneous Flicker C
Flicker Meter Output 4 A
Flicker Meter Output 4 B
Flicker Meter Output 4 C
Flicker Meter Output 3 A
Flicker Meter Output 3 B
Flicker Meter Output 3 C
Predicted Short Term Flicker A
Predicted Short Term Flicker B
Predicted Short Term Flicker C
Enable trending
Enable limit checking
Very high
High
Low
Very low
Deadband
;
;
144.000000
132.000000
108.000000
96.000000
Pst is short term perceptibility, used to set calculation for Pst (short term) interval. Typical calculation is over 10 minute interval,
though this can be programmed. Plt is long term perceptibility, used to set calculation for Plt (long term) interval. Typical calculation
is over 2 hour interval, though this can also be programmed. The Plt interval must be an integer multiple of the Pst interval. Sliding Plt
recalculates the Plt value at each Pst interval, rather than only at the Plt interval.
Under JOURNAL CHANNELS various flicker parameters can be trended using periodic readings that are stored in a journal.
There are three flicker values available for trending: the short term flicker or Pst, the long term flicker or Plt, and Plt calculated on a sliding window. The other parameters are used primarily for specialized testing. Flicker measurements are classified per IEC 1000-4-15.
Enable trending features a checkbox which enables trending of values listed in this page. If the box is checked, the settings on the
page go into effect. Enabling this will automatically disable the high-frequency dual peak detectors located in the Transients tab. If the box is not checked, the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–188
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Enable limit checking allows users to set the threshold units by which high and low limits of voltage trigger and current trigger are
calculated. Thresholds are set in ranges with high limit (threshold above the normal range) and low limit (threshold below the normal
range). The following threshold limits are used to trend journal parameters:
Very High: specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit
High: specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit
Low: specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit
Very Low: specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the low limit
Deadband: specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded
The Very high must be greater than High, Very low less than Low. Deadbands or sensitivity is used to record incremental changes in the
parameter besides when limits are crossed. The hysteresis values assigned to limits are fixed and not programmable by the user. All
limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place.
13.3.12 Cross-Triggering tab
Properties
Values
Communication Configuration (common to all messages)
Broadcast group ID
4789
Broadcast address (empty for local)
72.4.197.255
RMS Event Message Configuration
None (disabled)
{None, 0 (default for Transient events), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
Send this message when a RMS event is detected
7, 8 (default for RMS events), 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15}
8 (default for RMS events)
Record a RMS event when this message is received {None, 0 (default for Transient events), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, 8 (default for RMS events), 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15}
Transient Event Message Configuration
None (disabled)
Send this message when a Transient event is detected {None, 0 (default for Transient events), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, 8 (default for RMS events), 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15}
0 (default for Transient events)
Record a Transient event when this message is
{None, 0 (default for Transient events), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
received
7, 8 (default for RMS events), 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15}
The Mavosys 10 PQDataNode can be configured to issue a UDP (cross trigger) broadcast message when an rms variation and/or transient event occurs. The UDP broadcast message is not triggerable from the Journal limit crossings. The PQ DataNode can also be
configured to listen for such message and cause an rms variation or transient recording to occur whether or not the local trigger conditions for that instrument were met. These settings are configured using the parameters under CROSS-TRIGGERING tab.
Depending on the values configured, the Mavosys 10 PQ DataNode will not only initiate and respond to rms and/or transient cross triggers from other PQ DataNodes, but it will also initiate and respond to cross-triggers from the other cross-trigger enabled DataNodes.
Under COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATION, a Broadcast group ID is used to determine what group of analyzers will react together
so that only those receivers with the same group ID will respond to the broadcast if so enabled. The group ID can be any number
between 1 and 9999. With this number you can split the DataNodes into groups, i.e. 2147483647 for Mavosys 10 PQ; 16595 for EPQ,
etc. The broadcast ID number in the Encore Series Software must match the broadcast group ID set under the TCP/IP parameter of
the Datanode. The DataNode also uses this ID mechanism for multiple DataNode cross triggering, and is guaranteed only on an unrouted network. The group ID is sent along with the broadcast message and only those receivers with the same group ID will respond
to the broadcast if so enabled.
The broadcast address is the address of the network on which the cross triggers are to be broadcast. This address acts like a mask
and is typically the local address in which the Encore system is deployed on. In the sample screen shown above, all units with IP
address starting with 72.4.197.xxx can respond to the cross trigger. Users can specify to send a broadcast to a directed address other
than the local network i.e. across a router, if desired. However, results cannot be guaranteed and data may belost if the message takes
too long to arrive at its destination. UDP Broadcast address (empty for local) is typically not routed and only works on the local network.
The next parameters specify the cross trigger send/receive settings. The users determine which event types the analyzer will broadcast
a cross trigger for, which type of cross trigger it will respond to, and what information it will record. For a Mavosys 10 PQDataNode, the
cross trigger ID is divided into two groups: one for rms events and another for transient events.
Under RMS EVENT MESSAGE CONFIGURATION, the range of values that can be entered is between 0 to 15. Send this message
when a RMS event is detected enables the sending of rms cross trigger. The default ID value for rms cross trigger is 8. Record a
RMS event when this message is received enables the DataNode torespond to received rms cross trigger. The default ID value for
receiveing rms cross trigger is also 8.
Under TRANSIENT EVENT MESSAGE CONFIGURATION, the range of values that can be entered is also between 0 to 15. Send this
message when a Transient event is detected enables the sending of a transient cross trigger. The default ID value for rms cross
trigger is 0. Record a Transient event when this message is received enables the DataNode to respond to received transient
cross trigger. The default ID value for receiveing transient cross trigger is also 0.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–189
14
ADAM Handler Setup
14.1
ADAM Instrument Handler Setup
This section applies to the set up of the ADAM instrument handler in Encore Series Software. Programming of individual ADAM modules are accomplished via switch settings on the modules themselves. ADAM instrument handler supports both the 4000 and 5000
series modules from Advantech. The 4000 series consists of stand alone modules, where each module is assigned a unique RS-485
address between 1 and 254. The 5000 series uses a single chassis to hold 4 or 8 modules. The chassis is assigned a single RS-485
address and the individual modules are addressed by slot number within the chassis. Note that the ADAM 5000 chasis can communicate with the Encore Series Software via RS-485 (requires external adaptor) or RS-232.
14.1.1
ADAM Module Connection Setup
The following are required to set up and configure an ADAM environment:
ADAM Modules
A host computer, such as an IBM PC/AT, that can output ASCII characters with an RS-232 or RS485 port
Power supply for the ADAM Modules (+10 and +30 VDC)
ADAM Series Utility software
ADAM Isolated RS-232/RS-485 Converter (optional)
ADAM Repeater (optional)
Host Computer: Any computer or terminal that can output in ASCII format over either RS-232 or RS-485 can be connected as the
host computer. When only RS-232 is available, an ADAM RS-232/RS-485 Converter is required to transform the host signals to the
correct RS-485 protocol. Since this module is not addressable by the host, the baud rate must be set using a switch inside the module. The factory default setting is 9600 baud. The converter also provides opto-isolation and transformer-based isolation to protect
your equipment.
Power Supply: ADAM Module operation is guaranteed when using a power supply between +10 and +30 VDC. All power supply
specifications are referenced at the module connector. When modules are powered remotely, the effects of line voltage drops must be
considered. All modules use on-board switching regulators to sustain good efficiency over the +10 and +30 V input range, therefore
one can assume that the actual current draw is inversely proportional to the line voltage. Select power cables according to the number
of modules connected and the length of the power lines.
Figure 135 Generic Connections for the 4000 Series ADAM Module
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–190
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ADAM Utility Software: A menu-driven program is provided for ADAM Module configuration, monitoring and calibration. GMC-I
Messtechnik GmbH ships ADAM Modules with the necessary Windows driver and Utility software disk.
ADAM Repeater: When communication lines exceed 4,000 ft (1200 meter) or the number of ADAM modules connected is more than
32, a repeater should be connected to expand the first segment. Up to 8 Repeater modules can be connected allowing connection of
up to 256 ADAM modules.
Figure 136 ADAM 4080 Module to KYZ Box Connection
For more information on ADAM Module setup, installation and configuration:
Refer to the ADAM 4000 Series User’s Manual for more details on how to configure, set up and install the ADAM modules. The Windows driver and the Utility disk for the ADAM-4000 Series are shipped along with the ADAM 4000 Series User’s Manual, Copyright
©1997 Advantech Co., Ltd. The user’s manual can also be accessed online at http://service.advantech.com.tw/download/Files/1A2XID/Adam-4000_ed7.pdf
ADAM Instrument and Communications Handler Setup
The ADAM handler supports the Advantech ADAM 4000 and 5000 series of distributed general purpose I/O modules. All input modules are supported through the ADAM instrument handler. Relay output functions for notifications are set as part of the communications handler. At this time only input modules are supported with the exception of the notification feature.
14.1.2
ADAM 4060 Contact Closure Module Setup
The ADAM 4060 relay contact closure module is used to signal notifications to designated recipients. Data for the ADAM modules may
be configured in various format, one of which is the hexadecimal format. The procedure below describes how to set up the optional
ADAM contact module to relay notifications to designated recipient.
☞
Note
Only those with admin privileges may set whether to dispatch notifications or not. Users who access the Encore Series Software system as Guest, Viewer or Operator are not allowed to dispatch notifications nor change time settings when notifications
will be sent to recipients.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The RS232 cable between COM1 or COM2 on the InfoNode/PC InfoNode/DualNode and the ADAM 232 to 485 converter is wired 'straight' (as in GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH 8010 PQNode) i.e. not null Modem.
There is no need to set up an ADAM 4060 or 5060 DataNode. It is just an alarm feature programmed in the Recipients
section.
Using the setup functions under Setup Page, set the unit up as a recipient. Recipients determine who will receive notifications.
Enable the Dispatch Notifications field in the Recipients setup screen. Go to Setup Page - Notifications > Recipients >
General tab. See section Recipients on page 48 for more information on the Recipients - General properties tab.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–191
5.
☞
The Hex value in the ADAM 4060 tab is the given HEX value of the particular 4060 viz 01. Go to Setup Page - InfoNode
> Notifications > Recipients > ADAM 4060 tab (see sample screen below).
The relay (1-4) HEX address is chosen from the drop down box in the recipient section. For example, Relay 1 is 0001
and is HEX 01; Relay 4 is 1000 and is HEX 8.
Note
It takes approximately 4 seconds for a test transmission to close the relay and around 3.5 minutes for a rms sag
to be alarmed.
See section Recipients on page 48 for more information on the Recipients - ADAM 4060 properties tab.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–192
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
14.1.3
ADAM 4060 tab
Enabling ADAM Communications
The Active control must be checked for any communications to ADAM modules to occur. All ADAM communications will occur on the
indicated port. Set the COM Port that will be used for ADAM modules. Only one ADAM RS-485 and RS-232 network on one COM port
is supported. The ADAM 4060 relay contact closure module is used to signal notifications to a third-party system (i.e. SCADA, BMSBuilding Management System, etc.) that can only accept relay contacts as input. This portion of the setup allows for global setup of the
properties that will be common to all uses of the single 4060 allowed on the system.
Hexadecimal Address
The Hex (Hexadecimal) Address property specifies the address of the 4060. The Contact Logic property allows specification of the
logic "sense" of the messages to be sent. The default value of "Positive" (or Normally Open) means that a logical value of "1" is a closed
contact and a logical "0" is an open contact. "Negative" (or Normally Closed) logic means the opposite: logical "1" is an open contact
and logical "0" is closed. The Contact Pulse Time specifies how long the contacts should be actuated to signal the notification.
14.2
Template and DataNode Tabs
The General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes (chapter 7.3 General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes through the Encore Series
Software Setup Page on page 79) and Using the Template Function in DataNode Setup (chapter 7.4 Using the Template Function in
DataNode Setup on page 82) provide important background information for DataNode setup. Read these sections before continuing
on with the discussion below.
Template Setup tabs - All tabs except Template are the same as that of its associated DataNode tabs. From the Template setup tab
shown below, you can set the name and description of the template. This tab also contains a list of all of the DataNodes of the same
type as the template. Each DataNode in the list has a checkbox that indicates if the template is associated with the respective DataNode. When you associate a template with a DataNode, all of the setup values from the template are copied to the DataNode's setup
values. Thereafter, any change that you make to the template is copied to all of the DataNodes associated with the template.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–193
DataNode Setup tabs - All setup parameters except for those on the Identification and Status, Communication, and Polling tabs are
part of the template. The setup values on these tabs (e.g. DataNode name, IP address, polling rate, etc.) are not affected by the
changes to Templates.
Encore Series Software supports a wide variety of ADAM modules to fit various applications. See chapter 14.2.4 Module Type tab on
page 196 for the list of available ADAM modules supported by the Encore Series Software. Right-click on the ADAM DataNode and
click on Add DataNode to add your particular ADAM module. Select the ADAM DataNode site name and the ADAM properties will be
displayed on the right window. Polling rate for ADAM modules typically last from 2 to 5 seconds (not a guaranteed rate). Use the tabs
across the bottom of the page to select the appropriate group of programmable features. The parameters available in each tab are discussed in detail in the next section.
14.2.1
Identification and Status tab
The Identification and Status tab contains identification and health status description of the DataNode.
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION includes the Name and Description which users can assign for a particular DataNode type. Simply
click on the Name or Description value field and the cursor is set for users to type in the space provided. Description typically
describes the place where the DataNode hardware is located. Users are allowed to enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters under the
Name and Description fields. The Serial Number and Version of the DataNode hardware are automatically set by default. This instrument-specific information is available only for viewing and cannot be altered or changed from the Encore Series Software.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–194
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
STATUS INFORMATION properties includes Health status, whether the DataNode system is functioning normally or not. It also
includes status of Encore Series Software to DataNode Communications.
Polling Status is also displayed, indicating when the Encore Series Software last requested data from the DataNode and when the
next poll is scheduled to take place.
Template users may also associate this DataNode with the settings from a template.
Remember to click the Save Setup button found at the bottom of the page to save any changes that have been done. To aid users, a
Save confirmation window appears after changes have been made and when users are about to switch to a different tab.
14.2.2
Communication tab
COMMUNICATION parameters for ADAM DataNode include the following:
Active which indicates whether communications between the Encore Series Software and DataNode is enabled. When checked, this
means that the DataNode is actively communicating and exchanging information with the software. When making changes in the different value settings of a DataNode, it is recommended to uncheck the Active box again. Also when adding a new DataNode, the
Active box should be checked last to establish link with the DataNode site. Click on the Home page to see which DataNodes are
actively communicating with the Encore Series Software.
Connection can be through Serial Port COM 1 thru COM 255 (Hardware or Virtual ports) or Modem as installed and recognized by the
Windows operating system. Set the COM Port that will be used for ADAM modules. Only one ADAM RS-485 and RS-232 network on
one COM port is supported. The ADAM communications handler is configured to use a specific serial port on the Encore Series.
Address must be a unique address between 1 and 99 for each DataNode. However, if only one DataNode is connected to the COM
port and the present address is unknown, zero (0) can be used. If the connection is via Modem as opposed to Serial Port, then the
telephone number would be entered before the “/” separating the device address.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–195
14.2.3
Polling tab
POLLING SCHEDULE parameters include Enable scheduled polling, which indicates whether scheduled polling of the DataNode
should take place. When checked, this means that the Encore Series Software will poll the DataNode for new information according to
a defined schedule. This includes a Start at date and time, a Repeat every numerical value, and Repeat units which can be minutes,
hours, days, weeks, or months. The Maximum number of retries can be specified along with the Time to wait between retries (in
minutes).
OPERATIONS PERFORMED AT EACH POLL include a Download and store data check box to enable the Encore Series Software to
retrieve data stored in the DataNode.
OPERATIONS PERFORMED ONLY ONCE AT THE NEXT POLL include checkboxes to enable/disable: Send settings to DataNode use to match DataNode setups with those listed in the Encore Series Software, and Delete data in DataNode - use to remove stored
data in the DataNode.
14.2.4
Module Type tab
The ADAM Module drop down property allows selection of the desired module from the available module types.
The Module Type tab is used to set the Module address. Module Address property is used to specify the RS-485 address where
ADAM 4000 series modules will be found. For ADAM 5000 series modules, this is the address of the 5000 or 5000e chassis. The 5000
Series Slot Number is used to indicate the position of the module in the chassis. Positions start at 0.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–196
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
The following ADAM modules are supported:
4000 Series
4017
8 Channel Analog Input
4018
8 Channel Thermocouple/General Analog Input
4018M 8 Channel Thermocouple/General Analog Input with memory
4050
7 Channel Digital Input/8 Channel Digital Output (Output not supported)
4052
8 Channel Digital Input (6 differential, 2 single ended)
4053
16 Channel Digital Input
4080
2 Channel Counter/Frequency Module (up/down counter mode only)
5000 Series
5000
4 Slot Chassis
5000E 8 Slot Chassis
5017
8 Channel Analog Input
5018
7 Channel Thermocouple/General Analog Input
5050
16 Channel Digital Input/Output (Output not supported)
5051
16 Channel Digital Input/Output
5052
8 Channel Isolated Digital Input
5080
4 Channel Counter/Frequency Module (up/down counter mode only)
14.2.5
Module tab
Once the Module type has been selected, the remaining tabs apply to the specific Module selected. The Module tab is module-specific
and tabs vary depending on module type.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–197
14.2.6
Channel tab (for Thermocouple/General Analog Input Modules - ADAM 4018, 5018)
When a general purpose analog input module or thermocouple module with voltage or current range is selected the Channel Tab contains the following properties.
The tab shows each channel available for the selected module and range. The channels are labeled Channel 0 through Channel n
where n is the number of channels available. By selecting one of the entries in the list, you will be setting the parameters for that channel.
The Enable property signals that the selected channel is to be monitored and stored.
The Channel Name property is used to label and select this channel in other interfaces in the Encore Series Software. Any arbitrary
name with up to 80 characters can be specified .
The Quantity Measured, Characteristic and Units properties are used to define the channel type in the Encore Series Software
database. An example might be Voltage (Quantity Measured), Instantaneous Sampled (Characteristic), and Volts (Units).
The Channel Scale property specifies the number used to scale the value read from the ADAM Module. This depends on the transducers that are measuring the real signal. For instance, a speed sensor might output 1 Volt per 50 rpm which would give a Channel
Scale of 50.
The Channel Offset property allows an offset to be applied to the signal measured from ADAM module. This must be specified in
scaled units. If a pressure transducer were to output 0 volts at 1000 mbar and you desire a reading of 1000 mbar, specify 1000 for the
offset assuming the appropriate scale was specified in the Channel Scale to convert input signal to mbar.
The Averaging Interval property is used to tell the system how often to store values for this unit. The signals are sampled as quickly
as the system can depending upon the number of instruments attached. The data is aggregated into minimum, maximum and average
values over the averaging period and stored at the end of the interval.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–198
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
14.2.7
Channel tab (for General Digital Input Modules - ADAM 4050/4052, 5050/5052)
The tab shows each channel available for the selected module. The channels are labeled Channel 0 through Channel n where n is the
number of channels available. By selecting one of the entries in the list, you will be setting the parameters for that channel. Note that
while channels on the ADAM units begin numbering at 0, the channel numbering here begins at 1. Input 0 maps to channel 1, input 1
maps to channel 2, etc.
The Channel Name property is used to label and select this channel in other interfaces of the Encore Series Software. Any arbitrary
name with up to 80 characters can be specified.
The Enable property signals that this channel is to be monitored and stored. When the channel is enabled, a steady state trend entry
is made at every transition from low to high or high to low.
The High to low transition trigger property when checked will cause an event to be generated whenever the signal transitions from
a logical 1 to a logical 0.
The Low to high transition trigger property when checked will cause an event to be generated whenever the input signal transitions
from a logical 0 to logical 1.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–199
14.2.8
Channel tab (for Counter Input Modules - ADAM 4080, 5080)
The tab shows each channel available for the selected module and range. The channels are labeled Channel 0 through Channel n
where n is the number of channels available. By selecting one of the entries in the list, you will be setting the parameters for that channel.
The Enable property signals that the selected channel is to be monitored and stored.
The Channel Name property is used to label and select the channel in other interfaces of the Encore Series Software. Any arbitrary
name with up to 80 characters can be specified.
The Data Recording Type property specifies how the data is to be stored. Data storage options are either Interval or Accumulator. For
Interval data, the value of the counter at the beginning of the sampling interval is subtracted from the value of the counter at the end of
the interval. For Accumulator data, accumulated value of the counter is stored.
The Quantity Measured, Characteristic and Units properties are used to define the channel type in the Encore Series Software
database. Selection from these characteristics allows the Encore Series Software to group the channel with appropriate channels during selection, and allow some reports to include the signals measured in more meaningful ways. Sample input values are Voltage (for
Quantity Measured), Instantaneous Sampled (for Characteristic), and Volts (for Units).
The Channel Scale property specifies the number used to scale the value read from the ADAM unit to the value you wish to record.
This depends on the transducers that are measuring the real signal. For instance, a flow sensor might output 5 counts per liter. If the
unit of measure is in liters, the scale would be 1/5 or 0.20.
The Channel Offset property allows an offset to be applied to the signal measured from ADAM module. This must be specified in
scaled units. If a pressure transducer were to output 0 volts at 1000 mbar and you desire a reading of 1000 mbar, specify 1000 for the
offset assuming the appropriate scale was specified in the Channel Scale to convert input signal to mbar.
The Averaging Interval property indicates how often the value should be saved. The values are read as fast as possible to allow trigger checking as specified on the Advanced tab.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–200
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
14.2.9
Thresholds tab
The Thresholds tab is available for all analog and counter modules. It allows the specification of threshold limits for the input channels.
The tab shows each channel available for the selected module and range. The channels are labeled Channel 0 through Channel n
where n is the number of channels available. By selecting one of the entries in the list, you will be setting the thresholds for that channel.
There are four threshold settings available. These are used to specify the four available threshold trigger levels: Low-Low, Low, High,
and High-High. Each threshold can be independently enabled and set.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–201
15
Optional Accessories
The following optional accessories are available to enhance the functions and capabilities of the Encore Series Software.
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Contact GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH Customer Service for the latest information on
options and accessories.
15.1
Internal Software Options
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
15.2
PF Cap Directivity Answer Module: SW-PFCAP
VAR Verifier Answer Module: SW-kVAR (Requires SW-PFCAP - PF Cap Directivity SW Module)
RBM Indices Software Module: SW-RBMI
Radial Line Fault SW Module: SW-RADL
Sag Directivity SW Module: SW-SAG
UPS Verification SW Module: SW-UPSV
Advantech 4000/5000 ADAM Modules: SW-IADAM
GE KV Series of Wattmeters SW Module: SW-GEKV
ADAM Module Accessories
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8 Channel Analog Input: ADAM 4017
8 Channel Thermocouple/General Analog Input: ADAM 4018
8 Channel Thermocouple/General Analog Input w/memory: ADAM 4018M
7 Channel Digital Input/8 ChannelDigital Output: ADAM 4050 (Output not supported)
8 Channel Digital Input (6 differential, 2 single ended): ADAM 4052
16 Channel Digital Input: ADAM 4053
Relay contact closure model: ADAM 4060
2 Channel Counter/Frequency Module (up/down counter mode only): ADAM 4080
4 Slot Chassis: ADAM 5000
8 Slot Chassis: ADAM 5000E
8 Channel Analog Input: ADAM 5017
7 Channel Thermocouple/General Analog Input: ADAM 5018
16 Channel Digital Input/Output: ADAM 5050 (Output not supported)
16 Channel Digital Input/Output: ADAM 5051
4 Channel Isolated Digital Input: ADAM 5052
4 Channel Counter/Frequency Module (up/down counter mode only): ADAM 5080
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter: ADAM 4522
Isolated RS-232 to RS-485 Converter: ADAM 4520
12VDC 820ma power supply: ADAMPWR
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–202
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
APPENDIX A. Quantities Calculated from Periodic Voltage and Current Measurements
Quantity
Defining Equation
Comments
(eq. 1)
S = V RMS ⋅ I RMS
Apparent Power
1
P = ---N
Real Power
N
(eq. 2)
∑
Vi ⋅ Ii
i=1
True Power Factor
PF = P
--S
Total Harmonic
Distortion (THD)
1
= -----X1
N
Vi
Ii
= Samples per cycle
= Voltage at ith sample
= Current at ith sample
(eq. 3)
h max
∑
(eq. 4)
Xh
Xh
= rms voltage or current at harmonic h
hMax = Highest resolved harmonic
2
h=2
h max
(eq. 5)
∑
( Xh ⋅ Wh )
2
h=1
= -----------------------------------------------X RMS
Telephone Influence
Factor
h
W
h
W
h
W
h
W
1
0.5
17
5,100
31
7,820
50
9,670
3
30
18
5,400
33
8,330
53
8,740
5
225
19
5,630
35
8,830
55
8,090
6
400
21
6,050
36
9,080
59
6,730
7
650
23
6,370
37
9,330
61
6,130
9
1,320
24
6,650
39
9,840
65
4,400
11
2,260
25
6,680
41
10,340
67
3,700
12
2,760
27
6,970
43
10,600
71
2,750
13
3,360
29
7,320
47
10,210
73
2,190
15
4,350
30
7,570
49
9,820 83.3
= Harmonic weighting factor from table
840
IT Product
IT = I RMS ⋅ TIF
(eq. 6)
(eq. 7)
Crest Factor
Max X
CF = ---------------- i
X RMS
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Wh
Calculated for voltage by replacing Irms with kVrms
Xi
= Voltage or current at ith sample in one cycle.
Note that CF for sinusoidal wave is 1.414, not 1.0.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–203
APPENDIX B. Summary of Power Quality Variations
Transients
Oscillatory Transient
Impulsive Transient
Decaying Oscillation
Low frequency< 5 kHz
Med. frequency5-500 kHz
High frequency> 500 kHz
Unidirectional
Typical duration< 200 msec
Short Duration
Variations
Sag
Instantaneous ½ - 30 cycles
Momentary ½ - 3 seconds
Temporary 3 sec - 1 min
Long Duration
Variations
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Duration > 1 minute
Interruptions
Momentary
Temporary
Outage
½ - 3 seconds
3 sec - 1 min
> 1 minute
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–204
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Waveform Distortion
Harmonic Distortion
Continuous distortion
2nd - 49nd harmonic components
Noise
High frequency distortion
Broadband spectral
components < 200 kHz
Voltage Fluctuations
Flicker
Intermittent magnitude variations
Frequency components
< 25 Hz
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–205
APPENDIX C. System Parameters Affecting Power Quality and Diagnostic Evaluations
Category
Causes
Impulses
Lightning
Low frequency
transients
Capacitor switching
Medium frequency
transients
Traveling waves from lightning impulses
Capacitor and circuit switching transients
High frequency
transients
Switching on secondary systems
Lightning-induced ringing
Local ferroresonance
Voltage sags
Local and remote faults
Voltage swells
Single-line-to-ground faults
Long duration
voltage variations
Load switching
Capacitor switching
System voltage regulation
Harmonics
Nonlinear loads
Voltage flicker
Arc furnaces and other intermittent loads
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–206
Impacts
Transformer failures
Arrester failures
Customer equipment damage
due to low -side surges
Tripping of ASDs and other sensitive equipment
Voltage magnification at customer capacitors
Failure of customer equipment (transient is coupled
to customer system through transformer winding
capacitances)
Radiated noise may disruptsensitive electronic
equipment
High rate of rise oscillations may cause low voltage
power supplies to fail
Dropouts of sensitive customer equipment
Equipment overvoltages
Failure of MOVs forced intoconduction
Problems with equipment that require constant
steady-state voltage
Misoperation of sensitive equipment
Capacitor failures or fuse blowing
Telephone interference
Lighting flicker
Misoperation of sensitive loads
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
APPENDIX D. Protocols Supported for InfoNode and DataNodes
EPQ DataNodes
Internet Communication Protocols/Ports
HTTP
FTP
SNTP
TELNET
SMTP
SYSLOG
ModBUS/TCP
ISO/TCP
WPT Private
WPT Private
port 80
port 20 and 21
port 123
port 23
port 25
port 514
port 502
port 102
port 38642
ports 38643 and 38644
EPQ DataNodes
High Level/Non-Internet Protocols and Formats
UCA GOMSFE 0.9
over MMS/TCP
normal web requests, replies, file transfers, XML
firmware update
time synchronization
remote management
email protocol
debug logging
ModBUS over TCP/IP
RFC 1006 ISO protocol over TCP/IP
cross trigger protocol
discovery protocol
primary InfoNode to DataNode communication
protocol
event capture format converted to PQDIF in
InfoNode
COMTRADE
InfoNode
Internet Communication Protocols/Ports
HTTP
FTP
ISO/TCP
SNTP
SYSLOG
SMTP
port 80
port 20 and 21
port 102
port 123
port 514
port 25
InfoNode
High Level/NonInternet Protocols and Formats
UCA GOMSFE 0.9
over MMS/TCP
COMTRADE
IEEE 1159.3
XML
Advantech ADAM
ModBUS
MetOne
DBMI 7100
ANSI C18.12
TAP
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
slave only
slave only
for MMS protocol
create only
normal web requests, replies, file transfers, XML
firmware update
RFC 1006 ISO protocol over TCP/IP
time synchronization
debug logging
email protocol
(dependent on installed handlers)
primary InfoNode to DataNode communication
protocol
event capture format converted to PQDIF in
InfoNode read only
PQDIF primary data storage and exchange
format
used for HTTP based information transfer
between InfoNode and client software
RS232 & RS485
serial protocol
RS232 & RS485
serial protocol
RS232
proprietary protocol for meteorological stations
RS232 & RS485
proprietary serial protocol
RS232 & RS485
metering protocol
pager modem protocol
server only
client only
client only
server only
server only
client/server
for MMS protocol
client and server
client and server
master only
master only
master only
master only
master only
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–207
APPENDIX E. Encore Series Network Capabilities
The Encore Series system uses industry standard TCP/IP network communication. Encore Series is configurable to work with most
popular network addressing schemes, including Classes A, B, and C. Most company local area networks or LANs utilize the Class C
addressing scheme. Class C is also well suited for small stand-alone networks. For these reasons, the factory default and the shipped
network settings of the Encore Seriesmakes use of the Class C addressing scheme.
For proper operation, the addressing scheme of the Encore Series devices must match the addressing scheme of the network to
which they are connected. For example, you cannot mix Class C and Class B hosts on thesame physical network.
Description of Networking Classes
IP Addressing
An IP address is a 32-bit number, usually represented in a dotted decimal notation (i.e. 146.34.47.24), which uniquely identifies every
host connected to an internet network.
Each field between the periods is an 8-bit number (called an octet), with values between 0 and 255.
The numbers 0, 127, and 255, however, have special meanings when they appear.
For an unknown address, Zeros are used, i.e. when a machine is requesting that a server assign to it an IP address.
When a machine refers to its own address, 127 is used. The terminology for this is loopback.
To broadcast a packet to every host on a local network, the value 255 is used.
Hosts use these addresses to send each IP packet along to its final destination. Routing is the process of deciding how a particular
packet travels to its final destination.
There are several classes of IP addresses as defined by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force):
Class A- very large networks
Class B - large networks
Class C - small networks
Class D - multicast
Class E - reserved future use
There are two parts to an IP address. Where the division takes place depends on the network class. The first part of the address is the
network address; the remaining part is the host address.
Class A
Class A is for very large networks. The first octet is of the form 0xxxxxxx, which means it can range from 1to 126. Networks of this type
use only the first octet as the network address. This means there can only be 126 Class A Networks. The remaining portion, the next 3
octets or 24 bits, form the host address. This allows 16,194,277 computers on a Class A network. An example of a Class A IP Address
is 10.0.0.0, with a Subnet Mask of 255.0.0.0.
Class B
Class B is for large networks. It is common for universities to have Class B addresses assigned to them. The first octet has the form
10xxxxxx, which can range from 128 to 191. The definition of network address for Class B is the first two octets, which allows 16,382
Class B networks. The last two octets form the host address, allowing 64,009 hosts (remember that 0, 127, and 255 cannot be used)
on each Class B network. An example of a Class B IP Address is 129.10.0.0, with a Subnet Mask of 255.255.0.0.
Class C
Class C is for small networks, where the first octet is of the form 110xxxxx, which can range from 192 to223. The network address
consists of the first three octets, allowing 1,984,279 different Class C networks with only 253 hosts per network. An example of a Class
C IP Address is 192.168.1.0, with a Subnet Mask of 255.255.255.0.
Other Classes
The IP specification states that addresses whose first octet have the form 111xxxxx are 'extended' addresses, reserved for future use.
Since the first three classes were defined, Class D, Multicast, was added to the list.
The Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of the IP address space for private networks:
Class A10.0.0.0- 10.255.255.255 (10/8 prefix)
Class B172.16.0.0- 172.31.255.255 (172.16/12 prefix)
Class C192.168.0.0- 192.168.255.255 (192.168/16 prefix)
Note that by definition, these test network addresses are not routable on the Internet.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–208
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
APPENDIX F. Configuring the Mavosys 10 DataNode for Modem Communication
Mavosys 10 DataNode
The Mavosys 10 DataNode can be configured to communicate with the Encore Series Software running on a computer using analog
or land-based modems (versus GSM/GPRS wireless modems). For communication to operate properly, a compatible modem would
need to be connected to the serial port on the rear panel of the Mavosys 10, as well as to the computer (either internal card-based or
external modem). The recommended modem for the Mavosys 10 is a 61MDM, which is a 56kbps modem.
☞
Note
The Mavosys 10 can collect a large amount of data, depending on how it is set up and on the amount of event activity. Data
size of 10Mbytes per day is not unusual. Downloading this amount of data from a number of Mavosys 10 units through analog
modems may not be practical in larger systems, since download time multiplied by the number of units may exceed the polling
rate. A 56kbps modem will typically download maximum of 3-5kbytes per second, which requires approximately an hour to
download a day's data. The number of waveforms per event and the number of journalled parameters should be limited in such
applications.
Procedure
Configuring the Mavosys 10 DataNode for modem communications consists of five major steps: 1) settingup the modem for use with
the Mavosys 10 unit; 2) configuring the computer to set up Mavosys 10 for direct Ethernet communications; 3) configuring the Mavosys 10 communications for modem operation; 4) setting up the dial-up network for the computer; and 5) Mavosys 10 DataNode setup
in Encore Series Software. Follow the instructions below to configure the system for modem communications.
Step 1: Set up the modem for use with the Mavosys 10 unit.
1.1
Connect the modem to the computer's serial port with a “straight-through” serial cable.
1.2
Use HyperTerminal to connect to the modem with the following settings:
HyperTerminal Settings:
Baud
115200
Data Bits
8
Parity
None
Stop Bits
1
1.3
1.4
1.5
Turn off the ECHO function by typing ATE0 <cr>.
Turn on the RTS/CTS hardware flow control by typing AT&K3 <cr>.
Save the changes to the modem's setup memory by typing AT&W <cr>.
Step 2: Set up the computer for direct Ethernet communication.
☞
Note
This step may be skipped if you already have Ethernet communication with the Mavosys 10.
2.1
2.2
2.3
Connect a “crossover” Ethernet cable (typically orange in color) from the Mavosys 10's RJ45 Ethernet port to the computer’s Ethernet network port
From the desktop, select: Start > Control Panel > Network Connections.
Depending on the type of modem and other communication options in the computer, a screen similar to the example
below will appear. Right-click on the Local Area Connection icon to display menu selection.
Local Area Connection icon
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–209
2.4
Select Properties in menu list to display the Local Area Connection Properties screen shown below.
Enable Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP)
Click on Properties
2.5
Check to enable Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) then click on the Properties button. The following screen will appear:
Enable to enter
your IP address
2.6
Enter default
IP adress
Enter default
Subnet mask
Select Use the following IP address to set up the IP in a range compatible with the range of the Mavosys 10. Once
you click on the radio button, the fields to enter the IP address and Subnet mask will be enabled.
If this is an uninstalled system where the IP of the Mavosys 10 has not been configured by the user, use the default settings shown below.
Default Settings:
IP Address
192.168.0.5
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
2.7
If the IP is already configured on the Mavosys 10, then the first three sets of digits of the IP must be the same. The last
set of number should be in the range of 1 to 255, but not the identical number as the Mavosys 10.
When done configuring the IP address, click on the OK button.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–210
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Step 3: Configure the Mavosys 10 communications for modem operation.
3.1
Open a web browser e.g. Internet Explorer and type in the default IP address (192.168.0.20) in the address bar.
3.2
When done entering IP address, click on the Go button or press return. The Mavosys 10 log-in screen will de displayed.
☞
Enter the user-configured User name and Password.
If the User name and Password have not been configured by the user, use the following default settings: type in admin
for User name and password for Password.
Note
Use lowercase characters when entering user name and password.
3.3
After typing in the user name and password, click on the OK button. The Mavosys 10 Home Page will be displayed.
Setup icon
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–211
3.4
Click on the Setup icon on the left side bar. The Mavosys 10 Setup page will be displayed.
Serial port
settings to
be used for
modem
Select Yes to
enable modem
3.5
3.6
☞
Specify the instrument to which the Serial port settings apply. Click on the Used for down arrow to display the pull
down menu and select Modem (PPP).
Proceed to the PPP setup box and make sure it is Enabled. Click on the Yes radio button.
The DataNode IP and Remote IP are left in their default settings. The PPP Modem Init (initialization) string should also be
left in its default setting.
Note
Use a different modem initialization string if the modem requires something specific.
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
When done setting up the Mavosys 10 for modem operation, press Submit Changes at the bottom of page.
Disconnect the cross-over Ethernet cable from the instrument and the computer.
Reconfigure the computer for normal operation on the LAN, which will usually require restoring the original configurations modified in Step 2.1.
The Mavosys 10 can now be contacted using the Encore Series Software using a dial-up modem.
Step 4: Set the dial-up network for the computer.
4.1
Dial-up networking should be set up on the computer running the Encore Series Software. This will allow the computer
modem to communicate with the Mavosys 10 modem. Dial-up network uses the typical operating system communication functions found in Windows XP or similar operating systems.
4.2
From the desktop, select Start > Control Panel > Network Connections. The Network Connections window will be
displayed.
4.3
Click on Create a new connection on the left side bar.
Click to create
new connection
4.4
Follow the screen prompts for New Connection Wizard.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–212
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
4.4.1 The New Connection Wizard will guide you through the steps to set up network connection. Click on Next to proceed.
4.4.2 Choose what network connection you want to set up. Select the option to Connect to the network at my workplace.
When done, click on the Next button.
4.4.3 Choose how you want to connect to the network. Select Dial-up connection type. When done, click on the Next button.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–213
4.4.4 Enter a name for your network connection setup in the field provided. When done, click on the Next button.
4.4.5 Enter the phone number of the modem that you will use for your dial-up connection. When done, click on the Next button.
4.4.6 Choose the type of connection availability you want for your setup. Select the connection option for Anyone’s use.
When done, click on the Next button.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–214
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
4.4.7 When done completing setup for New Connection Wizard, click on the Finish button.
4.4.8 Once network connection is successfully set up, the network dial-up box will be displayed. Enter the appropriate Username (admin) and Password (password) and save these settings for Anyone who uses this computer. When done,
click on the Dial button to confirm that the connection wizard was performed correctly.
4.5
Once the new site has been created, the new icon representing the information that you entered will appear in the dialup networking list.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–215
Step 5: Set up the Mavosys 10 DataNode in Encore Series Software.
5.1
The Mavosys 10 DataNode can now be added to the Encore Series Software system as a DataNode using modem
communications.
5.2
Dial-up networking name and settings are automatically detected by the Encore Series Software and will appear under
the Network Connections folder.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–216
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
5.3
In the setup tree and in the drop-down box under the Communication tab, select the desired dial-up site for the
appropriate DataNode.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–217
APPENDIX G. Glossary
Amp, Ampere
The quantitative unit measurement of electrical current.
Angle between Phases
The phase angle between the Phase Fundamental Voltage and
Current at power line Frequency.
Apparent Phase Power
RMS voltage * RMS current on per phase basis.
Average DPF
Arithmetic average of each phase displacement power factor.
Current
The flow of electricity in a circuit as expressed in amperes. Current refers to the quantity or intensity of electrical flow. See voltage.
Deadband (or Sensitivity)
A value programmed as an incremental/decremental threshold
from the last deadband value that would be recorded as an event,
making it the new value to be compared with.
Delta
A type of connection in a three-phase circuit, often the primary
side of a transformer. A delta connection may or may not have a
neutral conductor.
Demand Interval
Time interval used for the power demand values to be calculated.
The values are updated every sub-interval.
Demand Sub-interval
An interval less than the demand interval, equal to the demand
interval divided by an integer value. Demand calculations are
made every sub-interval, on the values that occured during the
most recent Demand Interval. Values become valid after the first
Demand Interval has expired.
Displacement PF
Cosine of angle between fundamental frequency voltage and current on a per phase basis.
Distortion
An abnormal waveshape.
Distribution
Outside the building, distribution refers to the process of routing
power from the power plant to the users. Inside the building, distribution is the process of using feeders and circuits to provide
power to devices.
Fixed Base
A fixed nominal value that is used with the limits in percent.
Floating Base
The nominal value is the average value over the specified update
interval.
Frequency Deviation
A change in the power frequency lasting from several cycles to
several hours.
Ground
The point at which other portions of a circuit are referenced when
making measurements. Power systems grounding is that point to
which the neutral conductor, safety ground, and building ground
are connected. This grounding electrode may be a water pipe,
driven ground rod, or the steel frame of the building.
High Limit
Set point or threshold above the normal range.
High-High or Very High Limit
Set point or threshold above the high limit.
Hz, Hertz
The frequency of alternating current. The term Hertz is synonymous with cycles per second.
Harmonic
A frequency that is a multiple of the fundamental frequency. For
example, 120 Hz is the second harmonic of 60 Hz, 180 Hz is the
third harmonic, and so forth.
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Harmonic Distortion
Excessive distortion in the voltage or current waveform that introduces harmonic frequencies. Harmonic distortioncan be caused
by electronic loads drawing current in non-sinusoidal waveshapes. It can shorten equipment life and cause serious safety
problems by overheating transformers and conductors.
Hysteresis
An amount by which a threshold is altered to suppress disturbance graphs that would otherwise be triggered by small fluctuations in the measured signal. If hysteresis is used, the threshold is
altered by the specific amount (equal to the hysteresis value) after
an initial disturbanceis triggered until the signal crosses the
altered threshold.
Impulse
Instantaneous voltage deviation which may not affect rms voltage
because of its short time duration. Impulses can be caused by
loads switching on line, loose wires, lightning, static and power
failures. Impulses can cause data disruption and equipment malfunction and damage. See transient.
Instantaneous or Crest Transient
The largest magnitude value in a cycle.
KHz, Kilohertz
1000 Hertz or cycles per second
Line
A current carrying conductor.
Line-to-Line
A given condition between conductors of a multi-phase feeder.
Line-to-Line values for wye circuits
Vab = Van - Vbn; Vbc = Vbn - Vcn; Vca = Vcn - Van
Line-to-Neutral
A given condition between a phase conductor and a neutral conductor.
Load
Any electrical device connected to a power source.
Low-Low or Very Low Limit
Set point or threshold below the low limit.
Low Limit
Set point or threshold below the normal range.
MHz, Megahertz
One million Hertz or cycles per second.
Negative Sequence
The three phase vectors that would make a motor rotate in the
reverse direction. U2a= 1/3 (Ua + a2*Ub + a*Uc), where a* is the
120 degree vector operator, a2* is the 240 degree vector operator.
Net Current
Vector sum of all phase currents, including neutral.
Neutral Conductor
One of the conductors of a three-phase wye system. Sometimes
called the return conductor, it carries the entire current of a singlephase circuit and the resultant current in a three-phase system.
The neutral conductor is bonded to the ground on the output of a
three-phase delta wye transformer.
Peak
The maximum instantaneous measurement of an electrical event.
Peak Detected Transient
High frequency deviation from low frequency or normal sine wave
value in either the positive or negative direction that exceeds programmed limits.
Periodic Reading Interval
Time interval used to periodically record the parameter for trending or time plots.
Phase
The timing between two or more events tied to the same frequency.
Phase Balancing
The practice of placing equal electrical loads on each leg of a
three phase system. See balance and neutral conductor.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–218
Phase Shift
The displacement in time of one periodic waveform relative to
other waveforms.
Positive Sequence
The three phase vectors that would make a motor rotate in the
positive direction. U1a= 1/3 (Ua + a*Ub + a2*Uc), where a* is the
120 degree vector operator, a2* is the 240degree vector operator.
Power
The capacity for doing work. In the electrical environment, this is
usually measured in watts.
Power Factor
Watts divided by volt amperes, or the ratio of actual power to
apparent power.
Power Factor- (true PF)
Watts divided by Volt-amperes on per phase basis (except delta)
and total values.
Power Factor Displacement
The ratio of the power of the fundamental wave, in watts, to the
apparent power on the fundamental wave, in volt-amperes.
Power Quality
The concept of powering and grounding sensitive electronic
equipment in a manner that is suitable to the operation of that
equipment.
Primary
The input winding of a transformer.
Reactive Phase Power
Volt ampere reactive power for individual phases.
Residual Current
Vector sum of phase currents (not including neutral).
RMS, Root Mean Square
The square root of the arithmetic mean of the squares of a set of
electrical amplitudes.
RMS Sag
Low RMS voltage or current excursions below some programmed threshold. Motor starts and faults on the utility system
are two common causes of sags. Sags can cause loads to turn
off and reset circuits to operate unexpectedly.
RMS Swell
High RMS voltage or current excursions above the programmed
threshold. Swells can be caused by voltage regulation problems,
removing loads from the system, or adding loads with stored
energy. Swells can damageequipment or disrupt electronic loads.
RMS Variation
RMS voltage excursions exceeding some programmed threshold.
See RMS sag and/or RMS swell. A change in square root of the
sum of samples squared divided by number of samples (128) that
crosses limit.
Sag
A short term RMS voltage decrease that exceeds an established
lower limit.
Secondary
The output winding of a transformer.
Sequence Imbalance
Negative sequence component divided by positive sequence.
Single Phase
Portions of a power source that represents only a single phase of
the three phases that are available.
Sinusoid
A sine wave.
Surge
See swell.
Swell
A short term voltage increase that exceeds an established upper
limit.
THD, Total Harmonic Distortion
A percentage describing how much a measured waveform differs
from an ideal sine wave.
ENCORE SERIES SOFTWARE–219
Total
The phases used in computing the totals depend on the wiring
configuration and parameter. Typically, wye and delta configurations use the three individual phases, except for power related,
which use the IEEE 1459 equivalent wye method.
Three Phase
An electrical system with three different voltage lines orlegs each
carrying sine waves that are 120 degrees out of phase from one
another.
Threshold
The point within which the measured parameter is said to be
within tolerance.
Total Apparent Power
Square root of (total WATTs squared + total VARs squared).
Total Arithmetic True PF
Total Real Power divided by Total Arithmetic Volt-Amperes.
Total Arithmetic VA
Arithmetic sum of individual phase volt-ampere values.
Total Fundamental Arithmetic VA
Arithmetic sum of the volt amperes of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase.
Total Fundamental Vector VA
Square root of (fundamental frequency component of WATTs
squared + fundamental VARs squared). Total Power Arithmetic
sum of phase Watts. Total Reactive Power Arithmetic sum of
phase VARs.
Total Vector VA
Square root of (total WATTs squared + total VARs squared).
Transformer
A device used for changing the voltage of an AC circuit and/or
isolating a circuit from its power source.
Transient
A subcycle disturbance in the AC waveform that is evidenced by
a sharp, brief discontinuity of the waveform. May be of either
polarity and may be additive to or subtractive from the nominal
waveform.
Trend
A plot of an event characteristic versus time.
True PF
Total Real Power divided by Total VA.
True Phase Poweror Real Power
Measured in watts, of each phase, calculated over 1 second from
cycle-by-cycle power values (voltage sample *current sample).
Not valid for delta configurations.
Volt
The quantitative measurement of electrical force or potential also
called electromotive force.
Voltage
The force of electricity in a circuit as expressed in volts. It is the
measure of work it takes to move a charge through a circuit.
Waveform
The graphic form of an electrical power.
Waveshape Fault
A cycle-to-cycle change in the voltage waveform characteristic. A
waveshape fault may not be large enough or fast enough to have
impulse characteristics, and at the same time, may not add or
subtract significantly from the voltage to create a sag or swell.
Waveshape faults can becaused by loose wiring, switching
between two power sources, etc. Waveshape faults can cause
damage and disruption to all types of loads.
Worst Displacement PF
Displacement PF of phase with largest deviation from 1.
Worst PF
True PF of the individual phase with largest deviation from 1.
Zero Sequence
U0a= 1/3 (Ua + Ub + Uc).
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Erstellt in Deutschland • Änderungen vorbehalten • Eine PDF-Version finden Sie im Internet
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Südwestpark 15
90449 Nürnberg • Germany
Telefon+49 911 8602-111
Telefax +49 911 8602-777
E-Mail info@gossenmetrawatt.com
www.gossenmetrawatt.com
Download PDF